Sie sind auf Seite 1von 590

NMS5LX

6.6.1
Network Management System 5 Linux

User manual

MN.00331.E - 001
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.
Property of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the inter-
national regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen dis-
played is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS®, MS Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
HP®, HP OpenView NNM and HP–UX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle® is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Mozilla Firefox is a Mozilla Foundation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
NMS5LX
Contents

CONTENT OF THE MANUAL ..................................................................................................... 19

GENERAL DESCRIPTION......................................................................................................... 20

NMS5LX SYSTEM ................................................................................................................ 21

Main functionalities ....................................................................................................... 21

Modularity ................................................................................................................... 22

Maps .......................................................................................................................... 24

Equipment managed by NMS.......................................................................................... 24

System release ............................................................................................................ 25

Hardware/software requirements .................................................................................... 25

Maximum number of equipment managed by NMS ............................................................ 25

Maximum number of NMS5UX users................................................................................ 25

LX MAP MANAGER WINDOW ................................................................................................ 26

Menu bar..................................................................................................................... 27

Title bar ...................................................................................................................... 27

Tool bar ...................................................................................................................... 28

Map area ..................................................................................................................... 29

View area .................................................................................................................... 30

New Object area........................................................................................................... 31

Objects ....................................................................................................................... 31
Graphic representation of the object: symbol.............................................................. 32
Symbol items: icon ................................................................................................. 33
Symbol items: name ............................................................................................... 35
Symbol items: check sign ........................................................................................ 35
Symbol items: notes ............................................................................................... 36
Symbol characteristics: behaviour............................................................................. 36
Symbol characteristics: colour .................................................................................. 37
Symbol characteristics: right button function .............................................................. 40
Highlight the remote equipment connected by the physical link ............................... 41
Find Remote window ......................................................................................... 41

Status bar ................................................................................................................... 42


Request Read-Write access to a map ......................................................................... 42

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 1


Platform Status bar....................................................................................................... 43
Display/hide the platform status bar.......................................................................... 44

Indication of the status of Dual Server functionality........................................................... 44

EQUIPMENT WINDOW ......................................................................................................... 45

ALPLUS NODAL WINDOW .................................................................................................... 46

ALCPLUS2 NODAL WINDOW................................................................................................. 47

RING MANAGER WINDOW ................................................................................................... 48

PACKET SERVICE MANAGER MAP WINDOW ............................................................................ 49

NMS5UX USER ................................................................................................................... 50

Relation between LINUX user and NMS5UX user ............................................................... 50

Predefined NMS5UX user ............................................................................................... 50

Characteristics of a NMS5UX user ................................................................................... 50


Username .............................................................................................................. 51
Password ............................................................................................................... 51
Map ...................................................................................................................... 52
Profile ................................................................................................................... 53
Superuser ........................................................................................................ 53
Privileged ........................................................................................................ 53
Advanced......................................................................................................... 53
Normal ............................................................................................................ 54
Entry............................................................................................................... 54
Internet................................................................................................................. 54
Ring/PSM............................................................................................................... 54

Expiry of a NMS5UX user ............................................................................................... 55

Manual login to LX Map Manager window ......................................................................... 55

Function of Inactivity Check - User.................................................................................. 55

ACCESS TO THE MAP (READ-WRITE/READ ONLY) ................................................................... 56

Update of LX Map Manager window in Read Only modality.................................................. 56

Passage from Read Only modality to Read-Write Modality .................................................. 57

Function of Inactivity Check - RW map ............................................................................ 57

Modality of access to the equipment window .................................................................... 57

Modality of access to the nodal window ........................................................................... 58

Modality of access to Ring Manager window ..................................................................... 58

Modality of access to Packet Service Manager Map window................................................. 59

SUPER MAP ....................................................................................................................... 60

DUAL SERVER CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................... 61

PROCEDURES ......................................................................................................................... 62

START/CLOSE THE GUI ....................................................................................................... 63

Start-up of NMS GUI ..................................................................................................... 63

First start-up of NMS5LX GUI ......................................................................................... 65

Closing of NMS GUI....................................................................................................... 66

2 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Automatic closing of NMS GUI ........................................................................................ 66

GRAPHIC REPRESENTATION OF THE NETWORK ...................................................................... 67

Objects predefined for the network representation ............................................................ 67


Container objects.................................................................................................... 67
Network Element objects ......................................................................................... 67
Real NE ........................................................................................................... 67
Virtual NE ........................................................................................................ 68
NE of ALplus Node type ..................................................................................... 68
NE of ALCplus2 Node type .................................................................................. 68
NE of WEB Generic type..................................................................................... 68
Generic Symbol objects ........................................................................................... 69
Link objects ........................................................................................................... 69
Label objects.......................................................................................................... 69
Ring objects ........................................................................................................... 69
PSM Map objects .................................................................................................... 69

Rules for the creation of the objects ................................................................................ 69


NE objects ............................................................................................................. 70
NE objects of ALplus Node type ................................................................................ 70
NE objects of ALCplus2 Node type............................................................................. 71
Container objects.................................................................................................... 71
Ring objects ........................................................................................................... 71
PSM Map objects .................................................................................................... 72

Objects creation - Edit menu .......................................................................................... 72


Examples of network graphical representation ............................................................ 72
Graphical representation of the network in a map.................................................. 73
Network subdivided in more maps....................................................................... 75

Objects creation - Add Network From File functionality ...................................................... 78


Create the file in csv format ..................................................................................... 78
Structure of the csv file ..................................................................................... 78
Rules of the compilation of the csv file ................................................................. 80
Compile the csv file starting from a model ............................................................ 81
Example of use of Add Network From File functionality................................................. 82

Object creation - Auto Discovery functionality................................................................... 85


Network Scan modality............................................................................................ 86
Setting of the parameters for the execution of the Network Scan mode .................... 86
Activation (deactivation) of the Network Scan modality .......................................... 87
NE Wake Up modality .............................................................................................. 88
Setting of the parameters for the execution of the NE Wake Up mode ...................... 88
Activation (deactivation) of the NE Wake Up modality ............................................ 89

EQUIPMENT CONNECTION ................................................................................................... 90

Connection procedure ................................................................................................... 90

Commands for the connection management ..................................................................... 90


Line Test command ................................................................................................. 90
Connect command .................................................................................................. 91
Disconnect command .............................................................................................. 91
Alarm Re-alignment command.................................................................................. 91
Configuration Upload command ................................................................................ 91

Connection status of the equipment ................................................................................ 92


Disconnected status ................................................................................................ 92
Connected status .................................................................................................... 93
Unreachable status ................................................................................................. 93
Maintenance status ................................................................................................. 94

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 3


Local management program WEB LCT ............................................................................. 94
Types of WEB LCT-equipment connection ................................................................... 94
Indication of the presence of the LCT user to the NMS5UX user..................................... 95
Enable/disable the LCT-equipment connection in Configuration modality ........................ 95

Management via Command Line Interface (only for ALFOplus80HD) .................................... 95


Connection CLI-equipment ....................................................................................... 96
Indication of the presence of CLI user to the NMS5UX user........................................... 96

ALARM MANAGEMENT ......................................................................................................... 97

Acquisition of the alarms ............................................................................................... 97

Dynamic display of the alarms........................................................................................ 97

Display of the current alarms and of the alarm history ....................................................... 98

Alarm correlation.......................................................................................................... 98

Saving the alarms......................................................................................................... 99

Alarm severity.............................................................................................................. 99
Change of the alarm severity.................................................................................... 99
Change of the severity of User Input alarms ..............................................................100

Enable/disable the alarms.............................................................................................100

Fleeting alarms ...........................................................................................................101

Acknowledge the alarms ...............................................................................................101

Management of NE Log.................................................................................................102

PERFORMANCE MONITORING MANAGEMENT .........................................................................103

Activation/deactivation of the PM measures.....................................................................103

Acquisition of the results of the PM measures ..................................................................104


PM Polling and transmission of the commands ...........................................................104
PM Polling and activation of LCT-equipment connection ...............................................105

Display of the results of the PM measures .......................................................................105

Saving of the results of the PM measures........................................................................105

MENU AND COMMANDS ........................................................................................................ 106

MAP.................................................................................................................................107

Refresh ......................................................................................................................108
Refresh the LX Map Manager window........................................................................108

Map Properties ............................................................................................................109


Customizing the display settings in the map ..............................................................109

Submap Properties ......................................................................................................110


Associate/remove the background to a container .......................................................110

Import/Export .............................................................................................................111
Copy the objects of a map/container to a different map/container ................................111
Copy the objects of a file to a map/container .............................................................112
Save the objects of a map/container to a file .............................................................112
Compare the objects of different maps/containers ......................................................113
Compare the objects of a file with the objects of a map/container ................................114
Import Export Map window .....................................................................................115

Change Map................................................................................................................116
Change map .........................................................................................................116

4 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Add a map ............................................................................................................116
Delete a map ........................................................................................................117
Change Map window ..............................................................................................118

Exit ...........................................................................................................................119
Close the LX Map Manager window...........................................................................119

EDIT................................................................................................................................120

Add ...........................................................................................................................121
Create Container objects ........................................................................................121
Create Network Element object................................................................................122
Create virtual Network Element objects ....................................................................123
Create Generic Symbols (graphic symbols)................................................................123
Create graphical Link objects...................................................................................123
Create Physical Links objects...................................................................................124
Create Label objects...............................................................................................125
Create Container, NE, graphical Link and Label objects described in a file ......................125
Add a map to a Super-map .....................................................................................125
Add Physical Link window .......................................................................................126
SNMP protocol (information) ...................................................................................127
SNMPv1/v2c....................................................................................................127
SNMPv3..........................................................................................................127

Delete........................................................................................................................128
Delete an object from the map ................................................................................128

Modify/View ................................................................................................................129
Verify/change the parameters of a Container object ...................................................129
Verify/change the parameters of a Network Element object .........................................129
Verify/change the parameters of a Generic Symbol object ...........................................130
Verify/change the label of a Physical Link object ........................................................130
Verify/modify the E1 channels of a Physical Link object ...............................................131
Verify/modify a Label object ....................................................................................131

Information ................................................................................................................132
Verify the symbol information of a symbol.................................................................132
Manage the informative notes of a NE symbol............................................................132
Information window ...............................................................................................133

Graphical Symbol Properties .........................................................................................134


Display the symbol graphic parameters.....................................................................134

Find ...........................................................................................................................135
Search a symbol in the map ....................................................................................135

Arrange Symbols .........................................................................................................136


Align the symbols ..................................................................................................136

Generate Info for Web..................................................................................................137


Align the information in the databases of RAN and NMS ..............................................137

Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers.............................................................138


Set the size of the containers windows .....................................................................138

VIEW ...............................................................................................................................139

Show/Hide Graphical Links............................................................................................140


Show/hide the graphical links in the map ..................................................................140

Show/Hide Physical Links..............................................................................................141


Show/hide the physical links in the map ...................................................................141

Show Labels/Show Capacity ..........................................................................................142

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 5


Alternate the display of label and capacity on the links of the map................................142

Show/Hide Map Tree ....................................................................................................143


Show/hide the Map area .........................................................................................143

Show/Hide Platform Status ...........................................................................................144


Show/hide the platform status bar ...........................................................................144

Show/Hide Link Label...................................................................................................145


Show/hide the names of the Link objects ..................................................................145

Pan and Zoom.............................................................................................................146

PERFORMANCE..................................................................................................................147

Performance Monitoring Read........................................................................................148


Update the results of the PM measures of the equipment ............................................148

Performance Monitoring................................................................................................149
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (24 hour record) ....................................149
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (15 minute record) ................................150
Graphic Performance Monitoring window ...................................................................151

Old Performance Monitoring ..........................................................................................153


Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (24 hour records - Old PM)......................153
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (15 minute records - Old PM) ..................154

View/Modify P.M. Status ...............................................................................................155


Verify the operating status of the PM measure points for more NE’s of the same type .....155
Filter the display of the PM measure points................................................................155
Activate the PM measures for NE’s of the same type ...................................................156
Deactivate the PM measures for NE’s of the same type ...............................................156
Manage the attributes of a PM measure point ............................................................157
Activate/deactivate a PM measure point for one piece of equipment..............................157
Verify/modify the activation thresholds of PM alarms for one piece of equipment ............158
View/Modify P.M. Status window ..............................................................................159
Attributes Manager window .....................................................................................160

CONFIGURATION...............................................................................................................161

Equipment Info ...........................................................................................................162


Verify the characteristics and the functional status of the equipment ............................162

Software Inventory ......................................................................................................163


Verify the software version of equipment in the map ..................................................163
Verify the units list of equipment in the map ............................................................163
Save/print the list of the equipment/units .................................................................163
Open the equipment window ...................................................................................164
Verify the configuration/functional status of the equipment .........................................164
Update the equipment software ...............................................................................165
Switch the operation of the equipment controller memory benches...............................165
Require the update of the data to the equipment controller .........................................165
Filter/sort the list of the equipment/units ..................................................................166
Export the inventory data in csv format ....................................................................167
NE Software Inventory window ................................................................................168

OAM Status ................................................................................................................169


Verify the characteristics of OAM-FM Domain .............................................................169
Define an OAM-FM Domain......................................................................................169
Remove the OAM-FM Domain ..................................................................................170
OAM Manager window ............................................................................................171
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality (info) ........................................................................172
OAM Ethernet functionality ................................................................................172

6 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


OAM-FM Ethernet functionality implemented for equipment managed by NMS ..........172
OAM-FM Domain ..............................................................................................173
MA.................................................................................................................173
MEP ...............................................................................................................173
MIP ................................................................................................................175
Remote MEPs ..................................................................................................175
CCM...............................................................................................................177
LBM ...............................................................................................................178
LTM ...............................................................................................................179
Example of configuration of an OAM-FM maintenance Domain ................................180

E1 Browser .................................................................................................................182
Verify the status of 2Mbit/s tributaries ......................................................................182
Verify/change the label of a tributary .......................................................................182
Activate/deactivate the use of 2Mbit/s tributaries .......................................................183
Activate/deactivate the loops of 2Mbit/s tributaries ....................................................183
E1 Tributaries management window .........................................................................184

Equipment Port Configuration........................................................................................185


Verify the settings of the communication ports of equipment ......................................185
Display the settings of the PPP communication ports of the selected equipment..............185
Display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of the equipment ...........................186
Verify/change the IP access control list (ACL) ............................................................186
Add a rule to the IP access control list ................................................................186
Remove a rule from the IP access control list .......................................................187
Enable/disable the use of the IP access control list ...............................................187
ACL Management window .................................................................................188
IP access control list (more info) ........................................................................188
Enable/disable the management LAN ports................................................................189
Verify/change the parameters of the supervision ports................................................190
Execute the Ping of the equipment ...........................................................................190
Open a Telnet session ............................................................................................191
Open a SSH session ...............................................................................................191
Display the equipment with Logical Address and Station Id different .............................191
Change the Logical Address of the equipment ............................................................191
Filter/sort the list of the equipment ..........................................................................192
Port Communication Browser window .......................................................................193
Set In - Band / Management Port window .................................................................194

NE PPP Interfaces ........................................................................................................195


Display the settings of the PPP communication ports of the selected equipment..............195

NE Routing Table .........................................................................................................196


Display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of the equipment ...........................196
Add an element to the Routing Table ........................................................................196
Delete an element from the Routing Table.................................................................197
Set or change the IP address used as Default Gateway ...............................................197
Delete the IP address used as Default Gateway..........................................................197
Routing Table window ............................................................................................198
Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info) .........................................................199
Routing Table (Running) ...................................................................................199
Stored Routing Table ........................................................................................199
Default Gateway ..............................................................................................199

Hw Inventory ..............................................................................................................200
Display the hardware of equipment in the map .........................................................200
Save the data to file...............................................................................................201
Save periodically the data to file ..............................................................................202
Deactivate the periodic saving of the data to file ........................................................202

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 7


HW Inventory window ............................................................................................203

NE Backup/Restore ......................................................................................................204
Display the backup files of equipment in the map ......................................................204
Restore the equipment configuration ........................................................................205
Save the equipment configuration (backup)...............................................................206
Lock/unlock a backup file........................................................................................206
NE Backup/Restore window .....................................................................................207
NE Backup/Restore functionality (more info)..............................................................209
Backup operation .............................................................................................209
Restore operation ............................................................................................210

LOCATE............................................................................................................................211

Equipment List Locate ..................................................................................................212


Display the list of the equipment..............................................................................212
Save/print the list of equipment...............................................................................213
Filter/sort the list of the equipment ..........................................................................213
Open the equipment window ...................................................................................214
Verify the configuration/operating status of the equipment ..........................................215
Verify the equipment information .............................................................................215
Verify in which map the symbol of the equipment is present ........................................215
Add/remove a prefix to the logical address of the equipment .......................................215
Delete and rewrite the equipment table ....................................................................216
Verify the results of the PM measures of the equipment ..............................................216
Activate/deactivate one or more PM measures at the same time ..................................217
Update the equipment software ...............................................................................218
Update the equipment software (FAMxc)...................................................................219
Verify/change the status/severity of the alarms and the trap forwarding status ..............220
Verify/change the LCT users list of the equipment ......................................................220
Verify the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to the equipment ..........................................221
Verify the reach ability of the equipment (Line Test) ...................................................221
Connect one or more pieces of equipment .................................................................222
Disconnect one or more pieces of equipment .............................................................222
Re-align the alarms of one or more pieces of equipment .............................................223
Acquire the configuration of one or more pieces of equipment......................................223
Transfer the configuration of the equipment to another equipment of the same type.......224
Start the Command Executor application...................................................................224
Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window ..................................................................225

Proxy Equipment List ...................................................................................................227


Display the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent ....................................227
Verify/change the Proxy configuration parameters of the equipment .............................227
Equipment Managed by Proxy window ......................................................................228

Physical Link Browser...................................................................................................229


Display the list of the physical links relevant to a NE or to a container...........................229
Change the name of a physical link ..........................................................................229
Delete a physical link .............................................................................................230
Find one of the NE’s end of the physical link ..............................................................230
Filter the display of the physical link list ....................................................................230
Physical Link Browser window..................................................................................231
Filter window ........................................................................................................232

COMMAND........................................................................................................................233

Line Test ....................................................................................................................234


Execute the Line Test for one or more pieces of equipment .........................................234
Execute the Line Test for the equipment of one or more containers ..............................235

Connect .....................................................................................................................236

8 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Connect one or more pieces of equipment .................................................................236
Connect the equipment of one or more containers......................................................237

Disconnect..................................................................................................................238
Disconnect one or more pieces of equipment .............................................................238
Disconnect the equipment of one or more containers ..................................................239

Force NE Disconnect ....................................................................................................240


Force the software disconnection of one or more pieces of equipment ..........................240

Ping...........................................................................................................................241
Execute the Ping of the equipment ...........................................................................241

Alarm Re-alignment .....................................................................................................242


Re-align the alarms of one or more pieces of equipment .............................................242
Re-align the alarms of the equipment of one or more containers ..................................243

Configuration Upload....................................................................................................244
Acquire the configuration of one or more pieces of equipment......................................244
Acquire the configuration of the equipment of one or more containers ..........................245

Configuration Download................................................................................................246
Transfer the configuration of equipment to one or more real pieces of equipment ...........246
Transfer the configuration of equipment to one or more virtual pieces of equipment .......247
Configuration Download window ..............................................................................248

Reset Equipment Controller...........................................................................................249


Execute the software reset of the equipment .............................................................249

PMP Clear Alarm Table .................................................................................................250


Transfer to the PMP the default table of the alarms ....................................................250

FAULT..............................................................................................................................251

Network Alarm History .................................................................................................252


Display the history of the alarms in the map..............................................................252
Save/print the alarms list........................................................................................252
Copy the alarms list to a text editor .........................................................................253
Delete the alarms ..................................................................................................253
Acknowledge the alarms .........................................................................................253
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm .......................................................254
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update ..........................................................255
Filter the alarms list ...............................................................................................255
Highlight the symbol of the equipment in the map......................................................256
Verify the time interval between two different alarms .................................................257
Verify the configuration/operating status of the equipment ..........................................257
Sort the alarms list ................................................................................................257
Alarm History Browser window ................................................................................258
Data update modality .............................................................................................260
Modality of recording of the alarms ..........................................................................260

Network Current Alarms ...............................................................................................261


Display the alarms active in the equipment of the map ...............................................261
Save/print the alarms list........................................................................................261
Acknowledge the alarms .........................................................................................262
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update ..........................................................262
Filter the alarms list ...............................................................................................262
Highlight the symbol of the equipment in the map......................................................264
Verify the time interval between two different alarms .................................................264
Verify the configuration/functional status of the equipment .........................................264
Current Alarm Browser window................................................................................265
Data update modality .............................................................................................266

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 9


Old Alarm History ........................................................................................................267
Display the alarm history in the Old History table .......................................................267
Save/print the alarms list........................................................................................267
Copy the alarms list in a text editor..........................................................................268
Filter the alarms list ...............................................................................................268
Highlight the symbol of the equipment in the map......................................................270
Verify the time interval between two different alarms .................................................270
Sort the alarms list ................................................................................................270
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm .......................................................271
Old History Browser window ....................................................................................272

NE Alarm History .........................................................................................................274

NE Current Alarms .......................................................................................................275

NE History Log ............................................................................................................276


Display the list of the NE Log of the equipment ..........................................................276
Create a NE Log ....................................................................................................277
Create more NE Logs at the same time .....................................................................277
Display the content of a NE Log ...............................................................................277
Delete a NE Log.....................................................................................................278
Delete all the NE Logs of equipment .........................................................................278
Delete the alarms stored in the controller of equipment ..............................................278
Save/print the alarms list........................................................................................278
Copy the alarms list to a text editor .........................................................................279
Filter the alarms list ...............................................................................................279
Verify the time interval between two different alarms .................................................281
Sort the alarms list ................................................................................................281
Equipment History Log Management Main Window .....................................................282
NE Logger Browser window .....................................................................................283

NE Command Log ........................................................................................................284


Display the list of the Command Log of the equipment................................................284
Create a Command Log ..........................................................................................284
Create more Command Logs at the same time...........................................................285
Display the content of a Command Log .....................................................................286
Delete a Command Log ..........................................................................................286
Delete all the Command Logs of the equipment .........................................................287
Delete the list of the operations stored in the controller of the equipment......................287
Equipment History Command Log Management Main window.......................................288
NE Command Log (more info) .................................................................................289

Alarm Summary ..........................................................................................................290


Display the summary of the map alarms subdivided by severity ...................................290
Filter the alarms list ...............................................................................................290
Display the alarms stored in the alarm history ...........................................................292
Reset the indication of status change........................................................................292
Set the automatic data refersh ................................................................................292
Siae Alarm Summary window ..................................................................................293

Event Statistics ...........................................................................................................295


Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by time interval ....................................295
Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment .......................................296
Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarm ..............................................296
Delete the alarms ..................................................................................................297
Filter the alarms ....................................................................................................298
NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window .............................................................................299

Transaction Log...........................................................................................................300
Display the list of the operations executed by NMS5UX users .......................................300

10 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Save/print the list of operations...............................................................................300
Delete the operations .............................................................................................301
Filter the list of operations ......................................................................................301
Transaction Browser window ...................................................................................303
Operation recording modality ..................................................................................304

Silenced eq.................................................................................................................307
Display the list of the equipment in silenced status.....................................................307
Force the equipment to exit from silenced status........................................................307
Highlight the symbol of a NE in the map ...................................................................308
Silenced Equipment List window ..............................................................................309
Alarm storm (more information) ..............................................................................310

TOOLS .............................................................................................................................311

Alarm Not. via e-mail - Conf..........................................................................................312


Display the operators enabled to receive alarm notifications via e-mail .........................312
Add an operator ....................................................................................................312
Change the characteristics of the operators ...............................................................313
Delete an operator .................................................................................................314
Activate/deactivate the receipt of alarm notification via e-mail .....................................314
Acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail .....................................314
Create a filter for the alarm notifications via e-mail ....................................................315
Alarm notification - Operator Management window .....................................................316

Alarm Notification via e-mail .........................................................................................317


Acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail .....................................317
Alarm Notification via e-mail functionality .................................................................318

Command Executor .....................................................................................................319


Execute series of SNMP commands stored on file .......................................................319
Display the content of a file of SNMP commands ........................................................320
Display the files of scheduled SNMP commands..........................................................320
SNMP Command Executor window ...........................................................................321

NE Monitoring .............................................................................................................322
Display the list of the measures ...............................................................................322
Create a measure ..................................................................................................323
Display the characteristics of a measure ...................................................................323
Delete a measure ..................................................................................................324
Activate a measure ................................................................................................325
Deactivate a measure.............................................................................................325
Display the results of a measure ..............................................................................325
Save the results of a measure .................................................................................326
Display the results of a measure stored in a file .........................................................326
Save the results of a measure stored in a file ............................................................327
Delete a file ..........................................................................................................327
NE Monitoring window ............................................................................................330
NE Monitoring functionality (more info).....................................................................331

Auto Discovery ............................................................................................................332


Verify the settings of Auto Discovery (Network Scan and/or NE Wake Up) .....................332
Configure and activate the Network Scan modality .....................................................333
Deactivate the Network Scan modality......................................................................334
Configure and activate the NE Wake Up modality .......................................................334
Deactivate the NE Wake Up modality........................................................................335
Save the Auto Discovery configuration......................................................................335
Load the Auto Discovery configuration ......................................................................336
Display the equipment detected by Auto Discovery (Auto Discovery table).....................336
Search the equipment in the Auto Discovery table......................................................336

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 11


Delete one or more pieces of equipment from the Auto Discovery table.........................337
Create manually the object of the equipment present in the Auto Discovery table...........337
Scan Configuration window .....................................................................................338
Network Element Captured window ..........................................................................340

Rmon.........................................................................................................................341
Verify the statistics of an Ethernet port of equipment (RMON statistics).........................342
Activate the count of the RMON statistics for an Ethernet port .....................................342
Deactivate the count of the RMON statistics for an Ethernet port ..................................343
Capture the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port.........................................................343
Save the RMON statistics captured for an Ethernet port ..............................................344
Display the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port ......................................344
Activate the count of the history of the RMON statistics for an Ethernet port ..................346
Deactivate the count of the history of the RMON statistic for an Ethernet port ................346
Save the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port .........................................347
Display the history of the RMON 15 min statistics of an Ethernet port ...........................347
Activate the count of the history of RMON 15 min statistics for an Ethernet port .............348
Deactivate the count of the history of RMON 15min statistics for an Ethernet port ..........349
Save the history of the RMON 15 min statistics of an Ethernet port...............................350
Display the history of the RMON 15 min (Priority/VLAN) statistics of an Ethernet port .....350
Save the history of RMON statistics 15 min (Priority/VLAN) of an Ethernet port ..............351
Verify the enabling and the activation criteria for a RMON counter ................................351
Enable and define the activation criteria for a RMON counter .......................................352
Disable an alarm relevant to a RMON counter ............................................................353
Rmon Statistics Viewer window................................................................................354
Captured Statistics window .....................................................................................356
Rmon History View window .....................................................................................357
Rmon Aggregate History View window ......................................................................360
Rmon Service & Priority History View window ............................................................363
RMon standard (info) .............................................................................................366
RMON Standard ...............................................................................................366
Outline on the operation of RMON standard .........................................................366
Management via NMS .......................................................................................366
Statistics (Statistics group) ...............................................................................367
History of the statistics (History group) ...............................................................367
History of the statistics aggregated on 15 minutes (History (SIAE) group) ...............368
History of RMON statistics aggregated on 15 minutes (Service/Prio) .......................368
Management of RMON alarms (group: Alarm) ......................................................369
Ethernet counters (RMON) ................................................................................371

XML Export .................................................................................................................373


Save the equipment configuration to a XML file..........................................................373
Display the active cronjobs (XML Export) ..................................................................374
Create a cronjob (XML Export).................................................................................375
Delete one or more cronjobs (XML Export) ................................................................375
Display the list of the XML files in a given directory ....................................................375
Display the list of the Log files relevant to the creation of XML files...............................376
Display the list of HTML files obtained from the conversion of XML files .........................376
Convert a XML file to a HTML file..............................................................................376
Display the content of a XML, Log or HTML file...........................................................377
Delete the XML, Log or HTML files ............................................................................379
Send emails with XML, Log or HTML .........................................................................379
XML Configuration Data Export window.....................................................................380
Scheduled Cron Jobs window...................................................................................381
XML Files window...................................................................................................382
Function XML Export (more info)..............................................................................383
Equipment supporting the function XML Export ....................................................383
Data saved in XML file ......................................................................................383

12 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Modality of creation of XML files .........................................................................383
Log File ..........................................................................................................385
Management of XML files ..................................................................................385

Cfg File Download ........................................................................................................386


Download a configuration file on pieces of equipment of the same type .........................386
Configuration Files Download window .......................................................................387

OPTIONS..........................................................................................................................388

Network Severity Code .................................................................................................389


Verify the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific equipment type..............389
Change the network severity of the alarms of a specific equipment type........................389
Siae Events Manager window ..................................................................................390

Equipment Severity Code..............................................................................................391


Verify the alarms characteristics ..............................................................................391
Enable/disable and configure the alarms ...................................................................391
Filter the alarms list ...............................................................................................392
Equipment Severity Code window ............................................................................393

NMS5LX System Users .................................................................................................394


NMS5LX System Users - Superuser ..........................................................................395
Display the list of the NMS5UX users present in all the existing maps......................395
Dreate a new map ...........................................................................................395
Add a NMS5UX user .........................................................................................395
Change the characteristics of the NMS5UX users ..................................................396
Delete a NMS5UX user......................................................................................396
Add a NMS5UX user .........................................................................................397
User Management (Superuser) window ...............................................................398
NMS5LX System Users - Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged user ...............................399
Display the characteristics of the user who opened the map...................................399
Change the password associated to one's NMS5UX user ........................................399
User Management (Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged) window ...........................400

NMS5LX Logged Users..................................................................................................401


Display the list of the NMS5UX users who have a map open ........................................401
Require the logout of a NMS5UX user .......................................................................401
Force the logout of a NMS5UX user ..........................................................................402
Send a message to one or all the NMS5UX users........................................................402
Filter the NMS5UX users list ....................................................................................403
Display the list of the applications active in NMS ........................................................403
Require the closure of a NMS application...................................................................403
Force the closure of a NMS application......................................................................404
Filter the list of NMS applications .............................................................................404
Nms5lx: Logged Users (users list) window ................................................................406
Nms5lx: Logged Users (applications list) window........................................................407

LCT Equipment Users (NE’s of series ALS, ALFOplus, ALFOplus80)......................................408


Display the LCT users list of equipment.....................................................................408
Add a user ............................................................................................................408
Modify a user ........................................................................................................409
Delete a user ........................................................................................................409
LCT User Manager window ......................................................................................410
User management for NE’s of series ALS, ALFOplus and ALFOplus80 (more info) ............411

LCT Equipment Users (ALFOplus80HD and AGS-20) .........................................................412


Display the list of user groups .................................................................................412
Add a user group ...................................................................................................412
Modify a user group ...............................................................................................413
Delete a user group ...............................................................................................414

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 13


Display the user list ...............................................................................................414
Add a user ............................................................................................................414
Modify a user ........................................................................................................415
Delete a user ........................................................................................................415
NE User Manager window........................................................................................416
User management for ALFOplus80HD and AGS-20 (more info) .....................................418

LCT Logged Users ........................................................................................................420


Display the list of the users (WEB LCT and NMS5UX) connected to equipment................420
Force the logout of a LCT user .................................................................................420
Logged Users window .............................................................................................421
LCT and NMS5UX users (more info)..........................................................................421

Remote Element Table .................................................................................................422


Display the remote equipment list of equipment.........................................................422
Add a station to the remote equipment list ................................................................423
Rename a station of the remote equipment list ..........................................................423
Delete a station from the remote equipment list.........................................................423
Add one piece of equipment to the remote equipment list ...........................................424
Add more pieces of equipment at the same time to the remote equipment list ...............424
Change the characteristics of the equipment of the remote equipment list .....................426
Delete equipment from the remote equipment list ......................................................426
Move the equipment within the remote equipment list ................................................427
Save the remote equipment list ...............................................................................427
Restore the remote equipment list from file ...............................................................427
Remote Element Table window ................................................................................428
Remote equipment list (more info) ...........................................................................429
Example of definition of a remote ALplus node in the remote equipment list ..................430
Example of definition of a remote ALCplus2 node in the remote equipment list ...............431

NE Sw/Fw Download ....................................................................................................432


Update the equipment software ...............................................................................432
Update the WEB LCT application ..............................................................................433
Software Download window.....................................................................................434
Equipment software (more info) ..............................................................................435
WEB LCT application (more info)..............................................................................436

Scheduled Sw Dwl Status .............................................................................................437


Display the list of equipment scheduled for the software update ...................................437
Delete one or more NE’s from the list .......................................................................437
Stop the software update........................................................................................438
Save the list of the scheduled equipment ..................................................................438
Schedule the software download ..............................................................................438
Re-read the release of NE firmware ..........................................................................438
Re-execute the software update ..............................................................................439
Switch the memory bench.......................................................................................439
Filter/sort the list of the scheduled equipment ...........................................................440
Scheduling Download window ..................................................................................441
Bench Switch window .............................................................................................443

NE Sw/Fw Release .......................................................................................................444


Display the software version of the equipment ...........................................................444
Update the software of equipment ...........................................................................444
Switch the operation of the memory benches of the controller (equipment) ...................445
Delete the software in the standby memory bench .....................................................446
RelSw window .......................................................................................................447

NE Complete FW Upgrade .............................................................................................448


Schedule the firmware download to the equipment.....................................................448
Customize the procedure for the equipment firmware download ...................................448

14 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Software Download window.....................................................................................450
Procedure Selection window ....................................................................................451
Procedure Details window (read-only).......................................................................452
Procedure Details (creation) ....................................................................................453

Scheduled Complete FW Upgrade ..................................................................................454


Display the scheduling of the equipment firmware download........................................454
Delete the scheduled equipment firmware download...................................................454
Sort the scheduled firmware equipment download procedures .....................................454
Display the equipment information ...........................................................................455
Scheduling Download window ..................................................................................456

FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download ..........................................................................................457


Update the equipment software (FAMxc)...................................................................457
Insert (FAMxc) window ...........................................................................................459
Equipment software (FAMxc) (more info) ..................................................................460

FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status ...................................................................................461


Display the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the software update ...................................461
Delete one or more pieces of equipment from the list (FAMxc) .....................................461
FAMxc Scheduled Software Download window............................................................462

FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Release .............................................................................................463


Display the software version of FAMxc equipment ......................................................463
Switch the operation of the memory benches and to restart a FAMxc ............................463
Equipment Bench Releases window ..........................................................................464

NMS5UX - Secure Management .....................................................................................465


Verify the equipment security configuration ...............................................................465
Change the security protocols managed by the equipment ..........................................465
Set the security parameters of the equipment in Secure mode .....................................466
Set the file transfer protocol....................................................................................467
Save the configuration of the security parameters ......................................................467
NE Security Configuration window ............................................................................468

NMS5UX - Read PM Server Status..................................................................................470

NMS5UX - Feature Keys Mngt........................................................................................471


Display the feature keys present on the NE’s of the current map ..................................471
Download the file of the feature keys to equipment ....................................................472
Feature Keys Manager window.................................................................................473

MISC ...............................................................................................................................474

Alarm History Backup...................................................................................................475


Backup the alarm history ........................................................................................475

Alarm History Restore ..................................................................................................476


Restore the alarm history from disk..........................................................................476
Restore the alarm history from tape .........................................................................476

Alarm History Delete Backup .........................................................................................477


Delete the backup files of the alarm history ...............................................................477

Performance Monitoring Backup.....................................................................................478


Backup of PM measures ..........................................................................................478

Performance Monitoring Restore ....................................................................................479


Restore the PM measures from disk..........................................................................479
Restore the PM measures from tape .........................................................................479

Performance Monitoring Delete ......................................................................................480


Delete the backup files of the PM measures ...............................................................480

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 15


NMS5LX Global Database Backup...................................................................................481
Save the database (backup)....................................................................................481

NMS5LX Global Database Restore ..................................................................................482


Restore the database .............................................................................................482

Proxy Configuration Parameters.....................................................................................483


Add a destination of the SNMP traps.........................................................................483
Delete a destination of the SNMP traps .....................................................................483
Change the password for the SNMP traps ..................................................................484
Proxy Configurator window .....................................................................................485

RING MANAGER ................................................................................................................486

Edit > RM-Add Ring .....................................................................................................487


Create Ring objects................................................................................................487

Edit > RM-Delete Ring..................................................................................................488


Delete a Ring object from the map ...........................................................................488

Edit > RM-Modify/View Ring..........................................................................................489


Verify/change the parameters of a Ring object...........................................................489

Fault > RM-Network Alarm History.................................................................................490


Display the alarm history of the equipment in the Rings ..............................................490
Save the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) .......................................................491
Delete the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History) ..........................................................491
Acknowledge the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History).................................................491
Align the RM alarms to those of NMS (RM-Network Alarm History)................................492
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (RM-Network Alarm History) ..................492
Filter the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) .......................................................492
Sort the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) ........................................................494
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Alarm History)...............495
RM - Alarm History window .....................................................................................496
Acknowledge Information window (RM - Alarm History) ..............................................498
Data update modality (RM-Network Alarm History).....................................................499
Alarm recording modality (RM-Network Alarm History) ...............................................499

Fault > RM-Network Current Alarm ................................................................................500


Display the alarms active in the Ring equipment ........................................................500
Save the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) ......................................................500
Acknowledge the alarms (RM-Network Current Alarm) ................................................501
Align the RM alarms to those of NMS (RM-Network Current Alarm) ...............................501
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (RM-Network Current Alarm) .................501
Filter the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) ......................................................502
Sort the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) .......................................................503
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Current Alarm) ..............504
RM - Current Alarms window ...................................................................................505
Acknowledge Information window (RM - Current Alarms) ............................................506
Data update modality (RM-Network Current Alarm) ....................................................507

Fault > RM-Network Alarm Summary .............................................................................508


Display the summary of the alarm of Ring equipment subdivided by severity .................508
Filter the alarm list (RM-Network Alarm Summary).....................................................508
Open the filter file (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ......................................................510
Save a filter file (RM-Network Alarm Summary) .........................................................510
Delete the filter file (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ....................................................510
Display the alarm history (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ............................................511
Reset the indication of status change (RM-Network Alarm Summary)............................511
Change the title of RM - Alarm Summary window .......................................................511
RM - Alarm Summary window .................................................................................512

16 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Fault > RM-Element Alarm History .................................................................................514

Fault > RM-Element Current Alarm ................................................................................515

Fault > RM-Element Alarm Summary .............................................................................516

Locate > RM-Ring Browser............................................................................................517


Display the list of the Rings managed by the system ..................................................517
Open the Ring Manager window ...............................................................................517
Search and highlight in the map the symbol of a Ring .................................................517
Ring Browser window .............................................................................................518

Locate > RM-Path Browser............................................................................................519


Display the list of the Path present in the Rings of the current map ..............................519
Save the list of the Path .........................................................................................519
Delete one or more Paths .......................................................................................520
Delete the protection of a Path ................................................................................520
Add the protection to a Path....................................................................................521
Activate the management of a Path..........................................................................521
Deactivate the management of a Path ......................................................................521
Switch the names of the Paths associated in a protection ............................................521
Display the active alarms in the Path equipment ........................................................522
Display the alarm history relevant to the Path equipment ............................................522
Display/change/save the information relevant to a Path ..............................................522
Display/change the configuration of a Path ................................................................523
Display/change the configuration of a Path protected..................................................524
Highlight a Path in Ring Manager window ..................................................................525
Highlight the Ring symbol containing a Path ..............................................................525
Filter/sort the list of the Path...................................................................................525
RM - Path Browser window......................................................................................527
RM - Path Description window .................................................................................529
Path: Configuration Parameters window ....................................................................530
Path: Protection Parameters window ........................................................................531

Locate > RM-Equipment Browser ...................................................................................533


Display the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the current map ......................533
Filter the equipment list (RM-Equipment Browser) ......................................................533
Highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant Ring Manager window ..........................534
RM - Equipment Browser window .............................................................................535

PSM.................................................................................................................................536

Edit > Add PSM Map ....................................................................................................537


Create PSM Map objects .........................................................................................537

Edit > Delete PSM Map .................................................................................................538


Delete a PSM Map object from the map ....................................................................538

Edit > Modify/View PSM Map .........................................................................................539


Verify/change the parameters of a PSM Map object ....................................................539

Fault > PSM-Network Alarm History ...............................................................................540


Display the alarm history of the equipment in PSM Map objects ...................................540
Save the alarms list (PSM-Network Alarm History) .....................................................541
Delete the alarms (PSM-Network Alarm History) ........................................................541
Acknowledge the alarms (PSM-Network Alarm History) ...............................................541
Align the PSM alarms to NMS (PSM-Network Alarm History).........................................542
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (PSM-Network Alarm History) ................542
Filter the alarms list (PSM-Network Alarm History) .....................................................542
Sort the alarms list (PSM-Network Alarm History) ......................................................544
Display the alarm acknowledge information (PSM-Network Alarm History) .....................544
PSM - Network Alarm History window .......................................................................545

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 17


Acknowledge Information window (PSM - Network Alarm History) ................................547
Data update modality (PSM-Network Alarm History) ...................................................548
Alarm recording modality (PSM-Network Alarm History) ..............................................548

Fault > PSM-Network Current Alarm ..............................................................................549


Display the alarms active in the equipment in PSM Map objects ...................................549
Save the alarms list (PSM-Network Current Alarm).....................................................549
Acknowledge the alarms (PSM-Network Current Alarm) ..............................................550
Align the alarms of PSM to NMS (PSM-Network Current Alarm) ....................................550
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (PSM-Network Current Alarm) ................550
Filter the alarms list (PSM-Network Current Alarm) ....................................................551
Sort the alarms list (PSM-Network Current Alarm)......................................................552
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (PSM-Network Current Alarm) ............552
PSM - Network Current Alarms window .....................................................................553
Acknowledge Information window (PSM - Network Current Alarms) ..............................554
Data update modality (PSM-Network Current Alarm) ..................................................555

Fault > PSM-Element Alarm History ...............................................................................556

Fault > PSM-Element Current Alarm...............................................................................557

Locate > PSM-Map Browser ..........................................................................................558


Display the list of PSM Map objects managed by NMS .................................................558
Open the Packet Service Manager Map window ..........................................................558
Highlight in the map the symbol of a PSM Map object .................................................558
Filter the list of PSM Map objects .............................................................................559
Service Map Browser window ..................................................................................560

Locate > PSM-Equipment Browser .................................................................................561


Display the list of equipment present in the PSM Map objects of the system...................561
Filter the equipment list (PSM-Equipment Browser) ....................................................561
Highlight the equipment symbol in PSM Manager map ................................................562
PSM - Equipment Browser window ...........................................................................563

HELP ...............................................................................................................................564

About NMS5LX ............................................................................................................565

License Information .....................................................................................................566


Display the detail of the codewords ..........................................................................566

Display Legend............................................................................................................567
Display the legend of the object colours ....................................................................567

NMS5LX Software Module .............................................................................................568


Display the programs constituting the NMS software ..................................................568
Print the list of programs ........................................................................................568
NMS5UX Version window ........................................................................................569

System Administrator...................................................................................................570

Overview....................................................................................................................571

… Manager .................................................................................................................572

APPENDICES ........................................................................................................................ 573

MENUS AND COMMANDS ....................................................................................................574

OPERATIONS LIST .............................................................................................................578

ASSISTANCE SERVICE .......................................................................................................588

18 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


CONTENT OF THE MANUAL

The information contained in this manual refers to NMS5LX supervision system, release 6.6.1.

The release of the supervision system can be checked at the opening of the GUI (Login window) or selecting
Help > About... in LX Map Manager window.

In the User Manual, for ease of writing, the term NMS stands for NMS5LX supervision system, release
6.6.1.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 19


GENERAL DESCRIPTION

NMS5LX system
LX Map Manager window
Equipment window
ALplus nodal window
ALCplus2 nodal window
Ring Manager window
Packet Service Manager Map window
NMS5UX user
Access to the map (Read-Write/Read Only)

20 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


NMS5LX SYSTEM

NMS5LX (Network Management System 5 LinuX) has been developed to monitor and manage telecommu-
nications equipment.
The user can communicate with NMS by means of LX Map Manager window, which represents the NMS GUI
at general level.
The NMS5LX system runs on the LINUX operating system.

Main functionalities

The main functionalities of NMS are the following:

• Monitoring of the equipment connected to the system: dynamic display of the alarm detection and
recording in the alarm history (resident on the machine disk).
The displays stored in the alarm history are related among them: the date/time of alarm detection
and clear are indicated in the same record. The alarm history can be saved and recovered later.
Management of the alarm Log stored in the controller of the equipment: storing of the Log on the
machine, deletion of the Log from the controller.
Management and change of the severity level coupled to every equipment alarm.
Notification via e-mail of the alarm detection.
• Graphic or table representation of the network.
The representation of the network is executed by the user by means of a series of predefined ob-
jects. It is possible to add, delete, move or change the configuration parameters of the objects in
any moment.
The network can be represented in a single map, or subdivided in more maps. The objects of a map
can be saved to file and, then, imported in a different map.
The creation of the objects can be executed by the user by means of one of the following ways:
• Creation of each single object by means of a specific command (see Edit > Add menu).
• Creation of the objects by means of the Add Network From File functionality: automatic cre-
ation of the objects described in a file in csv format.
• Creation of the NE objects by means of the Auto Discovery functionality: detection of the
equipment in the network and not managed yet by NMS, automatic creation and connection
of the discovered NE objects.

• Management of the measures of Performance Monitoring (PM) of all the pieces of equipment con-
nected to the system:
• Activation/deactivation, even contemporary, of the measures for equipment of the same
type.
• Check of the result of the measures in graphic format.
• Store on disk/tape the results. Then, the data can be restored, displayed and saved (subdi-
vided by month) on a file. The saving operation can be executed for a single measurement
of a single equipment or for a measurement of all the pieces of equipment of the same type
in the map.

• Management of equipment software: immediate or scheduled software update for the equipment
connected to the system, check of the software versions.

• Management of the equipment configuration: saving of the equipment configuration to file. Possi-
bility to transfer the configuration to any equipment in the network.

• Management of virtual equipment.

• Automatic execution of predefined sequences of SNMP commands (provided by SIAE MICRO-


ELETTRONICA on customer’s demand).

• Display of the applications (browser, manager, etc.) currently active in NMS.

• Possibility to require or to force the closing of an application program on progress (browser, man-
ager, etc.) of NMS.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 21


• Display of the list of the users connected with the supervisory system. Possibility to require for or
to force the disconnection procedure (logout) of a user. Possibility to forward messages to a single
user or to all the users connected with the supervisory system.

• Management of the list of LCT users stored in every single equipment.

• Access to the system with 5 different user profiles which determine the available commands and
the functions.

• Management of Dual Server configuration of NMS.

• Multiple Map Manager: possibility to create a Super-map including views to more submaps.

• Management of multiple Read-Write accesses to the same map.

• Management of OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) functionality for the configura-
tion of an OAM Domain/Level for a multiple selection of NE’s.

• Creation and management of Ring objects by Ring Manager application.

• Creation and management of Ethernet network services by Packet Service Manager (PSM) applica-
tion.

• Management of the severity and of the forwarding mode of the traps from the Proxy Agents to the
higher level supervision systems.

• Management of the physical links among equipment. Packet Service Manager and Ring Manager lay
over the same topological base managed by the physical link functionality.

• Indication of the status (enabled/disabled) of the feature keys for the equipment managed in NMS.

Modularity

NMS is a modular system composed by a set of main applications which, depending on the type of equip-
ment it must manage or on the type of functionality you wish to implement, one or more applications are
added to.

The group of main applications manages the GUI of NMS at general level (LX Map Manager window)
through which the user can represent graphically the network, manage the connection, check the operating
status, the results of the measures of Performance Monitoring, etc. of the equipment. At this level, the
equipment is considered on its whole.

This manual describes the use of NMS GUI at general level (LX Map Manager window).

The use of equipment GUI changes depending on the equipment type and is reported in the relevant User
Manuals.
For the description and use of the additional application:
• RM, PSM, RAN and GR, refer to relevant documentation.
• PM Data Export, refer to the relevant technical specifications.
• Proxy Agent, refer to Create Network Element object (setting of the Proxy address of the equip-
ment) and to the administrator manual (management of the Proxy Agent application).

Equipment Manager
The equipment additional application (named <equipment type> Manager) has the task to pro-
vide, to NMS5LX GUI, commands and functions typical of the equipment type to manage.
Every equipment additional application manages a specific equipment GUI (Equipment window/
ALplus nodal window/ALCplus2 nodal window) through which the user can, besides checking the
equipment operating status, directly operate in its management checking or changing the con-
figuration parameters and verifying the signal quality parameters. NMS can be provided with
one or more Manager applications according to the equipment types in the managed network.
The access to the GUI at general level takes place at the opening of the LX Map Manager window.
The access to the GUI at equipment level takes place opening the equipment window relevant
to equipment itself. The opening of the equipment window is subjected to the opening of the LX
Map Manager window.

22 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Ring Manager (RM)
The additional application Ring Manager (RM) has the task to provide the NMS GUI with the com-
mands and the functions specific for the configuration and the management of the network
paths (Path) among the PDH and SDH telecommunications equipment.
The application Ring Manager is composed by a part integrated in the menus of NMS GUI (menu
Ring Manager). It allows representing, by means of the Ring objects, the subnetworks of equip-
ment implementing Paths directly in the maps, verifying the operating status of the NE’s/Links/
Paths of the Ring objects and displaying the list of the objects Ring, Path and NE. At this level,
the Ring object is considered as a whole.
From the graphical object Ring, you can access the Ring Manager window which allows repre-
senting and managing the single equipment, Links and Paths of a specific Ring object.
The opening of a Ring Manager window is subjected to the opening of the LX Map Manager win-
dow. Moreover, a Ring Manager window can be opened by more users at the same time only if
the multi Read-Write modality is active (Multi Read write access function).

Packet Service Manager (PSM)


The additional application Packet Service Manager (PSM) has the task to provide the NMS5LX
GUI with commands and specific functions for the configuration and the management of network
services among the radio equipment with Ethernet switch.
PSM application is composed by a part integrated in the menus of NMS GUI (menu PSM) which
allows representing, by means of the PSM Map objects, the subnetworks of equipment which
implement the network services directly in the maps, verifying the functional status of NE’s in
PSM Map objects and displaying the list of the PSM Map and NE objects. At this level, the PSM
Map object is considered as a whole.
From the graphical object PSM Map, you can access the Packet Service Manager Map window
which allows representing and managing the equipment, the (graphical and physical) links and
the Ethernet services belonging to PSM Map object.
The opening of a Packet Service Manager Map window depends on the opening of the LX Map
Manager window. Moreover, a Packet Service Manager window can be opened by more users at
the same time only if the multi Read-Write modality is active (Multi Read write access function).
The Packet Service Manager Map window can be opened only by enabled NMS5UX users (see
Characteristics of a NMS5UX user).

Remote Access NMS5UX


The additional application Remote Access NMS5UX (RAN) allows a NMS5UX user controlling and
managing the equipment connecting, via Internet, to NMS through his own PC and using the
installed O.S. and the browser.
The servlet RAN carries out the connection with NMS and displays the Web page Remote Access
NMS5UX which allows monitoring/managing the map equipment connected to NMS.
The access to the servlet RAN takes place opening the Web page Remote Access NMS5UX, which
can be opened only by an enabled NMS5UX user (see Characteristics of a NMS5UX user).

Geographical Redundancy
The additional application Geographical Redundancy (GR) allows managing the redundancy of
the maps among the different NMS’s in order to keep the supervision/management of the maps
of a malfunctioning system through a different NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX system.
With map redundancy we mean the management, by NMS, of all pieces of equipment associated
to that specific map.
The GM application has been designed to work as part of NMS, in fact its GUI is integrated in
the TMNMENU window (start menu) of NMS GUI.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 23


P.M. Data Export
The additional application P.M. Data Export allows exporting the results of the Performance Mon-
itoring measures relevant to all the pieces of equipment managed by NMS.
Data are exported directly from the tables of NMS database to a file in TLFF format. This oper-
ation can be performed both manually by the user and set as periodic operation.
Moreover the application allows importing the data previously saved to file to the Oracle table
of PM.
The P.M. Data Export application is not provided with a GUI. It is implemented by typing specific
commands entered on the command line of a system terminal window.

Proxy Agent
The additional application Proxy Agent allows dispatching the alarm traps, relevant to the equip-
ment managed by NMS, to an higher level Central Element Manager.
The application Proxy Agent is, in part, integrated in NMS GUI (for the single piece of equipment,
the address of the machine is set, which the Proxy Agent sends the traps coming from the equip-
ment to) and, in part, integrated in the TMNMENU window (start menu) of NMSGUI (activation,
deactivation and management of the application Proxy Agent).

Maps

NMS allows associating a map to every single NMS5UX user. More users can be associated to the same
map.
At the opening of the LX Map Manager window, the map opens associated to the user that executed the
operation.
A map can correspond to the whole equipment network or to a portion of it. In this second case, the user
which the map is associated to, will receive notifications only from equipment contained in his portion of
network.

To manage equipment, it is necessary to create a graphic symbol that represents it. The same symbol can
be created in more maps (creation of more copies of the symbol). In this way, the equipment data are not
duplicated in the database, but all the copies access to the same information.
Moreover, it is possible to save objects of a map in a file and export/import object between maps.

Equipment managed by NMS

NMS5LX release 6.6.1 is able to manage the following equipment:


ALS series radio with ALS IDU (ALS)
ALS series radio with ALS-C IDU (ALS-C)
ALS series radio with AL IDU (AL)
ALS series radio with ALC IDU (ALC)
ALS series radio with AL IDU plus (ALplus)
ALS series radio with ALC IDU plus (ALCplus)
ALS series radio with ALplus2 IDU (ALplus2)
ALS series radio with ALCplus2 IDU (ALCplus2)
ALS series radio with ALCplus2e IDU (ALCplus2e)
ALS series radio with ALCplus2e IDU in XPIC 1+1 configuration (ALCplus2eX)
EL series radio
US series radio
ELFO radio
ALFO radio
ALFOplus radio
ALFOplus80 radio
ALFOplus80HD radio

24 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


SDH N+1 radio

ALplus node
Set of minimum 2 and maximum 3 ALplus pieces of equipment connected by Nodal Bus.
ALCplus2 node
Set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 ALCplus2 and/or ALCplus2e (with Ethernet Enhanced functionality
active) pieces of equipment connected by a TDM Nodal Bus and/or by Ethernet Nodal Bus.

FAMxc 5 RU multiplexer
FAMxc 2.5 RU multiplexer
ADM–1 multiplexer
EXP63 multiplexer
ADM–C multiplexer

PMP system - Point to MultiPoint


By means of a single PMP object, one PMP sector is controlled and managed (together with the master
station, the peripheral station and the optional equipment).

CommServer–S (CS)

IPBOX
AGS10
AGS-20
Switch Loop

System release

The information contained in this manual refers to system NMS5LX release 6.6.1. The release can be
checked at the opening of the GUI (Login window) or selecting the Help > About NMS5LX.

Hardware/software requirements

The detail of the hardware and software requirements of NMS is reported in the administrator manual.

Maximum number of equipment managed by NMS

The maximum number of equipment that can be contemporarily managed by NMS depends on the code-
word required by the customer.

Maximum number of NMS5UX users

The maximum number of NMS5UX users that can open the LX Map Manager window, using the same map
or different maps, depends on the code-word required by the customer.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 25


LX MAP MANAGER WINDOW

When NMS GUI is started, the LX Map Manager window is displayed (example in Fig.1).

First time the NMS window of a new map opens, the Map and View areas are empty (unless the system
has been configured by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA).
In this case, before connecting the equipment, it is necessary to create a Graphic representation of the
network.

The NMS5LX GUI has been developed to be used in Linux environment, therefore it respects the conven-
tions - relevant to the menu arrangement, the window style, the use of the keyboard, of the mouse and
so on - typical of this operating system.

Fig.1 LX Map Manager window

2
1

3 10

7
7

4 7 5

9
6

(1) Menu bar


(2) Title bar
(3) Tool bar
(4) Map area
(5) View area
(6) New Object area
(7) Objects
(8) Status bar
(9) Platform Status bar
(10) Indication of the status of Dual Server functionality (if installed)

26 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Menu bar

Map. It contains the commands for the management of the map: to update the data, to resize the sym-
bols, to manage the background, to change/delete the map, to export/import the elements of a map
to/from another one and to save on a file all the symbols (container, NE, etc.) of the map.
Edit. It contains the commands for the management of the objects: creation, change, deletion, search,
alignment.
View. It contains the commands to hide/show the elements of the LX Map Manager window.
Performance. It contains the commands for the management of the measures of Performance Monitor-
ing (PM) of the equipment.
Configuration. It contains the commands to check the status/operation of one piece of equipment and
the configuration of the software/hardware of the equipment.
Locate. It contains the commands to display and manage, in table format, the equipment and the phys-
ical links.
Command. It contains the commands for the management of the connection between equipment and
NMS and for the execution of the download of the configuration of one piece of equipment to another
equipment.
Fault. It contains the commands for the management of the equipment alarms and for the display of
the history of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users.
Tools. It contains the commands to start the Command Executor application, for the management of
the alarm notification via e-mail, to manage the periodic monitoring of parameters, to manage the sta-
tistics of the Ethernet tributaries, to manage the Auto Discovery and XML Export functionality, to man-
age the configuration files of the equipment.
Options. It contains the commands for the management of the alarm severity, of the NMS5UX/LCT us-
ers, of the list of remote equipment and the commands for the equipment software update.
Misc. It contains the commands to save/recover/delete from disk/tape the alarm history, the results of
the PM measures and the system database and to set the configuration parameters of the SNMP Proxy.
Ring Manager. It contains the commands for the management of the Ring objects. The menu is avail-
able only if Ring Manager application is installed. For the use, refer to the relevant documentation.
PSM. It contains the commands for the management of the PSM Map objects. The menu is available
only if Packet Service Manager application is installed. For the use, refer to the relevant documentation.
Help. It contains the commands to open the on-line manuals of the supervisory system and to check
the list of the software programs composing the software package of NMS.

The selection of a menu item opens a menu that lists a series of commands. Some commands immediately
execute the associated action, others open further menus (items followed by ).

A command displayed white is available. A command displayed grey is not available.


The deactivation of a command can depend on the type of Access to the map (Read-Write/Read Only), on
the equipment type or on the user Profile, which does not foresee the use of the command, or on the fact
that the availability of command available requires to execute first another action as, for example, to select
a symbol.

Title bar

This bar shows the window name (can be configured by the superuser). By default, the name is <company
name - LX Map Manager>.
For description convenience, in this manual the main window of NMS GUI is identified by the wording LX
Map Manager.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 27


Tool bar

Tab.1 Push-buttons (LX Map Manager window)

Description Equivalent command

Closes the LX Map Manager window Map > Exit

Displays the objects at Map level (Map area) -

Displays the objects at parent level (Map area) -

Displays the objects in the last selected container. -

Searches a symbol in the map Edit > Find

(1)
Aligns two or more objects vertically Edit > Arrange Symbols > Vertical

(1)
Aligns two or more objects horizontally Edit > Arrange Symbols > Horizontal

Hides/displays the labels of Link objects View > Show/Hide Link Label

Hides/displays the Map area View > Show/Hide Map Tree

Hides/displays the Platform Status bar View > Show/Hide Platform Status

Creates new equipment Edit > Add > Network Element

Creates a new container Edit > Add > Container

(2)
Creates a physical link Edit > Add > Physical Link

Displays the list of NE’s Locate > Equipment List Locate

Displays the Physical Link Browser window Locate > Physical Link Browser

Displays the results of the PM measures for the selected NE (3) Performance > Performance Monitoring

Displays the alarm history Fault > Network Alarm History

Displays the list of the alarms active on the NE Fault > Network Current Alarms

Executes the Line Test for the selected NE (4) Command > Line Test > Network Element

(4)
Connects the selected NE Command > Connect > Network Element

(4)
Disconnects the selected NE Command > Disconnect > Network Element

(4)
Aligns alarms and configuration for the selected NE Command > Configuration Upload > Network Element

(4)
Aligns the alarms for the selected NE Command > Configuration Upload > Network Element

Decreases the size of the symbols (Zoom 40%) Map > Map Properties (20 pixel)

Sets the size of the symbols to Zoom 70% Map > Map Properties (38 pixel)

Increases the size of the symbols (Zoom 100%) Map > Map Properties (50 pixel)

(1) Push-button available only if at least two objects are selected.


(2) Command available only when exactly two NE’s are selected.

28 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


(3) Push-button available only if one NE is selected.
(4) Push-button available only if at least one NE is selected.

Map area

Overview
Pass from one level to another in the Map area
Objects of the Map area
Display/hide the Map area

Overview
The Map area is the part of the LX Map Manager window where the map objects, created by the
user to represent the equipment network, are displayed (except for Link (graphical), Physical
Link and Label objects).
The display of the map is of tree type, in order to represent also the hierarchical links among
the different items.
The level Map: test map (see Fig.2) represents the highest hierarchical level: Map level. It is
automatically created on the creation of the map and its name corresponds to the name as-
signed by the user to the map. This level cannot be deleted using the commands of the LX Map
Manager window, but it is automatically deleted on the deletion of the map.
The lower levels are represented by containers that can contain more Network Element objects,
Generic Symbol objects, Link objects, Label objects, Container objects), Ring objects and PSM
Map objects. The presence of a Container object automatically creates a hierarchically lower lev-
el (child level) with respect to the current level (parent level), as shown in Fig.2.
The subdivision of the equipment network in containers, and then in levels, allows creating areas
where grouping the equipment and items related by some characteristics, for example geo-
graphical or other.
In this way, when a Container object is selected, in the View area (Map area) only the elements
of the container will be displayed and not all the network elements.
The selection of a container (or of an element contained in it) changes the content of the View
area.
All the objects at the same level are listed in the area Map in alphanumeric order.
Every container (except for the Map level) has one symbol on its side (see Fig.2):
• +. The elements of the container are not displayed in the Map area under the container
itself (collapsed list).
• -. The elements of the container are displayed in the Map area under the container itself
(expanded list).
It is possible to expand/collapse a list selecting the +/- symbol.
The user (independently from his own profile or type of access to the map) can choose to Dis-
play/hide the Map area in any moment.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 29


Fig.2 Map area (LX Map Manager window)

1
3

2
4

(1) Container Map.

(2) Containers of lower level.

(3) Child level of container Map.

(4) Child level of container Map. Parent level of container Cologno M.

(5) Child level of container Milan.

Pass from one level to another in the Map area


To pass to the:
• Higher level (parent level), with respect to that selected and represented in View area,
press or select the container that represents the wished higher level.
• Lower level (child level), with respect to that selected and represented in the View area,
select the container that represents the wished lower level.

To pass to the main window of the map (Map level) press or select the Map:… container.

Objects of the Map area


The characteristics of the objects in the Map area: symbol, check sign, note sign, colour, etc.
are described in the par. Objects.

Display/hide the Map area


To hide the Map area, select View > Show/Hide Map Tree or press .
To display the Map area, when hidden, select View > Show/Hide Map Tree or press .

View area

Overview
Pass from one level to another in the View area
Objects of View area
Background of View area

Overview
The View area is the part of the LX Map Manager window where the objects of the container,
selected in the Map area, are displayed.
For example, if the container Venice is selected in the Map area (Fig.1), the NE objects ADM1,
AL E/W, AL-P1 and the possible Link (graphical), Physical Link and Label objects (not displayed
in the Map area) will be displayed in the View area.
The selected container, once selected the level displayed in the View area, is indicated above
the area itself in the Contents of Map:… field.

30 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


The symbol / separates the levels. For example (Fig.1), the Contents of Map: test map/Venice
field indicates that the objects represented in the View area are present in the test map (parent
level) and in the Venice container (current level).

Pass from one level to another in the View area


To pass to the:
• Higher level (parent level), with respect to that represented in the View area, press .
• Lower level (child level), with respect to that represented in the View area, double click
on the container representing the level you wish to access.
To pass to the main window of the map (Map level) press .

Objects of View area


The characteristics of the objects in the View area: symbol, check sign, note sign, colour, etc.
are described in the par. Objects.

Background of View area


It is possible to Associate/remove the background to a container in such a way that, when the
container is selected, the corresponding background is displayed in the View area besides the
symbols of the container.
A different background can be associated to every container of the same map.

New Object area

The new objects are displayed in this area after their creation, before being moved by the user in the View
area.

Objects

An object is the representation of a network element in NMS GUI.


The NMS5UX user must consider each part of the network as an object. For example, the network on its
whole is an object, the container (sub network, station, sub-station) where the equipment is located is an
object, each single equipment is an object.

All the created objects and the relevant values of the parameters are stored in the database of NMS. They
will be stored until the user deletes them.

Operations
An object can be:
• Created - see commands Edit > Add, Tools > Auto Discovery, Ring Manager > Edit >
RM-Add Ring and Packet Service Manager > Edit > Add PSM Map.
• Deleted - see commands Edit > Delete, Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Delete Ring and
Packet Service Manager > Edit > Delete PSM Map.
• Changed - see commands Edit > Modify/View, Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Modify/View
Ring and Packet Service Manager > Edit > Modify/View PSM Map.
• Moved. To move an object, it is sufficient to select it and, keeping pressed the left mouse
button, move it to the new position.
In the Map area, it is possible to move the objects from a container to the other. In the
View area it is possible to put the object in a new position inside the area (container).
Furthermore, it is possible to select an object in the View area and drag it in a container
of the Map area or vice versa.

On the creation/deletion/change/movement of an object:


• Container, NE, Generic Symbol, Ring or PSM Map, the object is represented/deleted/
changed/moved both in the Map area and in the View area.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 31


• Link (graphical), Physical Link or Label, the object is represented/deleted/changed/
moved only in the View area.

Predefined objects
NMS is provided with a series of predefined objects, which allow the user drawing his network
and providing to the system all the information necessary for the supervision and the monitoring
of every single equipment: Container objects, Network Element objects, Generic Symbol ob-
jects, Link objects, Label objects, Ring objects and PSM Map objects.

Symbol
The graphic representation of the object is the symbol (Graphic representation of the object:
symbol). A symbol is composed by the following elements:
• icon (Symbol items: icon)
• name (Symbol items: name)
• check sign (Symbol items: check sign)
• notes (Symbol items: notes)
and it is characterized by
• behaviour (Symbol characteristics: behaviour)
• colour (Symbol characteristics: colour)
• function of the mouse right button (Symbol characteristics: right button function).

Graphic representation of the object: symbol

When an object is created, its graphic representation in the map is the symbol.

More symbols can correspond to the same object. In fact, if the same object is created more times, no new
object is created, but simply a copy of its graphic representation: that is a new symbol is created. The
symbol of the same object can be created more times in the same map or in other maps as shown in Fig.3.

In the system database, on the creation of the object, the relevant parameter are stored. On the creation
of the next copies (symbols) of the object, the values of the parameters are not inserted again, but the
values already present in the database are used.

To execute an operation, often it is necessary to select the symbol (or the symbols) which you wish to
operate on. The selected symbol is characterized by a dark grey square. A symbol remains selected until
the user selects another symbol.

It is possible to select one or more symbols at the same time clicking the left mouse button and drawing
an area containing the interested symbols or keeping pressed the Ctrl key selecting the symbols.

Fig.3 Relation between object and symbol

Map 1 Map 2 Map 3

Container 1 Container 1
Graphic
representation of Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol
object A in the maps A A A A

Symbol Symbol
A A

Information
about object A in
the database Object A

32 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Symbol items: icon

The icon is the graphic representation of the symbol. Every object of NMS has its own icon, except for the
Label object.
Tab.2 displays the symbol and the relevant icons represented in Map area and View area.
If a NE is connected by a physical link to one or more NE’s present in containers different from the current
one, the system displays the symbol next to the icon of the local NE.

Tab.2 Icon (LX Map Manager window)

Symbol Icon Icon (View area)


(Map area)

Container -
Super-map

Container -
Map

Container

...

Generic
Symbol
.....

Link (graphi- -
cal)

Physical Link -

Label -

Ring

PSM Map

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 33


Symbol Icon Icon (View area)
(Map area)

Network ALS series radio with ALS series radio with ALS series radio with ALS series radio with ALS series radio with
Element ALS IDU/ALS-C IDU AL IDU/ALC IDU AL IDU plus ALC IDU plus ALplus2 IDU

ALS series radio with ALplus ALCplus2 EL US


ALCplus2 IDU node node series radio series radio

ELFO radio ALFO radio SDH N+1 radio FAMxc 5 RU Mult. FAMxc 2.5 RU Mult.

ADM-C Multiplexer ADM-1 Multiplexer EXP63 Multiplexer PMP System COMM. SERVER-S

IPBOX WEB Generic ALS series radio with AGS10 ALFOplus radio
ALCplus2e IDU

ALS series radio with Switch Loop ALFOplus80 radio Radio ALFOplus80HD AGS-20
ALCplus2e XPIC 1+1

Liberator V1000

34 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Symbol items: name

The name (or label) is the string of characters displayed under the icon (View area) or next to the icon
(Map area).
All the objects of NMS has a name defined on the creation of the object. For all the objects the name can
be changed later.
For the (graphical and physical) Link objects, it is possible to hide the name (see Create graphical Link
objects/Create Physical Links objects/Verify/change the label of a Physical Link object).
For Ring objects, the name represents the title of the window opened by the double click on the relevant
symbol.
For PSM Map objects, the name represents a part of the title of the window opened by the double click on
the relevant symbol (window title <PSM Map object name> - PSM Map).

Symbol items: check sign

The check sign is an item that characterizes only the Container and Network Element objects, except for
the virtual Network Elements.

WARNING The display of the check sign, as consequence of given events, in the GUI of NMS can be con-
figured during the system installation.

Network Element objects


Check sign present:
• At least one alarm (current and/or in the alarm history) relevant to the equipment has
not been acknowledged.
To remove the symbol , acknowledge the current alarms (Acknowledge the alarms)
and/or in the alarm history (Acknowledge the alarms).
• The WEB LCT program has connected to the NE at least once in Configuration modality
from the last time that the Equipment window of the equipment has been opened.
WARNING Only for ALFOplus80HD equipment, this condition is valid even of the operator
executes the connection via CLI.
To remove the symbol , open the NE equipment window.
• The last operation of Configuration Upload towards the considered equipment is failed or
presents some errors.
The symbol is automatically removed at the first correctly executed operation of Con-
figuration Upload.

The check sign next to the icon indicates that there is at least ONE of the listed condition. It is
possible to check the status of each condition in the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window
and Information window.
By default, the symbol indicates the status of the condition listed above.
It is possible to change the list of the conditions associating the presence (or absence) of the
symbol to two or to only one of the above mentioned conditions. For example, it is possible
to associate to the check sign only the condition of failed Configuration Upload. The change can
be made only by the Superuser. More information is reported in the administrator manual.

Check sign absent:


• All the (current or historic) alarms of the equipment have been acknowledged.
• WEB LCT has not been connected in Configuration modality from the last time that the
NE equipment window has been opened.
WARNING Only for ALFOplus80HD equipment, this condition is valid even of the operator
executes the connection via CLI.
• The last operation of Configuration Upload to the equipment has been successfully exe-
cuted.

Network Element of ALplus Node type or ALCplus2 Node type objects


Check sign present: at least one NE with is present in the node.
Check sign absent: no equipment with is present in the node.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 35


Container objects
Check sign present: at least a NE or Container object with is present in the relevant con-
tainer.
Check sign absent: no NE or Container object with is present in the relevant container.

Symbol items: notes

The note symbol ( ) is an item that characterizes only the Network Element objects. In detail:
• The presence of the note symbol indicates that there is an informative note written by the user
associated to the symbol.
It is possible to see (change/delete) the note opening the Information window.
• The absence of the note symbol indicates that there is no informative note associated to the
symbol.

Symbol characteristics: behaviour

The behaviour represents the action executed when the user executes a double click on Map area or View
area area. Tab.3 displays for each object the relevant behaviour.

Tab.3 Behaviour of symbol (LX Map Manager window)

Symbol Behaviour (Map/View area)

Container It displays in the View area the objects of the container (child level)

NE (real) If connected at least once, the Equipment window opens

NE ALplus Node type If connected at least once, the ALplus nodal window opens

NE ALCplus2 Node type If connected at least once, the ALCplus2 nodal window opens

The default browser opens the WEB page available at the address set for
NE WEB Generic type
the specific object.

NE (virtual) The Equipment window opens *

Generic Symbol No action is executed

Link (graphical) No action is executed

Physical Link No action is executed

Label No action is executed

Ring The Ring Manager window opens

PSM Map The Packet Service Manager Map window opens

* For virtual equipment, the equipment window is opened only if the configuration of a (real or virtual) NE
of the same type has been transferred to the considered virtual equipment (see Network Element objects
and Configuration Download).

36 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Symbol characteristics: colour

The colour of the icon identifies the connection status or the alarm status of the symbols contained in it.
Tab.4 displays, for each object, the colours that be assumed by the relevant icon and the description of
the condition represented by them.

Tab.4 Colour of symbol (LX Map Manager window)

Symbol Colour Description

Container * Blue In the container:


• There is no equipment in connected status
• There are one or more pieces of equipment in connected status which the pro-
gram LCT is connected in Configuration modality to.
• There are one or more pieces of equipment in maintenance status.

Green In the container there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status.
No NE is alarmed.

Light blue In the container there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where
at least one alarm of Warning severity is active.

Yellow In the container there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where
at least one alarm of Minor severity is active.

Orange In the container there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where
at least one alarm of Major severity is active.

Red In the container there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where
at least one alarm of Critical severity is active and/or one NE in unreachable status.

NE (real) ** Brown The equipment is in Disconnected status

Green The equipment is in Connected status and does not present any alarm.

Light blue The equipment is in connected status and at least one Warning alarm is present.

Yellow The equipment is in connected status and at least one Minor alarm is present.

Orange The equipment is in connected status and at least one Major alarm is present.

Red The equipment is in connected status and at least one Critical alarm is present.

Red with X The equipment is in Unreachable status

Pink *** The equipment is in Maintenance status

White *** LCT is connected to the equipment in Configuration mode.

Only for ALFOplus80HD equipment: at least one user has opened the CLI for the
equipment or is connected to the equipment via LCT.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 37


Symbol Colour Description

NE ALplus Node Brown All the pieces of equipment in the node are in disconnected status
type*
Green All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status. No equipment has
alarm.

Light blue All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status.
The most serious alarm on the equipment of the node is Warning.

Yellow All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status.
The most serious alarm on the equipment of the node is Minor.

Orange All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status.
The most serious alarm on the equipment of the node is Major.

Red All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status.
The most serious alarm on the equipment of the node is Critical.

Or

In the node there is at least one equipment in unreacheable status.

Red with X All the pieces of equipment in the node are in unreachable status.

Pink *** In the node there is at least one piece of equipment in maintenance status.

White *** In the node there is at least one piece of equipment which the LCT program in Con-
figuration modality is connected to.

NE ALCplus2 Node Brown All the pieces of equipment in the node are in disconnected status
type*
Green All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status. No equipment is
alarmed.

Light blue All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status.
The most serious alarm on the equipment of the node is Warning.

Yellow All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status.
The most serious alarm on the equipment of the node is Minor.

Orange All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status.
The most serious alarm on the equipment of the node is Major.

Red All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status.
The most serious alarm on the equipment of the node is Critical.
Or

In the node there is at least one equipment in unreacheable status.

Red with X All the pieces of equipment in the node are in unreachable status.

Pink *** In the pieces of node there is at least one equipment in maintenance status.

White *** In the node there is at least one piece of equipment which the LCT program in Con-
figuration modality is connected to.

38 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Symbol Colour Description

Radio NE of ALS series Brown The two pieces of equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration are in disconnected status.
with ALCplus2e IDU in
XPIC 1+1 configura- Green The two pieces of equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration are in connected status.
tion* No equipment is alarmed.

Light blue The two pieces of equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration are in connected status.
The most serious alarm among the two equipment is Warning.

Yellow The two pieces of equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration are in connected status.
The most serious alarm among the two equipment is Minor.

Orange The two pieces of equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration are in connected status.
The most serious alarm among the two equipment is Major.

Red The two pieces of equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration are in connected status.
The most serious alarm among the two equipment is Critical.

Or

At least one of the two pieces of equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration is in unrea-
cheable status.

Red with X Both the equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration are in unreachable status.

Pink *** At least one of the two pieces of equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration is in mainte-
nance status.

White *** LCT program is connected in Configuration modality to at least one of the two pieces
of equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration.

NE WEB Generic type Brown The colour is fixed and does not represent any status condition.

NE (virtual) Brown The colour is fixed and does not represent any status condition.

Generic Symbol Blue The colour is fixed and does not represent any status condition.

Link (graphical) Black The colour is fixed and does not represent any status condition.

Physical Link Blue The colour is fixed and does not represent any status condition.

Label Black The colour is fixed and does not represent any status condition.

Ring * Blue In the Ring:


• There is no equipment in connected status
• There are one or more pieces of equipment in connected status which the LCT
program in Configuration modality is connected to.
• There are one or more pieces of equipment in maintenance status.

Green In the Ring there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status. No NE has
alarms.

Light blue In the Ring there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Warning severity is active.

Yellow In the Ring there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Minor severity is active.

Orange In the Ring there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Major severity is active.

Red In the Ring there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Critical severity is active and/or one NE in unreachable status.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 39


Symbol Colour Description

PSM Map * Blue In PSM Map:


• There is no equipment in connected status
• There are one or more pieces of equipment in connected status which the LCT
program in Configuration modality is connected to.
• There are one or more pieces of equipment in maintenance status.

Green In PSM Map there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status.
No NE is alarmed.

Light blue In PSM Map there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where at
least one alarm of Warning severity is active.

Yellow In PSM Map there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where at
least one alarm of Minor severity is active.

Orange In PSM Map there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where at
least one alarm of Major severity is active.

Red In PSM Map there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where at
least one alarm of Critical severity is active and/or one NE in unreachable status.

* By default the color of the icon always reflects the colour of the (contained) object with the most serious
condition.
** By default, the colour of the icon always reflects the colour of the most serious alarm on the equipment.
*** This condition is not propagated to the icons of the Containers that contain the NE.

Symbol characteristics: right button function

WARNING The Map:… and SUPER-MAP:... containers (Map level) in the Map area of the LX Map Manager
window is not provided with the right button function.

Selecting a symbol and pressing the right mouse button, a context menu is displayed with the following
commands:
• Open. If selected a:
• Real NE (connected at least once) opens the Equipment window.
• NE ALplus Node type (connected at least once) opens the ALplus nodal window.
• NE ALCplus2 Node type (connected at least once) opens the ALCplus2 nodal window.
• NE WEB Generic type opens the WEB page (via the default browser) available at the ad-
dress set for the specific object.
• Virtual NE opens the Equipment window.
• Container in the View area, displays the objects of the container in the View area.
• Ring opens the Ring Manager window.
• PSM Map opens the Packet Service Manager Map window.
Command available only if a NE, Container, Ring or PSM Map object is selected.
• Delete. It deletes the selected object.
• Properties. It displays/allows modifying the properties of the selected object. The displayed
window changes depending on the considered object.
• Information. It opens the Information window.
Command not available if a Label or (graphical or physical) Link object is selected.
• Equipment Information. It opens the Equipment Information window (see par. Verify the
characteristics and the functional status of the equipment).
Command available only if a NE object is selected.
• NE Current Alarm. It opens the Current Alarm Browser window.
Command available only if a NE object is selected.
• NE History Alarm. It opens the Alarm History Browser window.
Command available only if a NE object is selected.

40 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


• LAN Port Management. It allows configuring the equipment management ports.
Command not available only if a NE object of type ALFOplus80HD is selected.
• Ping. It executes the Ping in order to check the presence and reachability of the selected equip-
ment.
Each Ping command sends the test packet three times. After the selection of the command, the
Ping window is displayed, where the operation progress and the final statistics (number of sent
and received packets, percentage of lost packet, etc.) are displayed.
Command available only if a NE object is selected.
• Telnet. It opens a Telnet connection with the selected equipment.
• SSH. It opens a SSH connection with the selected equipment. Command always displayed, but
operating only if the equipment supports SSH.
• Open CLI. It opens the command line interface. For more information about this
Command available only if a NE object of type ALFOplus80HD is selected.
• Find Remote Equipment. It allows to Highlight the remote equipment connected by the phys-
ical link.
Command available only if a NE object is selected.
• Outgoing Physical Link. It opens the Physical Link Browser window.
Command available only if a NE object is selected.

The heading of the context menu displays the name of the selected symbol.

Highlight the remote equipment connected by the physical link

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the equipment for which you wish to highlight the remote NE connected by the physical link.

2. Press the right button of the mouse and select Find remote equipment.
If the NE has:
• no remote connection, the system displays the message “No remote equipment available”.
• only one remote connection, the command opens the map window where the remote NE is and
selects it. If the remote NE is in the current map window, the command simply selects the re-
mote equipment
• more than one remote connection (even to the same remote NE), the command opens the Find
Remote window. Select the interested remote equipment and press Highlight remote on Map
(or double click on the corresponding row). The system opens the map where the remote equip-
ment is and selects it.

Find Remote window

This window allows highlighting, in the corresponding map, the remote equipment of a physical link.

Parameters
Local Equipment. Logical address (label) of the local NE from which the command has been
launched.
Link Type. Type of physical link.
Local Interface. Physical interface of the link on the local equipment.
Remote Equipment. Logical address (label) of the remote equipment.
Remote Interface. Physical interface of the link on the remote equipment.
Map. Name of the map containing the remote equipment of the link.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 41


Option push-buttons
All. Select to display in the table all the types of physical links present on the local equipment.
Radio. Select to display in the table all and only the physical links of Radio type present on the
local equipment.
Ethernet. Select to display in the table all and only the physical links of Ethernet type present
on the local equipment.
STM-1. Select to display in the table all and only the physical links of STM-1 type present on
the local equipment.
E1. Select to display in the table all and only the physical links of E1 type present on the local
equipment.
NBUS. Select to display in the table all and only the physical links of NBUS type present on the
local equipment.

Push-buttons
Highlight Remote on Map. It opens the map containing the equipment selected in the table
and highlights it.
Cancel. It closes the window without executing any operation.

Status bar

This bar displays:


• Name of the currently open map (Map:…or SUPER-MAP).
• Type of access to the map (Read-Write or Read Only).
• Push-button Read-Write Request: for users not connected in Read Only modality to the map,
it allows Request Read-Write access to a map.
• Name of the user who opened the map (User:…).
• Display status of the name of the (graphical and physical) link objects. In detail:
• Wording [Link Label Off] present: the names of the links are not displayed.
• Wording [Link Label Off] absent: the View area displays the names of the links with pa-
rameter Show Label active (see Create graphical Link objects and Create Physical Links
objects).

The user (independently from his operating level or from the type of access to the map) can-
Show/hide the names of the Link objects in any moment.

WARNING At the opening of the LX Map Manager window, independently from its previous setting, the dis-
play of the names of the link objects is active (the wording [Link Label Off] is not present).

Request Read-Write access to a map

WARNING Push-button available only if the current access to the map is in Read Only modality and one’s
user has profile Privileged, Advanced or Superuser.

1. Press Read-Write Request. If:

Functionality Multi Read-Write active (default)


The map is closed and then re-opened with the Read-Write access.

Functionality Multi Read-Write inactive


• no other user is connected to the same map in Read-Write modality, the modality of map access
immediately changes from Read Only to Read-Write,
• another user is connected to the same map in Read-Write modality, the request message will
be displayed to him. If:
• This second user accepts the request, one’s access modality immediately changes from
Read Only to Read-Write (push-button Read-Write Request is not displayed any more)

42 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


and the access modality of the user who has confirmed the request immediately changes
from Read-Write to Read Only.
• This second user does not accept the request, the refusal message will be displayed on
one’s screen (push-button Read-Write Request remains displayed).

Platform Status bar

At the opening of the LX Map Manager window, independently from its previous setting, the platform status
bar is NOT displayed.

The user (independently from its operating level or access type) can display or hide the platform status
bar in any moment.

Push-buttons
NMS5UX. Opens the window with the status of the processes of NMS.
PROXY. Opens the window with the status of the processes which manage the Proxy Agent.
RING. Opens the window with the status of the processes which manage the Ring Manager ap-
plication.
PSM. Opens the window with the status of the processes which manage the PSM Manager ap-
plication.

Boxes
Alr History Usage. Status and occupation percentage of the alarms in the table Alarm History
of NMS.
Transaction Log Usage. Status and occupation percentage of the list of the operations exe-
cuted by the NMS5UX users in the table Transaction Log of NMS.

The colour of the boxes Alr History Usage and Transaction Log Usage displays the occupation status
of the records in the relevant tables with respect to the maximum available status.
The maximum available status, considered as number of records which can be stored in each table,
and the occupation thresholds which determinate the status can be set by the Superuser. With ref-
erence to the default values of the thresholds, the meaning assumed by the status colours are the
following:
• Green. The records in the specific table occupy less than 70% of the available space.
• Blue. The records in the specific table occupy more than 70% but less than 75% of the avail-
able space.
• Yellow. The records in the specific table occupy more than 75% but less than 80% of the
available space.
• Orange. The records in the specific table occupy more than 80% but less than 90% of the
available space.
• Red. The records in the specific table occupy more than 90% of the available space.
In this condition a message is periodically displayed, warning about the critical situation.
The display of the message and the frequency which it is displayed at can be configured by
Superuser. Default: message display active, frequency: 60 seconds.

Messages
Alarm History occupation exceeded 100%. The Alarm History table has reached the maxi-
mum capacity limit.
In this case, the table stores all the alarms sent by the equipment (even if the limit has been
exceeded). At midnight, the system will delete, only among the alarms raised and then cleared,
the oldest records.
If the table Alarm History contains all alarms active and not cleared yet, the system will NOT
delete any record, even if their number exceeds the maximum set number.

Transaction Log occupation exceeded 100%. The Transaction Log table has reached the
maximum capacity limit.
In this case, all the operations will be stored in the table (even if the limit has been exceeded).
At midnight the system will delete the oldest records.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 43


Display/hide the platform status bar

If the platform status bar is:


• hidden, select View > Show/Hide Platform Status or press to display it;
• displayed, select View > Show/Hide Platform Status or press to hide it.

Indication of the status of Dual Server functionality

WARNING This indication is displayed in the main window only if the Dual Server functionality is installed
in the system (see Dual Server Configuration).

The Dual Server box displays the status of PM server:


• colour green and label Running: PM server works properly.
All the functionalities installed on PM server are available.
• colour red and label Stopped: PM server has stopped its operation.
All the functionalities installed on PM server are not available, an error message is displayed to
inform the operator about this condition.

44 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


EQUIPMENT WINDOW

The double click on the symbol of a Network Element object allows accessing to the GUI at equipment level
(equipment window), which is characteristic for every single type of equipment managed by NMS.

At this level, the user can enter in the equipment to check and change the configuration parameters, to
execute maintenance and test operations.

The detailed description of each single equipment window and of the objects which it contains is reported
in the relevant Equipment User Manual (see … Manager).
The management of each single equipment window is made from a specific application, called <equipment
type> Manager. These application are part of NMS and are provided on request.

For AGS-H, AGS10, AGS-20, ALCplus2e equipment and all the pieces of equipment of ALFOplus family, the
command to open the equipment window displays the WEB Craft Terminal window dedicated to the specific
equipment.
For all the other equipment types, the <equipment type> Manager window is displayed.

The equipment window of a NE can be opened by more users at the same time (see Modality of access to
the equipment window).
The first user that opens the window can verify/change the configuration parameters (Read-Write access).
The other users can only check the parameters (Read Only access).

WARNING What just said is valid only for the Superuser and the users with privileged or advanced profile.
The normal and entry users has always Read Only access to the equipment window, even if they are the
first to open it.

In the equipment window with Read Only access, the alarms are not be dynamically updated. The operator
must request the update, selecting a proper command.
The equipment window can be opened only if the NE has been connected at least once.

What just said is valid only for the objects that represent real equipment.

For the virtual NE’s, the equipment window can be opened after having transferred, at least once, the con-
figuration of a (real or virtual) NE of the same type to the considered virtual equipment.

WARNING The selection of a NE of WEB Generic type does not open the equipment window, because this
object does not represent a real equipment.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 45


ALPLUS NODAL WINDOW

The double click on the symbol of a Network Element object of ALplus Node type allows accessing the GUI
at level of ALplus nodal system.

At this level, the user can enter in the node to verify the status and execute operations on the single equip-
ment constituting the ALplus nodal system as some commands, generally available for the NE objects in
the LX Map Manager window, are present in the nodal window for the node equipment.

Moreover, it is possible to access to the GUI of the single equipment only via the nodal window. In fact, it
is not possible to create in the map a NE object of one piece of equipment which is part of a nodal system.
It is automatically created in the database of NMS when the ALplus Node NE object is created.

WARNING The definition of node (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) MUST be carried
out at local level via the SCT/LMT application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation.

The nodal window can be opened:


• By one user at a time (see Modality of access to the nodal window).
• Only if the node (and then all the pieces of node equipment) have been connected at least once.

The detailed description of the ALplus nodal window is reported in the User Manual ...ALplus Node Manager
(see … Manager).

46 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


ALCPLUS2 NODAL WINDOW

The double click on the symbol of a Network Element object of ALCplus2 Node type allows accessing the
GUI at level of ALCplus2 nodal system.

At this level, the user can enter in the node to verify the status and execute operations on the single equip-
ment constituting the ALCplus2 nodal system as some commands, generally available for the NE objects
in the LX Map Manager window, are present in the nodal window for the node equipment.

Moreover, it is possible to access to the GUI of the single equipment only via the nodal window. In fact, it
is not possible to create in the map a NE object of one piece of equipment which is part of a nodal system.
It is automatically created in the database of NMS when the ALCplus2 Node NE object is created.

WARNING The definition of node (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) MUST be carried
out at local level via the SCT/LMT application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation.

The nodal window can be opened:


• By one user at a time (see Modality of access to the nodal window).
• Only if the node (and then all the pieces of node equipment) have been connected at least once.

The detailed description of the ALCplus2 nodal window is reported in the User Manual ...ALCplus2 Node
Manager (see … Manager).

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 47


RING MANAGER WINDOW

The double click on the symbol of a Ring object allows accessing to the GUI of the Ring Manager applica-
tion: Ring Manager window.

This application has been developed to create, configure and manage the paths among SDH and PDH
equipment. A Path is a bidirectional connection between a source node and a destination node and is iden-
tified by an input channel on the source node and an output channel on the destination node.

The Ring Manager application is integrated in NMS and supports the equipment (Network Element) already
managed by NMS.

The Ring Manager window, relevant to the same Ring object, can be opened by:
• only one user at the same time, if the Multi Read-Write modality is not enabled.
• more users at the same time, only if the Multi Read-Write modality is enabled (default).

For more information, see Multi Read write access function.

The detailed description of the Ring Manager window and of the objects contained in it is reported in the
relevant User Manual.

WARNING The Ring Manager application is optional and is provided on demand.

The Ring Manager window can be opened only by an enabled NMS5UX user (see Add a NMS5UX user/
Change the characteristics of the NMS5UX users).

48 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


PACKET SERVICE MANAGER MAP WINDOW

The double click on the symbol of a PSM Map object allows accessing to the GUI of the Packet Service Man-
ager application: Packet Service Manager Map window.
This application has been developed to create, configure and manage network services among radio equip-
ment with Ethernet tributaries.
PSM application is integrated in NMS and supports equipment (Network Element) of series ALS (AL, ALC,
ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2, ALCplus2e), AGS10, AGS-20 and ALFOplus80HD equip-
ment, and equipment of series ALFO and ALFOPlus already managed by NMS.

The Packet Service Manager Map window, relevant to the same PSM Map object, can be opened by:
• only one user at the same time, if the Multi Read-Write modality is not enabled.
• more users at the same time, only if the Multi Read-Write modality is enabled (default).

For more information, see Multi Read write access function.

The detailed description of the Packet Service Manager application is reported in the relevant User Manual.

WARNING The Packet Service Manager application is optional and provided on demand.

The Packet Service Manager Map window can be opened only by enabled NMS5UX users (see Add a
NMS5UX user/Change the characteristics of the NMS5UX users).

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 49


NMS5UX USER

NMS GUI can be started at the same time on more PCs or terminals connected by an Ethernet connection.

In this way, the display of the information relevant to the equipment network is contemporaneous for all
the terminals and the insertion of the data or the sending of the commands by one user is possible from
all the terminals.

To open a copy of NMS GUI, it is necessary to have a NMS5UX user.


NMS is provided with a Predefined NMS5UX user. In a second moment, it will be possible to create all the
wished NMS5UX users (see Add a NMS5UX user).

Relation between LINUX user and NMS5UX user

The NMS5LX system has been developed to be used with the Linux operating system.

For each NMS5UX user you want to create, it is necessary to create a Linux user. There is a specific con-
nection between them: it is possible to associate a single NMS5UX user to a Linux user.

Then, before creating the NMS5UX user, it is necessary to create the relevant Linux user.
The username and the password defined at the creation of the Linux user will be automatically used by
NMS during the creation of the NMS5UX user.

WARNING It is not necessary to create a Linux user for the Superuser (Predefined NMS5UX user provided
with NMS) because during the installation of NMS a Linux user with nms5ux username and password is
created, which a NMS5UX user with username nms5ux and password nms5ux is associated to.

Predefined NMS5UX user

During the installation of the system, a NMS5UX user is created with the following characteristics:
• Username - nms5ux
• Password - nms5ux
• map - nms5ux
• Profile - Superuser
• Timeout password - Not expired
• Internet - Active (if required by the user the RAN application - see Modularity).
• Ring/PSM - Active (if required by the user the relevant application: Ring Manager/Packet Service
Manager - see Modularity).

Characteristics of a NMS5UX user

Each NMS5UX user is characterized by an Username, a Password, a Map, a Profile, the enabling of Internet
use and Ring/PSM.

Username and password allow the system acknowledging the user as NMS5UX user authorized to start
the GUI.
The same NMS5UX user can open more NMS GUI’s (on different PC’s/terminals or on the same) using the
same username and password.
A map is associated to each user. NMS, at the start-up of the GUI, automatically opens the map associated
to the user that executed the operation.

The profile allows starting the NMS GUI and having determinate commands and functions available.

The Internet enabling allows the use of the RAN application (optional) (see Modularity).

50 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


The Ring/PSM enabling allows the use of the (optional) applications Ring Manager and/or Packet Service
Manager (see Modularity).

Username

Each NMS5UX user is characterized by a name.


The name of the NMS Superuser is defined during the installation of the system.
The name of the other NMS5UX users is automatically set by the system during their creation: the NMS5UX
user is assigned the same name of the Linux user which is associated to.

WARNING If for one’s system the Manual login to LX Map Manager window is active, at the creation of the
NMS5UX user, a username different from that of the relevant Linux user can be defined. Moreover, in this
condition the name of the NMS5UX user can be changed (operation available only to Superuser).

Password

Every NMS5UX user is characterized by a password.


The password of the NMS5UX Superuser user is defined during the installation of the system.
The password of the other NMS5UX users is automatically set by the system during the creation of the
user: the NMS5UX user is assigned the same password of the Linux user which is associated to.

WARNING If for one’s system the Manual login to LX Map Manager window is active, at the creation of the
NMS5UX user the user password must be defined.
Then the Superuser can change its password and the passwords of all other NMS5UX users. If a user should
forget his password, it is necessary to call SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
The privileged, advanced, normal or entry users can change their own password. If a user should forget
his password, the Superuser can define a new one.

Expiry of the password


The expiry of the password is managed by the operating system Linux according to the modes reported in
the relevant documentation.

WARNING Only if the Manual login to LX Map Manager window is active, the management of the expiry of
the password is executed, only for the NMS5UX users, by NMS as described here below.
The NMS5LX system manages the periodic password change, which consists in asking the user the change
of his own password each N days (for example, each 6 months).

The functionality can be activated/deactivated by the system administrator who, if activates the function-
ality, sets the interval between a password change and the next one.
If the functionality is active, 5 days before the expiry of the password, a message is displayed at the open-
ing of NMS GUI, which allows the user changing his own password. In detail, the message:
• Your Password is going to expire on <date>. Please change it, signals that one’s password is
expiring.
This window is displayed 5 days before the expiry of the user password. It will be displayed each
time the user will start the GUI, until when he changes the password or this one expires.
• Password expired. Please change it to login, signals that one’s password is expired.
To open the NMS GUI, it is necessary to change the password.
The activation of the periodic password change does not influence the expiry date of the user, which can
be set during the creation of a NMS5UX user. The two functionalities are independent and can coexist at
the same time.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 51


Map

The map corresponds to a network or to the network part graphically represented and managed by the
system. It can be arranged by the user according to his needs. Each map has its own LX Map Manager
window.
NMS can manage more maps at the same time.

“Map - user” association


It is possible to associate, on the creation of the user, to each NMS5UX user, a map that will
constitute the default map of the user, where he can work.
The access to a map is made via the start of NMS GUI: automatically, the system opens the map
associated to the NMS5UX user who required the start of the GUI.
The Superuser and the users with privileged profile can open their own default map and, then,
change map choosing among those managed by the system (see Change map).
The users with advanced, normal and entry profile can open only one's default map.
More NMS5UX users, who can open and use the map at the same time, can be associated to the
same map (more users can have the same default map).

Multi Read write access function


By default, for the management system the Multi Read-Write access function is enabled: the
Superuser or all the users with privileged or advanced profile can access at the same time to the
same map with Read-Write privileges.
The changes to the map made by an operator will be dynamically displayed to the other opera-
tors connected to the same map. This behaviour is defined during the system installation and
can be configured by SIAE.
If the Multi Read-Write access function is enabled, only the first user who accesses to the map
will have the Read-Write access, all the other users will have Read Only access (see Access to
the map (Read-Write/Read Only)).

WARNING What just said is valid only for the Superuser and the users with privileged or ad-
vanced profile. The normal and entry users has always Read Only access to the map, even if
they are the first to open it.
The max number of NMS5UX users who can access at the same time to the same map depends
on the codeword required by the customer.
The same NE object can be created in more map and/or more times in the same maps. In this
way, on the creation of the first copy of the object in a map, all the parameters of the object
must be set.
On the creation of the successive copies, it will be sufficient to enter the physical or logical ad-
dress and, automatically, the system will set the parameter and will associate the status of con-
nection of the twin object already present in the map.

nms5ux map
During the installation of the system, the nms5ux map is created, associated to the Superuser,
named nms5ux (the name of the Superuser can be changed by the user itself).
This map will result the default map of the nms5ux user but, as all the other maps, it can be
opened also by privileged users and be assigned, as default map, to other users. Then, it will be
possible to create a new map (see Dreate a new map).

52 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Profile

NMS can be started at different operating level.


A group of enabling of commands, execution of operations, etc. corresponds to each level (also called pro-
file).
The profile that characterizes each NMS5UX user is determined on the creation of the user himself.
After his creation, it is possible to change the profile of each NMS5UX user, except for the Superuser.
NMS has 5 operating levels (profiles):
Superuser
Privileged
Advanced
Normal
Entry

WARNING The availability of the commands of the LX Map Manager window depends on the profile of the
NMS5UX user who opened the map.

Superuser

The Superuser can start the NMS GUI relevant to all the maps managed by the system.
In each map, the Superuser can access both in Read-Write and Read Only modality and can verify/set/
change all the parameters.
The detail of the operations that the Superuser can execute in the equipment window is reported in the
specific equipment User Manual.
NMS manages ONLY one Superuser. It is created during the installation of the system. In a second mo-
ment, it will not be possible to delete the user or change his profile.

Privileged

The privileged user can start the NMS GUI relevant to all the maps managed by the system.
In each map, the privileged user can access both in Read-Write and Read Only modality.
The detail of the operations that the privileged user can execute in the equipment window is reported in
the specific equipment User Manual.
At system installation, there is no privileged user. Then, it is possible to create more privileged users.

Advanced

The advanced user can start the NMS GUI relevant to the only map associated to his NMS5UX user (default
map).
The advanced user can access to his map both in Read-Write and Read Only modality.
The detail of the operations that the advanced user can execute in the equipment window is reported in
the specific equipment User Manual.
At system installation, there is no advanced user. Then, it is possible to create more advanced users.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 53


Normal

The normal user can start the NMS GUI relevant to the only map associated to his NMS5UX user (default
map).
The normal user can access to his map only in Read Only modality.
The detail of the operations that the normal user can execute in the equipment window is reported in the
specific equipment User Manual.
On the installation of the system, there is no normal user. Then, it is possible to create more normal users.

Entry

The entry user can start the NMS GUI relevant to the only map associated to his NMS5UX user (default
map).
The entry user can access to his map only in Read Only modality.
In his map, the user can only verify the parameters.
The detail of the operations that the entry user can execute in the equipment window is reported in the
specific equipment User Manual.
On the installation of the system, there is no normal user. Then, it is possible to create more normal users.

Internet

Every NMS5UX user is characterized by the Internet option.


Setting this option determines if the user can use the Remote Access NMS5UX (RAN) application or not
(see Modularity). In detail, if the options is:
• Active. The NMS5UX user can open the Web page Remote Access NMS5UX.
• Inactive. The NMS5UX user cannot open the Web page Remote Access NMS5UX.

The setting of the Internet option for the NMS5UX Superuser user is defined during the installation of the
system and depends on the presence or not, in the installation packet, of the RAN application.
The setting of the Internet option for the other NMS5UX users is defined during the creation of the relevant
user. After the creation of the user, it is possible to change the setting of the Internet option of any NMS5UX
user (operation available only to the Superuser).

Ring/PSM

Every NMS5UX user is characterized by the Ring/PSM option.


The setting of this option determines if the user can use the Ring Manager and/or Packet Service Manager
application or not (see Modularity). In detail, if the option is:
• Active. The NMS5UX user can open the Ring Manager window and/or Packet Service Manager
Map window.
• Inactive. The NMS5UX user cannot open the Ring Manager and/or Packet Service Manager Map
window.

The setting of the Ring/PSM option for the NMS5UX Superuser user is defined during the installation of the
system and depends on the presence or not of the Ring Manager and/or Packet Service Manager application
in the installation packet.
The setting of the Ring/PSM option for the other NMS5UX users is defined during the creation of the rele-
vant user. After the creation of the user, it is possible to change the setting of the Ring/PSM option of any
NMS5UX user (operation available only to the Superuser).

The application:
• Ring Manager, besides the Ring Manager window, is constituted by a part integrated in the men-
us of the NMS GUI (menu Ring Manager).

54 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


The use of commands of Ring Manager menu is not affected by the possible use of the Ring/
PSM option: any NMS5UX user, independently from his setting of the Ring/PSM option, can cre-
ate, delete, etc. a Ring object.
• Packet Service Manager, besides the Packet Service Manager Map window, is constituted by a
part integrated in the menus of the NMS GUI (menu PSM).
The use of commands of PSM menu is not affected by the possible use of the Ring/PSM option:
any NMS5UX user, independently from his setting of the Ring/PSM option, can create, delete,
etc. a PSM Map object.

Expiry of a NMS5UX user

During the creation of a NMS5UX user, it is possible to assign a validity of n days to the relevant user (ac-
count) (see Add a NMS5UX user).

At the expiry of this period, when the NMS GUI is started, the system displays the message Your Account
is expired. Please contact the system administrator.

The display of the message forbids the opening of the LX Map Manager windows.
In order to change one’s user or validity period, contact the Superuser.
If the message is displayed when the Superuser opens the LX Map Manager window, it is necessary to call
SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.

Manual login to LX Map Manager window

As rule, the username and the password of the Linux user with which the terminal is started, determine
even the NMS5UX user with which the NMS5LX GUI is started.
In fact, at his creation the NMS5UX user automatically gets the username and the password of the relevant
Linux user.
This involves the user, in order to access the LX Map Manager window, is asked to enter the username and
the password only at the start-up of the terminal (see Start-up of NMS GUI).

NMS manages the function of manual login to the LX Map Manager window.
This function, is active, allows defining, at the creation of the NMS5UX user, a username and a password
different from those defined for the relevant Linux user.
In this case, the user shall enter, at the start-up of the terminal, the username and the password of the
Linux user and, for the start of the LX Map Manager window, will be asked to enter the username and the
password of the NMS5UX user.

WARNING The function can be activated on demand when the system is installed.

Function of Inactivity Check - User

NMS depends on the function Inactivity Check - User.

The function, if active, allows defining a continue inactivity period which must pass in a NMS session, before
the suspension of this session for inactivity.
Before closing the LX Map Manager window (NMS session) due to inactivity, the message INACTIVITY
CHECK!! If you don’t acknowledge this dialog in x min your session will automatically be closed is displayed.
If the user confirm his presence pressing OK, the session is not closed.
The continue inactivity period (frequency with which the inactivity message is displayed) and the period
during which the warning message is displayed on the screen (value x displayed in the message) can be
configured by Superuser. These settings are valid for ALL the NMS5UX users.

WARNING The function Inactivity Check (User and RW Map) can be activated on demand when NMS is in-
stalled.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 55


ACCESS TO THE MAP (READ-WRITE/READ ONLY)

NMS GUI relevant to a specific map can be started on more PC’s/terminals at the same time.
In order to avoid conflicts between the GUI’s started on different terminals that use the same map, it is
possible to open the LX Map Manager window in two different modalities:
• Read-Write. The user who accesses the map in this modality can add, delete, move the sym-
bols contained in the map and change the characteristics of the symbols.
• Read Only. The user who accesses the map in this modality can control the status of the map
and of the contained symbols, but he cannot create, delete or move any symbol or execute any
change on the symbols.

WARNING The map can be opened in Read Only modality by all the user.

By default, the Superuser and all the users with privileged or advanced profile can access to the same map
in Read-Write modality at the same time. The users with normal and entry profile has always access in
Read Only modality.

If the Multi Read-Write access modality to the map is not enabled, only one user at a a time can access in
Read-Write modality.
This user corresponds to the first authorized NMS5UX user who opens the NMS GUI (then the associated
map) on any of the PCs/terminals.
The users who will connect in a second moment to the same map will have the access in Read Only mo-
dality.
The access modality is displayed in the lower bar of the LX Map Manager window.

WARNING The map can be opened in Read-Write modality only by the Superuser and by the user
with privileged or advanced profile. A normal or entry user, even if he is the first user that ac-
cess to the map, will open the map in Read Only modality.

The availability of the commands of the LX Map Manager window depends on the modality of access to the
map.

Update of LX Map Manager window in Read Only modality

All the changes executed by Read-Write user in a map, are dynamically displayed also in the LX Map Man-
ager window of the users, who have access to the same map, in Read Only modality.

The deletion of a container object from the map is allowed only if the container object is empty.
In this case, if an operator is in the window of the container object when this one is deleted by a second
operator, the first operator is returned back to the root level of the map.
The system does not display any warning message.

An operator can move a container object A (even empty) into another container object B of the same map
even if a second operator has executed the access to the container object A.
In this case, the second operator will see his own working path changed in the string Contents of Map:
above the View area.
The system does not display any warning message.

56 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Passage from Read Only modality to Read-Write Modality

NMS system is provided with the Multi Read-Write function.

The passage from the Read Only modality to the Read-Write modality for a user in a map is different de-
pending on the activation or not of the Multi Read-Write functionality.

Functionality Multi Read-Write active (default)


The user with Read Only access to the map and Privileged, Advanced profile or Superuser can
request in any moment the passage to the Read-Write modality pressing Read-Write Request
in the map window. The map is closed and re-opened with Read-Write access.

Functionality Multi Read-Write not active


If the user, with access to the map of Read-Write type, closes his LX Map Manager window, the
Read-Write access becomes available to all the other users (Read Only) who have opened the
LX Map Manager window relevant to the same map.
The user who wants to change his modality from Read Only to Read-Write must select Map >
Refresh. The first users who updates the map changes his access from Read Only to Read-Write.

WARNING The availability of the Read-Write access is not signalled to the Read Only users.

It is possible Require the logout of a NMS5UX user, Force the logout of a NMS5UX user or Re-
quest Read-Write access to a map whose access is Read-Write. If the user accept the request,
his map is closed and the Read-Write access will be available.

Function of Inactivity Check - RW map

NMS is provided with the function Inactivity Check - RW Map.


The function, if active, allows defining a continue inactivity period which must pass during a NMS5LX ses-
sion with Read Write access to the map (see Access to the map (Read-Write/Read Only)), before the sus-
pension of this session due to inactivity.
Before closing the LX Map Manager [Read-Write] window (NMS session with access to the RW map) due
to inactivity, the message INACTIVITY CHECK!! If you don’t acknowledge this dialog in x min your session
will automatically be closed is displayed.
If the user confirm his presence pressing OK, the session is not closed.
The continue inactivity period (frequency with which the RW inactivity message is displayed) and the period
during which the RW warning message is displayed on the screen (value x displayed in the message) can
be configured by Superuser. These settings are valid for ALL the NMS5UX users with Read Write access.

WARNING The function Inactivity Check - RW Map can be activated on demand when NMS is installed.

Modality of access to the equipment window

The equipment window can be opened by more user at the same time.

In this window, the Read-Write access modality is acquired by the first user who opens the window itself
(independently if his access to the map is Read-Write or Read Only).

All the users, who open later the same equipment window, will have the access in Read Only modality.

WARNING What reported above is valid only for the Superuser and the users with privileged, advanced or
normal profile. The entry users have always Read Only access to the equipment window, even if they are
the first to open it.

The closure of the equipment window is not signalled on video.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 57


It is not possible to request or to force the closure of the equipment window in Read-Write modality, but
it is possible Require the closure of a NMS application or to force the closure of the relative Manager appli-
cation (Force the closure of a NMS application).

For the managers which open the Web Craft Terminal page, the Access box displays the access modality
to the WEB CT Manager page:
• Read & Write (green box). The user who accesses the page in this modality can:
• Verify the equipment configuration parameters.
• Change the equipment configuration parameters (only if the equipment is in connected
status and the WEB LCT program is not connected in Configuration mode).
• Read Only (orange box). The user who accesses to the page in this modality can:
• Verify the equipment configuration parameters.

The access in Read & Write modality for every WEB CT page relevant to the same equipment is assigned
to only one user at a time.
This user corresponds to the first NMS5UX user who opens the WEB CT page in any map managed by NMS.
All the users who will open later the WEB CT page of the same equipment will have the access in Read Only
modality.

WARNING The user will open the relevant WEB CT page in Read Only modality, even if he was the first user
to open the page, when the equipment is in status: disconnected, unreachable, maintenance or connected
with the local connection WEB LCT equipment active in Configuration modality.

For the managers which open the Web Craft Terminal page, the contextual help on-line function is availa-
ble.

Modality of access to the nodal window

The nodal window (ALplus or ALCplus2) can be opened by one user at the same time.
It is not possible to request or to force the closure of the nodal window, but it is possible Require the closure
of a NMS application or Force the closure of a NMS application.

Modality of access to Ring Manager window

The Ring Manager window, relevant to the same Ring object, can be opened by:
• only one user at the same time, if the Multi Read-Write modality is not enabled.
• more users at the same time, only if the Multi Read-Write modality is enabled (default).

For more information, see Multi Read write access function.


Moreover, more Ring Manager windows relevant to different Ring objects can be opened at the same time
by the same user.

It is not possible to request or to force the closure of a Ring Manager window, but it is possible Require the
closure of a NMS application or Force the closure of a NMS application.

58 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Modality of access to Packet Service Manager Map window

The Packet Service Manager Map window, relevant to the same PSM Map object, can be opened by:
• only one user at the same time, if the Multi Read-Write modality is not enabled.
• more users at the same time, only if the Multi Read-Write modality is enabled (default).

For more information, see Multi Read write access function.


Moreover, more Packet Service Manager Map windows relevant to different PSM objects can be opened at
the same time by the same user.

It is not possible to request or to force the closure of a Packet Service Manager Map window, but it is pos-
sible to Require the closure of a NMS application or Force the closure of a NMS application.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 59


SUPER MAP

The super-map is a tool which allows grouping more maps at logical level.

For example, if a telecommunication service provider has more pieces of equipment installed in different
regions of the same country, he can logically subdivide the equipment in as many maps as the regions are
and, to have a global vision, group the maps into a single super-map.

The super-map is a map of maps. The access to the super-map is read-only and the only objects which
can be inserted into a super-map are the container objects “map”.

The content of super-map, and then of the maps contained in it, is dynamically updated according to the
changes made in the source maps.

To create a super-map, the operator can use:


• the button Add Map in the Change Map window.
• the menu command Edit > Create Map in the User Management window.

60 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


DUAL SERVER CONFIGURATION

The configuration of NMS to operate in Dual Server modality is proposed for the management of big tele-
communication networks, including a great number of NE’s (more than 12000) and of users who access at
the same time (more than 25 operators).

The Dual Server architecture consists in two HP-UX servers (Main and PM), connected by a dedicated LAN
cable, where the work load is subdivided in the following way:
• Functionality installed on the Main server:
• Operator login and graphical applications
• Connection to NE’s
• Alarm Management (reception, storing and management)
• NE polling
• Firmware download
• Network Discovery
• Ring Manager and Packet Service Manager
• RAN access
• Collection of backup files
• Functionality installed on PM server:
• Collection of PM TDM
• Collection of PM RMON
• North Bound Interfaces (NBI): Proxy Agent Alarms, Export Tool, TDM/ETH provisioning.

The software installed on the two servers is the same, but only a specific subset of functionalities is acti-
vated on each server.
The presence of the PM server is completely transparent to the operator, except when, ceasing to operate,
the functionalities on the PM server themselves become not accessible to the operator.

The status of the PM server can be displayed by means of the menu command Options > NMS5UX - Read
PM Server Status.

WARNING For more information about the Dual Server configuration and the architecture of the Main and
PM servers, refer to the administrator manual of NMS.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 61


PROCEDURES

Start/close the GUI


Graphic representation of the network
Equipment connection
Alarm management
Performance Monitoring management

62 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


START/CLOSE THE GUI

First time the NMS GUI is opened, after the installation of the system, follow the procedure First start-up
of NMS5LX GUI, next times follow the procedure Start-up of NMS GUI.

The start-up of NMS GUI corresponds to the opening of LX Map Manager window.

It is possible to start more NMS GUI’s on more machines or on the same machine.
The maximum number of NMS GUI’s that can be started at the same time depends on the codeword re-
quired by the user.

Start-up of NMS GUI

WARNING The following procedure presumes that NMS has been already installed on the machine and that
the processes necessary for the start-up of the GUI have been started. The procedure for the installation
and the start-up of NMS is reported in the administrator manual.
We assume that the Linux user and the corresponding NMS5UX user, which you wish to use for the start-
up of the GUI, have been created.

1. Start the machine up (pc, terminal, etc.).


The login window of the Linux operating system opens.

2. Type the name and the password of the Linux user in the relevant boxes.
If you have two or more Linux users, use the name/password of the Linux user associated to the
NMS5UX user that you wish to use to open the map.

3. Press the confirmation push-button.


If the typed data are correct, one's Linux operating system is started-up.

4. Open a terminal window.

5. On the command line, type:


cd /opt/nms5ux/start
./nmsWinMenu

6. Press Enter.
7. In TMNMENU window, double click on the icon:
• NMS5LX Login, to start the GUI.
If the user, used to start the GUI, has profile:
• Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is the first user to access the default map rele-
vant to one's user, this one is opened in Read-Write modality.
• Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is not the first user to access to the default map
relevant to one's user, this one is opened in Read Only modality.
• Normal or entry, the default map relevant to one's user is opened in Read Only modality.
• NMS5LX Login R/O, to start the GUI; the default map, relevant to one's user, is opened in Read
Only modality.

The Login window opens and then the LX Map Manager window opens with the default map associated
to its user.
The Superuser and the users with privileged profile can change the map any time (Change map).
If the system displays the Your Account is expired. Please contact the system administrator message,
the relevant account is expired. Contact the Superuser to set a new user or change the current validity
period.
If the Manual login to LX Map Manager window is active, it is necessary to:

a. Type the username of one's NMS5UX user in the Login box.


If you have two or more NMS5UX users, type the username of the NMS5UX user associated to
the Linux user used to start the operating system.

b. Type the password of the NMS5UX user in the Password box.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 63


c. Press OK.
The LX Map Manager window opens with the default map associated to one’s user.
If the system displays the message:
• Incorrect Login, the typed name of the NMS5UX user is incorrect.
• Wrong Password, the typed password of the NMS5UX user is incorrect.
• Wrong Linux User, the used NMS5UX user is not compatible with the Linux user used for
the start-up of the operating system.
• Your Password is going to expire on <data>. Please change it, one's password is expiring.
To change it:
• Type, in the Old password box, the current password.
• Type, in the New password box, the new password (alphanumeric string, mini-
mum 6 characters and maximum 21 characters).
• Type again, in the Confirm New Password box, the new password and press Ok.
If you press Cancel, the password is not changed and the LX Map Manager window
opens. On the next start of the GUI, the window for the change of the password will be
displayed again.
This window is displayed 5 days before the expiry of the user password. It will be dis-
played each time the user starts the GUI until the user changes the password or this one
expires.
• Password expired. Please change it to login, one's password is expired. To change it:
• Type, in the Old password box, the current password.
• Type, in the New password box, the new password (alphanumeric string, mini-
mum 6 characters and maximum 21 characters).
• Type again, in the Confirm New Password box, the new password and press Ok.
If you press Cancel, the password is not changed and the LX Map Manager window
opens. To change the password and start the GUI, execute the procedure of step 7 again.
If, after more attempts, the Incorrect Login, Wrong Password or Wrong Linux User message is
displayed for three times consecutively, the Login window is automatically closed. To start the
GUI, it is necessary to execute again the procedure of the step 7.
The Your Password is going to expire on <data>. Please change it and Password expired. Please
change it to login message are displayed ONLY if the periodical password change functionality
IS ACTIVE. It consists in requiring to the user to change his own password each N days (for ex-
ample each 6 months).
The functionality can be activated/deactivated by the Superuser, who, if he activates the func-
tionality, sets the interval between a password change and the successive one.
The activation of the periodical password change does not influence the expiry date of the user,
which can be set during the creation of a NMS5UX user. The two functionalities are independent
and can coexist at the same time.

Fig.4 TMNMENU window

2
1

(1) Icons for the start of NMS GUI. The double click on the icon:
• NMS5LX Login, allows starting the GUI.
If the user used to start the GUI has profile:

64 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


• Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is the first user that access to the default
map relevant to one's user, this one is opened in Read-Write modality.
• Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is not the first user that access to the default
map relevant to one's user, this one is opened in Read Only modality.
• Normal or entry, the default map relevant to one's user is opened in Read Only mo-
dality.
• NMS5LX Login R/O, allows starting the GUI; the default map relevant to one's user is opened
in Read Only modality.

(2) Icons for the management of the database and of the platform of NMS. The description and the use
of these icons are reported in the administrator manual of NMS.

First start-up of NMS5LX GUI

WARNING The following procedure supposes that NMS has been already installed on the machine and that
the processes necessary to the start-up of the GUI have been already activated.
The procedure for the installation and the start-up of NMS is reported in the administrator manual.

1. Start-up the machine (PC, terminal, etc.).


The login window of the Linux operating system opens.

2. Type the name of the Linux user: nms5ux.


3. Type the password of the Linux user: nms5ux.

4. Press the confirmation push-button.


If the typed data are correct, one's Linux operating system is started.

5. Open a terminal window.

6. At the command line, type:


cd /opt/nms5ux/start
./nmsWinMenu

7. Press Enter.

8. In TMNMENU window, double click on NMS5LX Login.


The Login window opens and then the LX Map Manager window opens with the nms5ux map, which is
empty if the system has not been pre-configured by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
The NMS5UX user, which the GUI has been started with, is assigned with the Superuser. As first oper-
ation, it is suggested to change the password associated to this user (Change the characteristics of the
NMS5UX users).

If the Manual login to LX Map Manager window is active, it is necessary to:


a. Type, in the Login box, the name of the user: nms5ux.

b. Type, in the Password box, the user password: nms5ux.

c. Press OK.
The LX Map Manager window opens with the nms5ux map.
The display of the Incorrect Login message indicates that the typed name or password are in-
correct. If, after more attempts, the Incorrect Login message is displayed for three times con-
secutively, the Login window is automatically closed. To start the GUI, it is necessary to execute
again the procedure of the step 7.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 65


Closing of NMS GUI

Closing the GUI corresponds Close the LX Map Manager window.

WARNING Closing the LX Map Manager window causes the automatic closing of all the possible open win-
dows of NMS (Alarm History Browser, Equipment Information, etc.).

Automatic closing of NMS GUI

The LX Map Manager window is automatically closed when:


• The system displays the WARNING!! Force Logout from Superuser message. The Superuser user
has forced the disconnection of the user from the map (see Force the logout of a NMS5UX user).
• The user closes the operation system.

66 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


GRAPHIC REPRESENTATION OF THE NETWORK

After the installation of NMS, it is necessary to represent the network graphically.

The network configuration can be executed both by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA and by the user. If the net-
work has been configured by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA, go to the Equipment connection. Instead, if the
network must be represented, follow the indication reported here below.

The network representation is made using a series of Objects predefined for the network representation.

To create them, some general Rules for the creation of the objects must be respected.

The creation of the objects can be executed using:


• Specific commands - Edit > Add menu (Objects creation - Edit menu)
• Add Network From File functionality (Objects creation - Add Network From File functionality)
• Auto Discovery functionality (Object creation - Auto Discovery functionality)

Objects predefined for the network representation

Container objects
Network Element objects
Generic Symbol objects
Link objects
Label objects
Ring objects
PSM Map objects

Container objects

These objects are used as containers of equipment, symbols or other containers.


No special meaning is assigned to these objects by NMS. They have been introduced to help the user ar-
ranging the network to rapidly locate the equipment.

Container objects gives a better overview of the network, as they allow grouping the items according to
geographical or logical criteria: for example, they group equipment belonging to the same department or
located in the same area.

Container objects can be compared to folders in the arrangement of the files on a PC.

Network Element objects

These objects are used to identify the real or virtual equipment: Radio SDH, Radio PDH, etc.

Real NE

Real equipment means objects with the corresponding equipment physically present in the network.

WARNING A real NE is not automatically managed by NMS when the relevant object is created, but it is
necessary to connect it. The only exception is when the created NE is already present in a map in connected
status: in this case, the NE acquires the condition of the same symbol present in the other map just after
its creation.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 67


Virtual NE

Virtual equipment means objects without corresponding equipment physically present in the network.

When virtual equipment is created, its configuration database is empty. In order to configure virtual equip-
ment, it is necessary to copy the configuration of one piece of equipment of the same type (real or virtual
with an already configured database) to the virtual equipment just created by means of the Configuration
Download command.

Select the symbol of the virtual NE to open the relevant equipment window and set the configuration pa-
rameters, the user inputs, the user outputs, the control parameters for the PM measures, etc. More infor-
mation are reported in the equipment Manual.

Then the configuration of the virtual equipment can be transferred, always by means of the command Con-
figuration Download, to any equipment compatible with the considered virtual equipment.

NE of ALplus Node type

With NE object of ALplus Node type we do not mean single equipment but a set of minimum 2 and maxi-
mum 3 ALplus pieces of equipment (nodal matrix) interconnected by Nodal Bus (Node).
These pieces of equipment are not managed one by one by NMS, but are managed as a set represented
by the object of ALplus Node type, which has not a corresponding real object in the network but works as
container for the equipment of the nodal system.

WARNING Node equipment is not automatically managed by NMS when the relevant ALplus Node object is
created, but it is necessary to connect it. The only exception is if the created node is already present in a
map in connected status: in this case, the equipment of the node will automatically acquire the condition
of the same ALplus Node symbol present in the other map.

NE of ALCplus2 Node type

With NE object of ALCplus2 Node type we do not mean a single piece of equipment but a set of minimum
2 and maximum 8 ALCplus2 and/or ALCplus2e (with Ethernet Enhanced functionality active) pieces of
equipment connected by a TDM Nodal Bus and/or by Ethernet Nodal Bus (Node).
This equipment is not managed one by one by NMS, but as a set represented by the object of ALCplus2
Node type, which has not a corresponding real object present in the network but works as container for
the equipment of the nodal system.

WARNING Node equipment is not automatically managed by NMS when the relevant ALCplus2 Node object
is created, but it is necessary to connect it. The only exception is if the created node is already present in
a map in connected status; in this case, the equipment of the node will automatically acquire the condition
of the same ALCplus2 Node symbol present in the other map.

NE of WEB Generic type

This object is used to identify equipment, not managed by NMS, which are provided with a WEB GUI.
In fact, these objects can be assigned an IP address (as for the creation of a normal NE to manage with
NMS). The double click on the symbol of these objects starts the default system browser with the WEB
page, available at the set address, active.
These objects were born in never connected (disconnected) status and their status do not change for the
rest of their life because, differently from other NE objects, the objects of WEB Generic type must not be
connected to start the connection.
In fact, for this type of object, not all the commands available for the NE objects are meaningful, for ex-
ample Connect, Disconnect, Network Alarm History, etc.

68 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Generic Symbol objects

These objects are used to graphically represent network elements (e.g. PC and modem).

WARNING The Generic Symbol objects, even if they have a physical match in the network, do not allow
managing the physical element which they are referred to, as they are a simple graphical representation.

Link objects

The system manages two types of link objects:


• Graphical links (Link). They are simply used to graphically represent a connection between two
objects, but do not allow managing the connections which they refer to.
• Physical Link. They are real connections between physical interfaces of network equipment.
Equipment can be in the same map or in different maps.

Label objects

These objects are used to type a text string in the map.

Ring objects

These objects are used to identify subnetworks of PDH and SDH equipment, managed by NMS, which im-
plement Paths.
The double click on a Ring object opens the relevant GUI represented by the Ring Manager window.
The use of the Ring Manager window is reported in the relevant User Manual.

PSM Map objects

These objects are used to identify subnetworks of radio equipment with Ethernet tributary, managed by
NMS, which implement network services.
The double click on a PSM Map object allows accessing to the relevant GUI represented by the Packet Ser-
vice Manager Map window.
The use of the Packet Service Manager Map window is reported in the relevant User Manual.

Rules for the creation of the objects

All the predefined objects must be created by the user.


It is possible to add, delete, move or change the configuration parameters of the objects anytime.
The network can be represented in a single map, or subdivided in more Maps.
The objects of a map can be saved to file and, then, imported in a different map (see Import/Export).

To avoid contemporaneous operations on the same object, only one user at a time can change the network
configuration in a map. This one has the access to the map in Read-Write modality: Read-Write user.

WARNING More users can access to the map at the same time. Only the Read-Write user can change the
network configuration. The changes made by the Read-Write user are not dynamically displayed by the
Read Only users.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 69


To update the information of a map in Read Only modality, it is necessary to update the LX Map Manager
window selecting Map > Refresh.

Besides the general instructions described above, for some objects the rules described here below must
be respected.

NE objects

It is possible to create all the pieces of equipment in a network in a single map or to subdivide the network
in two or more parts and to associate two or more maps to these parts.

In this case, at the opening of each map, only the part of network associated to this map will be visible
and manageable.

A NE object is displayed ONLY in the map where it has been created. If you wish that one piece of equip-
ment is present in two different maps, it is necessary to create the relevant symbol in both the maps.

If the created NE symbol is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the status of the already
existing object. For example, if the NE-1 symbol in connected status is in the map A, when the NE-1 symbol
(same IP/Physical address) is created in the map B, the symbol will result connected as it inherits the status
of the twin symbol.
The same NE object can be created in more maps and/or more times in the same map.

It is possible to create new NE objects even if these have not been physically installed in the network, for
example because they are foreseen for a future installation. In this case, the relevant equipment window
can be opened only after the first connection, then only after the equipment has been physically installed
in the network and connected.

It is, instead, possible to create virtual NE objects, that is objects not having a corresponding equipment
present in the network, but which can be configured as a normal NE. Then this configuration can be trans-
ferred to any (real or virtual) equipment compatible with the virtual NE (see Network Element objects).

The NE objects of WEB Generic type (see NE of WEB Generic type), after their creation, do not require any
operation (line test, connection) to be used.

NE objects of ALplus Node type

For the NE objects of ALplus Node type, besides the rules defined for the NE objects, it is necessary to
follow the indications reported here below for their creation:
• Before creating an ALplus Node object, it is necessary that the ALplus node has been already
defined (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) locally by means of SCT/LMT
application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation.
The ALplus node term indicates the set of minimum 2 and maximum 3 ALplus pieces of equip-
ment with nodal matrix interconnected by Nodal Bus.
• If in the map there are already one or more copies of NE objects relevant to equipment belong-
ing to a node, before creating the relevant node it is necessary to DELETE all the copies of these
objects. This because the management of one piece of equipment belonging to a node is sup-
ported by NMS only through the relevant nodal window.
• After the creation of a node, it is not possible to create NE objects relevant to the equipment
forming the node. Their management is carried out from the nodal window and not directly from
the map.
• During the creation of the node, the system requires the IP address of the node. This corre-
sponds to the IP address of the main equipment forming the node.

General rule for the node management: all the commands in the map menu and executed selecting the
node are automatically executed for all the node pieces of equipment (for example Connect, Disconnect,
etc.), while the commands not available in the map menu, but available in the nodal window, are executed
selecting the single equipment of the node (for example Configuration Download, NE Sw/Fw Release).
The connection/alarm status of the node always reflects the most severe status/alarm condition of the
node equipment.

70 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


NE objects of ALCplus2 Node type

For the NE objects of ALCplus2 Node type, besides the rules defined for the NE objects, it is necessary to
follow the indications reported here below for their creation:
• Before creating an ALCplus2 Node object, it is necessary that the ALCplus2 node has been al-
ready defined (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) locally by means of SCT/
LMT application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation.
The ALCplus2 node term indicates the Set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 ALCplus2 and/or
ALCplus2e (with Ethernet Enhanced functionality active) pieces of equipment connected by a
TDM Nodal Bus and/or by an Ethernet Nodal Bus.
• If in the map there are already one or more copies of NE objects relevant to equipment belong-
ing to a node, before creating the relevant node it is necessary to DELETE all the copies of these
objects. This because the management of one piece of equipment belonging to a node is sup-
ported by NMS only through the relevant nodal window.
• After the creation of a node, it is not possible to create NE objects relevant to the equipment
forming the node. Their management is carried out from the nodal window and not directly from
the map yet.
• During the creation of the node, the system requires the IP address of the node. This corre-
sponds to the IP address of the main equipment forming the node.

As general rule for the node management.

General rule for the node management: all the commands in the map menu and executed selecting the
node are automatically executed for all the node pieces of equipment (for example Connect, Disconnect,
etc.), while the commands not available in the map menu, but available in the nodal window, are executed
selecting the single equipment of the node (for example Configuration Download, NE Sw/Fw Release).
The connection/alarm status of the node always reflects the most severe status/alarm condition of the
node equipment.

Container objects

The container map windows allow subdividing the network in hierarchical levels, in such a way to arrive
from a general view to the display of the single elements, passing through intermediate levels.
In fact the network, made by the objects that NMS must manage and control, can be considered from dif-
ferent points of view.
It can be observed taken as a whole, as distribution of elements in a geographical area (for example sub
networks), or you can decide to study a single object to see its configuration; the user can decide at which
level, and then which detail, to access to the network information. In this way, subdividing the network in
containers, it is possible to easily pass from a general overview to a more and more detailed view.
The user is totally free in the creation of the number and type of levels that best fits to the structure of
one’s network.

Ring objects

A Ring object is displayed ONLY in the map where it has been created. If you wish that a Ring is in two
different maps, it is necessary to create the relevant symbol in both the maps.
If the created Ring symbol is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the configuration of
the already existing object.
For instance, if in the map A there is the symbol Ring-1, where are configured the equipment NE-A, NE-B
and NE-C and the relevant Paths/Links, when the Ring–1 symbol (same physical address) is created in the
map B, the equipment NE-A, NE-B and NE-C and the relevant Paths/Links will result configured in the sym-
bol because the new symbol inherits the configuration of the twin symbol.

The same Ring object can be created in more maps and/or more times in the same map.
The commands for the creation/change/deletion of the Ring objects are in Ring Manager menu.
The menu is present in the LX Map Manager window only if the Ring Manager application, optional and
provided on demand, is installed.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 71


PSM Map objects

A PSM Map object is displayed ONLY in the map where it has been created. If you wish that a PSM Map is
present in two different maps, it is necessary to create the relevant symbol in both the maps.

If the PSM Map symbol you are creating is already present in another map, it will automatically acquire the
configuration of the already existing object.

For instance, if in the map A there is the symbol PSM Map-1, where are configured the equipment NE-A,
NE-B and NE-C and the relevant services/Links, when the PSM Map–1 symbol (same physical address) is
created in the map B, the equipment NE-A, NE-B and NE-C and the relevant services/Links will result con-
figured in the symbol because the new symbol inherits the configuration of the twin symbol.
The same PSM Map object can be created in more maps and/or more times in the same map.

The commands for the creation/change/deletion of PSM Map objects are in PSM menu. The menu is present
in the LX Map Manager window only if the Packet Service Manager application is installed (optional and
provided on demand).

Objects creation - Edit menu

By means of the commands available in the LX Map Manager window, it is possible to create all predefined
objects available in NMS.
In detail for the creation of the objects:
• Container, NE, Generic Symbol, Link, Physical Link and Label, select Edit > Add.
• Ring, select Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Add Ring.
• PSM Map, select PSM > Edit > Add PSM Map.

Here below a series of examples of graphic representation of a hypothetical network in one or more maps,
using the commands of Edit menu, is reported.

Examples of network graphical representation

Let us suppose to have to graphically display a certain Italia network shown in Fig.5, in such a way to be
able to execute its supervisory operations by means of NMS.
The network is composed by Radio SDH, Radio PDH and PMP equipment.
NMS is loaded on a PC connected to one piece of equipment by means of an Ethernet LAN.
A specific IP address has been locally assigned to each equipment by means of LCT.

Fig.5 Example of network

Lan

Radio SDH Radio PDH Equipment


10.10.10.20 10.10.10.30 type
PMP
10.10.10.40
Radio SDH
Radio PDH Local IP
10.10.10.21
10.10.10.31 address of the
equipment
Radio SDH Radio PDH
10.10.10.22 10.10.10.32

Radio PDH
10.10.10.33

72 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Before creating the objects that will allow to the system the management of the equipment, it is necessary
to subdivide the network in containers, objects, etc. Doing this, it is suggested to consider as the equip-
ment is connected and where they are located on the field.

In the first example (Graphical representation of the network in a map) the network is subdivided and
graphically represented in the same map.

In the second example (Network subdivided in more maps) the network is subdivided and represented
graphically in two maps. In this case, at the opening of this map, only the part of the network associated
to the specific map will be visible and manageable.

Graphical representation of the network in a map

In this example, we suppose that all the pieces of equipment of the Italia network (Fig.5) are created in
the same map: Italia map.

A possible subdivision of the network is shown in Fig.6.

Fig.6 Subdivision of the network in objects

Italia (map)
Nord Italia (container) 1
Milano (container) 3

Sud Italia
Torino
(container) 2
(container) 4
Lan
9 5
Radio SDH Radio PDH
10.10.10.20 10.10.10.30 12
10 PMP
6 10.10.10.40
Radio SDH
10.10.10.21 Radio PDH
10.10.10.31
11 7
Radio SDH Radio PDH
10.10.10.22 10.10.10.32

8
Radio PDH
10.10.10.33

In Fig.6, a name identifying a geographic area or a town has been associated to the containers. It is pos-
sible to assign any name to the Container objects, but it is suggested to set a name having a geographic
reference. In this way, it will be possible to determine the position of the equipment just from the name
of the symbol of the container.

An IP address and a logical address, different for each created NE object, have been assigned to each NE
object.

The IP Address must coincide with the IP Address locally set (by means of the LCT program) for the relevant
equipment. If the values do not coincide, it will not be possible to activate the connection with the equip-
ment.
The logical address corresponds to the name of the equipment that is displayed under the relevant icon.
Also in this case, as for the Container objects, it is possible to assign any value. It is suggested to assign
a name that makes easy the acknowledgement of the equipment.

Create the Italia map. The Superuser can create the map with a specific command (Dreate a new map) or
during the creation of a new user privileged or advanced (Add a NMS5UX user).

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 73


Open the LX Map Manager window with a user associated to the Italia map (Start-up of NMS GUI).

Now proceed in the creation of the objects (Add).


In order to create the objects, the map must be in Read-Write modality.

During the operation, follow a determinate order because it is not possible to create an object, for example
NE, if the Container object that must contain it has not been previously created.

The first symbols that must be created are the Container objects: Nord Italia and Sud Italia.

Then open, for example, the Nord Italia container and create the objects present in it, and so on.

In Fig.6, all the objects that must be created by the user, in such a way that each equipment of the Italia
network can be managed by NMS, are identified by a number (1, 2, etc.) located in the upper right corner.

In Tab.5, for each object in Fig.6 and identified by a number, some information is reported that allows un-
derstanding how and where the symbol must be created. In detail, there is the indication of the type of
object that must be created, which values must be assigned to the parameters of the object and in which
container the symbol must be inserted. Furthermore, the order of the objects respects a possible creation
order that assures the creation of the Container objects before the creation of the objects contained in
them. The Generic Symbol, Link and Label objects can be added in any container.

In Tab.5, not all the parameters are indicated, but only those whose setting is necessary for the creation
of the object.

Tab.5 Subdivision of the network in objects

Object Type of object that must Container where the Setting of the values of the
be created object must be created main parameters
1 Container Italia * Label: Nord Italia

2 Container Italia * Label: Sud Italia


3 Container Nord Italia Label: Milano

4 Container Nord Italia Label: Torino

IP Address: 10.10.10.30
5 Network Element Milano Logical Address: PDH 30 **
Type: Radio PDH

IP Address: 10.10.10.31
6 Network Element Milano Logical Address: PDH 31 **
Type: Radio PDH

IP Address: 10.10.10.32
7 Network Element Milano Logical Address: PDH 32 **
Type: Radio PDH

IP Address: 10.10.10.33
8 Network Element Milano Logical Address: PDH 33 **
Type: Radio PDH

IP Address: 10.10.10.20
9 Network Element Torino Logical Address: SDH 20 **
Type: Radio SDH

IP Address: 10.10.10.21
10 Network Element Torino Logical Address: SDH 21 **
Type: Radio SDH

IP Address: 10.10.10.22
11 Network Element Torino Logical Address: SDH 22 **
Type: Radio SDH

IP Address: 10.10.10.40
12 Network Element Sud Italia Logical Address: PMP 40 **
Type: PMP

* Main container that represents the map: it is created with the map and automatically acquires its name.
** The user can set any value, different from the displayed one.

74 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


The creation of an object implies the display of the relevant symbol on video. By means of the Container
symbol, it is possible to display the detail of the network where the equipment is contained, for example
as shown in Fig.7, for the PMP 40 equipment of the Italia network.

Fig.7 Example of network (LX Map Manager window)

Now, NMS knows all the information that allows managing each single equipment, when connected.

Network subdivided in more maps

In this example, we suppose that the Italia network (Fig.8) is subdivided and graphically represented in
two map, in such a way that at the opening of the map only the part of network associated to the specific
map will be visible and manageable.
A possible subdivision of the network is shown in Fig.8.

Fig.8 Example of network subdivided in more maps

Nord Italia
(container) 1

Milano
(container)

Sud Italia
Torino (map)
(container) 2
Lan

7 3 10

Radio SDH Radio PDH Radio PDH


10.10.10.20 10.10.10.30 10.10.10.30

8
4
Radio SDH
Radio PDH
10.10.10.21
10.10.10.31

9
5
Radio SDH
Radio PDH
10.10.10.22
10.10.10.32

6
Radio PDH
10.10.10.33

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 75


In Fig.8, a name identifying a geographical area or town has been associated to the maps and to the con-
tainers. It is possible to assign any name to the maps and to the Container objects, but it is suggested to
set a name that has a geographical reference. In this way, it will be possible to determine the position of
the equipment just from the name of the map and of the container symbol.
An IP address and a logic address, different for each created NE object, have been assigned to each NE.
The IP Address must coincide with the locally set IP Address (via LCT program) for the relevant equipment.
If the values do not coincide, it will not be possible to activate the connection with the equipment.
The logical address corresponds to the name of the equipment that is displayed under the relevant icon.
Also in this case, as for the Container object, it is possible to assign any value. It is suggested to assign a
name that makes easy the acknowledging of the equipment.
Now proceed in the following way:

1. Create the Nord Italia and Sud Italia maps.


Create the Italia map. The Superuser can create the map with a specific command (Dreate a new map)
or during the creation of a new user privileged or advanced (Add a NMS5UX user).

2. Open the LX Map Manager window with a user, which the Nord Italia map is associated to (Start-up of
NMS GUI).

3. Create some objects (Add).


In order to create the objects, the map must be in Read-Write modality.
During the operation, a specific order must be followed as it is not possible to create an object, for ex-
ample NE, if before the Container object that must contain it has not been created.
The first symbols that must be created are the Container objects: Milano and Torino. Then, open the
Milano container and create the objects present in it, and so on.
In Fig.8, all the objects that must be created by the user, in such a way that each equipment of the
Nord Italia map can be managed by NMS, are identified by a number (1, 2, etc.) located in the upper
right corner.
In Tab.6, for each object in Fig.8 and identified by a number, some information is reported that allows
understanding how and where the symbol must be created. In detail, there is the indication of the type
of object that must be created, which values must be assigned to the parameters of the object and in
which container the symbols must be inserted. Furthermore, the order of the objects list reflects a pos-
sible creation order that ensures the creation of the Container objects before the creation of the objects
which these must contain.
The Generic Symbol, Link, Physical Link and Label objects can be added in any container.
In Tab.6 not all the parameters are indicated, but only those whose setting is necessary for the creation
of the object.

4. Close the Nord Italia map.


5. Open the LX Map Manager window with a user which the Sud Italia map is associated to.

6. Create the objects as displayed in Tab.6.

Only the portion of network associated to the opened map can be managed.
It is possible to create a NE symbol in two different maps. In this case, it is necessary to create the symbol
in both the map, assigning to it the same characteristics (IP address, type, etc.). At the creation of the
second symbol, given that the object is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the status
of the already existing twin symbol.

76 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Tab.6 Objects of a network subdivided in more maps

Object Map where the Type of object that Container where the Setting of the values of the
object must be must be object must be cre- main parameters
created created ated

1 Nord Italia Container Nord Italia * Label: Milano

2 Nord Italia Container Nord Italia * Label: Torino

3 Nord Italia Network Element Milano IP Address: 10.10.10.30


Logical Address: PDH 30 **
Type: Radio PDH

4 Nord Italia Network Element Milano IP Address: 10.10.10.31


Logical Address: PDH 31 **
Type: Radio PDH

5 Nord Italia Network Element Milano IP Address: 10.10.10.32


Logical Address: PDH 32 **
Type: Radio PDH

6 Nord Italia Network Element Milano IP Address: 10.10.10.33


Logical Address: PDH 33 **
Type: Radio PDH
7 Nord Italia Network Element Torino IP Address: 10.10.10.20
Logical Address: SDH 20 **
Type: Radio SDH

8 Nord Italia Network Element Torino IP Address: 10.10.10.21


Logical Address: SDH 21 **
Type: Radio SDH

9 Nord Italia Network Element Torino IP Address: 10.10.10.22


Logical Address: SDH 22 **
Type: Radio SDH
10 Sud Italia Network Element Sud Italia * IP Address: 10.10.10.40
Logical Address: PMP 40 **
Type: PMP

* Main container that represents the map: it is created with the map and automatically acquires its name.
** The user can set any value, different from the displayed one.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 77


Objects creation - Add Network From File functionality

The Add Network From File functionality allows automatically adding a group of predefined objects whose
characteristics have been edited in a file (csv format) to a map of NMS.
The predefined objects, which can be automatically created by the considered functionality, are:
Container objects
Network Element objects
Link objects
Label objects

The use of the functionality is structured in the following phases:

1. Create the file in csv format.

2. To copy the file (.csv) to the server where NMS is installed (default directory opt/nms5ux/data/files).
The file must be transferred in ASCII format.

3. To open the LX Map Manager window:


• Relevant to the map defined in the file (see Rules of the compilation of the csv file).
The map must be opened in Read-Write mode.
• With a user whose profile is Advanced, Privileged or Superuser.

4. To open the file (.csv) by means of Edit > Add > Network From File.
Opening the file involves the automatic creation of the objects in the LX Map Manager window.
At the end of the operation, the result of the creation is shown for each object.
The use of the Network From File command is described in par. Create Container, NE, graphical Link
and Label objects described in a file.

An Example of use of Add Network From File functionality can be read.

Create the file in csv format

The Add Network From File functionality supports files in csv format with a predefined structure.

The user can create the file in the wished mode, but always respecting:
• The format (.csv)
• The Structure of the csv file.
• The Rules of the compilation of the csv file.

It is possible Compile the csv file starting from a model in xls format.

Structure of the csv file

Tab.7 shows the structure of a row of csv file. The column:


• Parameter, displays the fields of the row.
According to the csv format, each field is separated from the next one by the character ";".
• Possible values, displays the valid values.
Entering a different value or a value not in compliance with what displayed prevents the creation
of the object.

Fig.11 shows an example of structure of a csv file opened by a text editor.

78 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Tab.7 File structure (Add Network From File functionality)

Parameter Possible values

Category If you wish to create an object:


(Category of the object you • Label, type 1 or LABEL
wish to create) • Container, type 2 or CONTAINER
• NE, type 3 or NE
• Link, type 100 or LINK
Type The possible values for this parameter change depending on the value set for the
Category parameter.
(Type of object, within the
category, you wish to cre- In detail, if you wish to create a:
ate) Container object of type:
• Subnetwork, type 501 or Subnetwork
• Station, type 502 or Station
• SubStation, type 503 or Substation
• Radio Station, type 504 or Radio Station
• Small Station, type 505 or Small Station

NE object of type
• EL series radio, type 1 or Radio PDH
• US series radio, type 2 or Radio SDH
• PMP system, type 3 or PMP
• CommServer–S equipment, type 4 or CS
• ADM–C multiplexer, type 5 or ADM-C
• ALS series radio with AL IDU/ALC IDU, type 7 or Radio PDH-AL
• ELFO radio, type 8 or ELFO
• ADM–1 multiplexer, type 9 or ADM-1
• ALS series radio with ALS IDU/ALS-C IDU, type 11 or ALS
• ALFO radio, type 12 or ALFO
• ALS series radio with AL IDU plus, type 14 or ALplus
• SDH N+1 radio, type 15 or SDH N+1
• ALS series radio with ALC IDU plus, type 16 or ALCplus
• ALS series radio with ALplus2 IDU, type 17 or ALplus2
• ALS series radio with ALCplus2 IDU, type 18 or ALCplus2
• ALS series radio with ALCplus2e IDU, type 19 or ALCplus2e
• FAMxc 5RU multiplexer, type 22 or FAMxc
• FAMxc 2.5RU multiplexer, type 24 or FAMxc 2.5
• IPBOX equipment, type 40 or IP-BOX
• AGS10 equipment, type 20 or AGS10
• AGS-20 equipment, type 29 or AGS-20
• EXP63 multiplexer, type 41 or EXP63
• ALplus node, type 64 or ALplus Node
• ALCplus2 node, type 61 or ALCplus2 Node
• Web Generic, type 94 or WEB Generic
• Switch Loop, type 46 or SwitchLoop
• Liberator V1000, type 47 or LiberatorV1000
• ALFOPlus radio, type 25 or ALFOPlus
• ALFOplus80 radio, type 26 or ALFOplus80
• ALFOplus80HD radio, type 27 or ALFOplus80HD
Link (graphical) object of type:
• Generic line, type 1 or GENERIC
• Dashed line, type 2 or DASHED
• Dotted line, type 3 or DOTTED
• Dotdash line, type 4 or DOTDASH

Label object, compiling this field is not meaningful. Type “-”

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 79


Parameter Possible values

IP-ADDRESS If you are creating a NE object, type the IP address (SNMP agent) of the equipment.

(Parameter meaningful only For the NE object type:


for the NE object) • ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node, type the IP address of the main equipment
of the node.
• PMP, type the IP address of the Proxy interface used for the connection to
the master station.

If you are creating a Label, Container or (graphical) Link object, compiling this field
is not meaningful. Type "-"

Name If you are creating an object:

(Object name) • NE, type an alphanumeric string of max 32 characters


• Container, type an alphanumeric string of max 48 characters
• Link (graphical), type an alphanumeric string of max 40 characters
• Label, type an alphanumeric string of max 50 characters
Map Type the name of the map where you wish to create the object.
(Map name)

Path If you are creating a NE, Container or Label object, type the complete path where
(Position of the map where you wish to create the object.
the object must be created) Use the symbol / to indicate the different level.
Example. If you are creating a NE object and you type the path Europe/Italy/Rome,
this means that the equipment must be created in the container Rome, contained in
the container Italy contained, in its turn, in the container Europe.

If you are creating a (graphical) Link object, compiling this field is not meaningful.
Type “-”

x If you are creating a NE, Container or Label object, type the position X (range 0-
(Position X of the object in 10) the object must take in the View area of the LX Map Manager window.
the View area. If X = 0 and Y = 0, the graphic symbol is created in the New Object area.
An 10x10 hypothetical grid
If you are creating a (graphical) Link object, compiling this field is not meaningful.
is taken as reference)
Type “-”

y If you are creating a NE, Container or Label object, type the position Y (range 0-
(Position Y of the object in 10) the object must take in the View area of the LX Map Manager window.
the View area. If X = 0 and Y = 0, the graphic symbol is created in the New Object area.
An 10x10 hypothetic grid is
If you are creating a (graphical) Link object, compiling this field is not meaningful.
taken as reference)
Type “-”

Rules of the compilation of the csv file

Every Container, NE, Label or (graphical) Link object you wish the Add Network From File functionality au-
tomatically creates must be inserted in the csv file.
Every object corresponds to a row.
All the object parameters (Category, Type, etc.) must be compiled as shown in Tab.7. If a parameter is
not meaningful for the considered object, type the character - (hyphen) in the relevant field.
Besides the general indications described above, some of the rules described below must be respected.

Parameter Map
All the objects inserted in a file must have the same value for the Map parameter.
This means that you must insert in a csv file only the objects you wish to create in a specific map.

WARNING This map is the map the user shall open (in Read-Write mode) (see step 3 of the pro-
cedure Objects creation - Add Network From File functionality).

80 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


If you wish to create the objects of a network which must be represented in more maps, the
objects shall be subdivided according to the belonging map and a csv file shall be created for
each map.

Parameter Path
The Path parameter represents the position, within the map, where the object must be created.
To indicate the containing levels, use the symbol /.
Example. If you are creating a NE object, typing the path:
• Europe/Italy/Rome, means that the equipment must be created within the container
Rome, contained in the container Italy, in its turn contained in the container Europe.
• /, means that the equipment must be created within the main container (level Map - see
Fig.2).

If the container name includes the character / the container name must be enclosed between
inverted commas (" ") in the description of the Path. For example, in the description of a path
the container Station A/B must be inserted in the following way /Europe/Italy/”StationA/B”.
If an object must be created in a container, this container must be already present in the map
or must be defined in the csv file (then created) before the object it must contain.
Example. Suppose to have to create the object NE1 in the container Italy and this container is
not already present in the map. In the csv file, the row defining the container Italy must be
placed before the row defining the NE object.

Definition of Graphical link object


For the creation of a graphical Link object, the parameters Category, Type, Name and Map must
be shown.
In this case, even the parameters Path, X, Y are not meaningful as the position of a Link object
is determined by the position of the two objects Container and/or NE and/or Label which it must
end.
This position is determined by the following rule:
A Link object is created as connection between the two Container/NE/Label objects
described in the two previous rows.
If an object of Link type is present in the two rows before (e.g., in row 8) the row of a Link (e.g.,
in row 10), the creation of the Link (e.g. in row 10) will not be carried out.

Compile the csv file starting from a model

A model file, which can be used as starting point for the creation of the file, is available on the server where
NMS is installed.

The considered path/model file is the following:


opt/nms5ux/data/files/AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls.

The model is in xls format and the user must have an application program supporting this format (e.g., MS
Excel) to use it.

For the creation of the csv file through the model AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls, carry out the fol-
lowing operations:

1. If one’s machine is not provided with an application program supporting the xls format, copy the file
AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls to a PC provided with this application program.

2. Open the AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls file and rename it as you wish.

3. Define every single object you wish insert in the file typing the relevant characteristics in the specified
column of the table named TEMPLATE.
Each row represents an object.
Tab.7 reports, for every column, the list of values you can insert.
Before compiling the file, it is suggested to read the Rules of the compilation of the csv file.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 81


The rows, whose first character is #, have been inserted only to help the user in the file compilation.
The information in these rows WILL NOT be considered in the automatic creation of the objects, then
it is not necessary to remove them at the end of the compilation of the file.
The only information used for the automatic creation of the objects are those of the TEMPLATE table.
4. Save the file in csv format.

Example of use of Add Network From File functionality

Suppose to wish to graphically represent an hypothetical link ALplus1 - ALplus2 in the map nms5ux using
the Add Network From File functionality.
Before compiling the csv file, it is necessary to define if the link must be placed at the main level in the LX
Map Manager window or if it must be inserted in a container and which auxiliary objects (Link and Label)
you wish to create.
A possible representation of the link is depicted in Fig.9.

Fig.9 Representation of the link (example Add Network From File)

Example (container)

Station A (container)

ALplus 1
(NE)

ALplus1 - ALplus2 (Link)

Remote ALplus2 (Label)

Station A - Station B (Link)

Remote ALplus1 (Label)

ALplus1 - ALplus2 (Link)

ALplus 2
(NE)

Fig.9 indicates, for every item to insert in the csv file, the object category (between brackets) and the
name.
At this point, the csv file can be created.
Taking the model AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls (see Compile the csv file starting from a model) as
reference and following the rules shown in par. Rules of the compilation of the csv file and in Tab.7, the
AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv file, depicted in Fig.10, has been created.
Fig.11 shows the same file opened by means of a text editor.

82 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Fig.10 AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv file (Add Network From File example)

Fig.11 AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv file (test editor)

At this point, it is necessary to copy the file AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv to the server where NMS
is installed (directory opt/nms5ux/data/files).
Then open the LX Map Manager window with the map nms5ux in Read-Write mode using a user with profile
Advanced, Privileged or Superuser (Start-up of NMS GUI).
Select Edit > Add > Network From File and open the file:
opt/nms5ux/data/files/AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv
The Add From File Report...AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv window is displayed (Fig.12).

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 83


Fig.12 Add From File Report window (Add Network From File example)

The automatic creation of each objects implies the display of the relevant symbol on LX Map Manager win-
dow as shown in Fig.13.

Fig.13 LX Map Manager window (Add Network From File example)

84 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Object creation - Auto Discovery functionality

WARNING Auto Discovery functionality is available only for equipment managed by SNMPv1/v2c protocol.

The Auto Discovery functionality allows detecting equipment in the network and not managed yet by NMS.
When a new equipment is detected, NMS automatically carries out the following actions:
• It inserts the detected equipment in the Auto Discovery table.
• It creates the corresponding object in a given map/container (optional operation).
• It connects the NE object (optional operation).

Moreover the functionality can detect and notify the user if the type of an object, already managed by NMS,
is changed.

Auto Discovery functionality provides the user with two modalities to detect new network equipment:
Network Scan modality
NE Wake Up modality

In order to work, the two modalities must be configured and activated by the user and can be active at the
same time or one at a time.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 85


Network Scan modality

The Network Scan modality has the purpose to detect new equipment in the network, not managed by NMS
yet, and equipment whose type is changed (equipment described in the DB of NMS, but of a type not cor-
responding to the real one).

The search is executed by a cyclic scanning of the network, executing a SNMP get on all the IP addresses
belonging to given intervals (configurable by the user).

When one piece of equipment answers to the SNMP get, if the equipment:
• Is NOT managed by NMS yet, it is inserted in the list of the detected equipment and the relevant
NE object, if configured by the user, is created and connected.
• Is already managed by NMS but with a type different from that indicated in the network for the
specific IP Address, a notify of type change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table.
Example. Suppose that an EL series equipment with address 172.22.13.6 is managed by NMS.
At a given moment, the EL equipment in the network is replaced by an ALplus piece of equip-
ment. The address 172.22.13.6 is assigned to the new equipment.
If the user activates the Network Scan modality and defines that the address 172.22.13.6 is in-
cluded in the scanned IP address, on the detection of the 172.22.13.6 address a notify of type
change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table.

The equipment captured by the Network Scan and NE Wake Up modalities and the notify of the equipment
whose type is changed are inserted in the Auto Discovery table.
The table can be displayed any time by the user opening the Network Element Captured window. For the
new captured equipment, besides the characteristics, the action automatically executed by the system on
the detection are displayed.

In order to work, the Network Scan modality must be activated by the user. Before activating it, it is nec-
essary to define the operating parameters of the modality.
Then it will be possible to change, in any moment, one or more parameters and establish if activating im-
mediately the new configuration or, if the modality is already active, waiting for the expiry of the current
scanning in progress.
Moreover, it is possible Save the Auto Discovery configuration and retrieve it in a second moment.

Setting of the parameters for the execution of the Network Scan mode

The parameters, which must be defined by the user and must be used by the Network Scan modality, are
the following:
• IP addresses which must be scanned. One or more ranges of addresses and/or single IP address
can be defined.
• Scheduling of execution of the cyclic scanning: once per day or continuous each X (hours:min-
utes) and number of IP addresses which must be scanned at the same time each X (seconds).
Example. Suppose that the cyclic scanning is set to be continuous each 3 hours and that, at each
scanning, 5 equipment must be scanned each 4 seconds. The IP addresses to scan in total count-
ing groups and single addresses are 15.
The scheduling of the cyclic scanning will take place as displayed in the following figure.
Interrogation Interrogation

4s 4s 4s 4s
5 IP Add. 5 IP Add. 5 IP Add. 3h 5 IP Add. 5 IP Add. 5 IP Add.

• Action to execute automatically on the detection of a new equipment. It is possible to choose


among one of the following actions:
• Insertion in the Auto Discovery table, creation and connection of the relevant NE symbol.
• Insertion in the Auto Discovery table and creation of the NE symbol.
In this case, the equipment can be connected in a second moment.
• Only insertion in the Auto Discovery table.

86 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


In this case, it will be possible then Create manually the object of the equipment present
in the Auto Discovery table or by the command Edit > Add (Create Network Element
object) and to connect it.
• Map where the NE symbol must be possibly created.
When the NE is created (automatically or manually by means of command of the Auto Discovery
table), if the map where the object must be created (map A) is different from that currently open
(map B), the creation of the NE object will take place in the following way:
• If the map A is open in Read-Write modality, the object is created and dynamically dis-
played in the map.
• If the map A is open in Read Only modality, the object is created but not displayed. It is
necessary to execute a Refresh command on the map in order to display it.
• Container where the NE symbol must be possibly created.

If the container is not present in the set map, it will be created at the creation of the NE object.
The NE object is not directly created in the container set by the user, but in the following path:
/ <container set by the user> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/month/year>
Example. Suppose to have set the container Station-A. On June 23th 2009 the equipment AL24
is created (automatically or manually by means of the command of the Auto Discovery table)
and the corresponding symbol will be created in the container:
Station-A / 2009 / 06/2009 / 23/06/2009

Fig.14 displays an example.

Fig.14 Path containing the NE (example Auto Discovery)

The procedure to set the parameters for the execution of the Network Scan modality is reported in par.
Configure and activate the Network Scan modality.

Activation (deactivation) of the Network Scan modality

Once the execution parameters have been defined, it is necessary to activate the Network Scan modality.
The modality is automatically activated if at least one IP address or a group of IP addresses has been set
and the configuration has been saved by means of the Save as Active Conf command (Fig.20).
The Network Scan modality remains active until when the user deactivates it removing all the values in the
areas Range IP Addresses and Specific IP Addresses (Fig.20) and saving the new setting by means of Save
as Active Conf command.
The procedure to activate and deactivate the Network Scan modality is respectively reported in par. Con-
figure and activate the Network Scan modality and Deactivate the Network Scan modality.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 87


NE Wake Up modality

The NE Wake Up modality has the purpose to detect new equipment in the network not managed yet by
NMS.
In this modality, NMS intercepts the Wake Up notifications sent by the equipment and containing the in-
formation necessary to the connection and the management of the equipment itself.
When a Wake Up trap is intercepted, NMS carries out the following actions:
• It disables the sending of Wake Up traps by the equipment (trap switch-off).
• If the equipment which sent the trap:
• Is NOT managed yet by NMS, this inserts it in the list of detected equipment and, if con-
figured by the user, creates and connects the relevant NE object.
• Is already managed by NMS but with a type different from that shown in the network for
the specific IP Address, a notify of type change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table.
Example. Suppose that an EL series equipment with address 172.22.13.6 is managed by
NMS. At a given moment, the EL equipment in the network is replaced by an ALplus piece
of equipment. The address 172.22.13.6 is assigned to the new equipment.
If the user activates the NE Wake Up modality and defines that the address 172.22.13.6
is included in the scanned IP addresses, on the detection of the 172.22.13.6 address a
notify of type change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table.

The Wake Up notification is a SNMP trap sent by the equipment to NMS to notify its presence in the net-
work.
The configuration of the Wake Up trap (activation or not of the trap, IP address of the machine which the
trap must be sent to, modality of trap sending, etc.) MUST be executed by the local management program
LCT. For more information, see the relevant documentation.
The equipment captured by the Network Scan and NE Wake Up modalities and the notify of the equipment
whose type is changed are inserted in the Auto Discovery table.
The table can be displayed any time by the user opening the Network Element Captured window. For the
new captured equipment, besides the characteristics, the action automatically executed by the system on
the detection are displayed.

In order to work, the NE Wake Up modality must be activated by the user. Before activating it, it is nec-
essary to define the operating parameters of the modality.
Then it will be possible to change, in any moment, one or more parameters and establish if activating im-
mediately the new configuration or, if the modality is already active, waiting for the expiry of the current
scanning in progress.
Moreover, it is possible Save the Auto Discovery configuration and retrieve it later.

Setting of the parameters for the execution of the NE Wake Up mode

The parameters, which must be defined by the user and must be used by the NE Wake Up modality, are
the following:
• Action which must be automatically executed on the detection of a new equipment. It is possible
to choose among one of the following equipment:
• Insertion in the Auto Discovery table, creation and connection of the relevant NE symbol.
• Insertion in the Auto Discovery table and creation of the NE symbol.
In this case, the equipment can be connected in a second moment.
• Only insertion in the Auto Discovery table.
In this case, the equipment can be created in a second moment by means of the com-
mand in the Auto Discovery table (Create manually the object of the equipment present
in the Auto Discovery table) or by the command Edit > Add (Create Network Element
object) and connect it.
• Map where the NE symbol must be possibly created.
When the NE is created (automatically or manually by means of command of the Auto Discovery
table), if the map where the object must be created (map A) is different from that currently open
(map B), the creation of the NE object will take place in the following way:
• If the map A is open in Read-Write modality, the object is created and dynamically dis-
played in the map.

88 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


• If the map A is open in Read Only modality, the object is created but not displayed. It is
necessary to execute a Refresh command on the map in order to display it.
• Container where the NE symbol must be possibly created.
If the container is not present in the set map, it will be created on the creation of the NE object.
The NE object is not directly created in the container set by the user, but in the following path:
/ <container set by the user> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/month/year>
Example. Suppose to have set the container Station-A. On June 23th 2009 the equipment AL24
is created (automatically or manually by means of the command of the Auto Discovery table)
and the corresponding symbol will be created in the container:
Station-A / 2009 / 06/2009 / 23/06/2009
Fig.14 displays an example.

The procedure to set the parameters for the execution of the NE Wake Up modality is reported in par. Con-
figure and activate the NE Wake Up modality.

Activation (deactivation) of the NE Wake Up modality

Once the execution parameters have been defined, it is necessary to activate the NE Wake Up modality.
The modality is activated (deactivated) activating (deactivating) the Manage Wake-up trap option and sav-
ing the configuration by means of the Save as Active Conf command (Fig.20).
The procedure to activate and deactivate the NE Wake Up modality is reported respectively in par. Config-
ure and activate the NE Wake Up modality and Deactivate the NE Wake Up modality.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 89


EQUIPMENT CONNECTION

After having graphically represented the network, it is necessary to activate the connection, that is the
communication, between NMS (logic NE objects created by the users) and the peripheral area (physical
equipment).

Doing this, we suppose that the correct operation of the physical connection is ensured by the TCP/IP net-
work.

Connection procedure

When the user sends the connection command, NMS sends a test message to verify the reach ability of
the equipment (Line Test).

If the test has result:


• NEGATIVE, the procedure is stopped: the equipment is not connected.
• POSITIVE, the system sends the global network parameters and then reads/acquires from the
equipment the current configuration and the alarms: the equipment is connected.

At the first connection the system, having no information stored in the database, acquires all the informa-
tion from the NE.

Then the equipment itself will spontaneously inform the supervisory system about possible changes con-
cerning the configuration or the status of the alarms (SNMP trap).
A polling cycle from the supervisory system is kept only to check the reachability status of the equipment.

The connection of one piece of equipment causes the automatic insertion of the equipment itself in the
specific polling cycle.

WARNING Only after that the equipment has been connected at least once, it is possible to open the rele-
vant equipment window.

Commands for the connection management

In order to change the connection status of one piece of equipment or to execute some tests or to re-align
the information stored in the database, the following commands are available:

Line Test command


Connect command
Disconnect command
Alarm Re-alignment command
Configuration Upload command

Line Test command

The Line Test command checks the real reachability of the equipment.

The check consists in the request by NMS to one NE of the value of the chosen parameter: if the NE an-
swers, the test has successful result, otherwise it fails.

All the NE’s, independently from their type or connection status, are programmed to answer to the test
message. Furthermore, the sending of the command does not influence the connection or alarm status of
the Network Element.

For the use of the command, refer to the par. Line Test.

90 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Connect command

The Connect command activates the connection between NMS and the remote equipment.

At the end of the procedure, if the result is positive, the system will be able to communicate with the NE,
it will have all the information relevant to the current status of the alarms and to the configuration and will
have sent the network time to the equipment.

It is not possible to connect one piece of equipment in connected status. Furthermore, the connection com-
mand towards one piece of equipment in unreachable status is automatically sent by the system at regular
intervals.

For the use of the command, refer to par. Connect.

Disconnect command

The Disconnect command deactivates the connection between NMS and the remote equipment: the sys-
tem stops managing the NE.

The disconnection of the equipment does not involve the deletion of the relevant information from the da-
tabase; they stay stored, even if the equipment is disconnected; the user can open the relevant equipment
window where the last acquired configuration is displayed.

For the use of the command, refer to par. Disconnect.

Alarm Re-alignment command

The Alarm Re-alignment command aligns the current equipment alarms.

The aligning procedure makes the system deletes the information of the current alarms table relevant to
the selected NE. Then the system requires to the NE the status of its alarms and stores them in the current
alarms table. The content of the current alarms table can be displayed opening the Current Alarm Browser
window.

This operation does not influence the connection status of the NE or its configuration.

It is suggested to select the command only when you suppose that a misalignment between the alarm
information known by NMS and the real alarm situation on NE has occurred. In fact this command does
not represent the normal procedure to acquire the equipment operating status.

For the use of the command, refer to par. Alarm Re-alignment.

Configuration Upload command

The Configuration Upload command aligns the information, relevant to the configuration and the alarms,
stored in the database to that really present in the equipment.

The procedure execution modality is fundamentally equal to the execution of the alarm aligning procedure
(Alarm Re-alignment command). The only difference is that the system requires to the equipment the sta-
tus of the alarms and also the configuration information relevant to all the objects known by the equipment
itself. Even in this case, the information replaces the one recorded in the database.
This operation does not influence the status of connection of the NE.

It is suggested to select the command only when you suppose that a misalignment between the alarm
information known by NMS and the real configuration and operating status of the NE occurred. In fact this
command does not represent the normal procedure to acquire the information relevant to a piece of equip-
ment.

For the use of the command, refer to par. Configuration Upload.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 91


Connection status of the equipment

The connection status of a piece of equipment shows to the user if the equipment is managed by NMS and,
if managed, its operating status (alarms). The status of the equipment can be:

Disconnected status
Connected status
Unreachable status
Maintenance status

In LX Map Manager window, the current status of a piece of equipment is represented by the colour of the
relevant NE symbol. In fact, one or more colours correspond to every status (Symbol characteristics: col-
our).
The colour of the NE symbol influences even the colour of the Container symbols containing the equipment
in the following way. If a container:
• Contains at least one connected NE, the Container object will assume the colour relevant to the
connected status: green (if NE is not alarmed) or light blue/yellow/orange/red (if the NE is
alarmed).
• Contains more connected NE’s or other Container objects, the colour of the Container object will
be determined by the colour of the NE or Container symbol with the most serious alarm.

The colour of the NE icon in maintenance status does not affect the colour of the Container icons containing
the NE itself. For instance, if in a Container object there is a piece of equipment in connected status (green
colour) and a piece of equipment in maintenance status (pink colour), the Container icon will get the colour
relevant to the connected status (green).

Disconnected status

Initial status of one NE just after its creation; then it is the status reached after a disconnection command.
In this condition, the equipment is not managed by the system: no message is sent or received and no
polling procedure is executed.

OPERATIONS that the user can execute when equipment is disconnected


• Send the Line Test, Connect.
• Delete an object from the map.
• It is possible to open the equipment window only if the NE has been connected at least once.
The disconnection does not involve the deletion of the database of the information on the equip-
ment configuration. In this case, however, the status and the values of the attributes of the ob-
jects contained in the window are not referred to the current condition of the equipment but to
the last known configuration.

Conditions/commands that determine the PASSING FROM ONE STATUS TO THE OTHER
After the sending of the Connect command:
• If the operation is successfully, the equipment passes to connected status.
• If the operation fails, the equipment passes in an unreachable status.

COLOUR of the NE symbol


The colour of the icon associated to the disconnected status is BROWN.

92 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Connected status

Status reached after a connection procedure has gone well. In this condition, the equipment correctly an-
swers to the system polling.
During the period when the equipment is connected, the user can send commands and require information.
Only exception to this rule is the presence of LCT in Configuration modality (pag.94).

OPERATIONS that the user can execute when equipment is connected


• Open the equipment window and verify/change the NE configuration.
The configuration/operating status of the NE corresponds to the real situation of the equipment.
• Send the commands for the management of the equipment.

Condition/commands that determine the PASSAGE FROM ONE STATUS TO THE OTHER
After:
• The user sends the disconnection command, the equipment switches to disconnected status.
• A system polling, if the equipment does not send any answer, the status from connected be-
comes unreachable.

COLOUR of the NE symbol


The colour of the symbol of a connected NE depends on the alarms of the equipment itself. Depending on
the severity of the current alarms, the colour can be:
• Green. The equipment is not alarmed.
• Light blue. At least one alarm of Warning level is present on the equipment (simple signal).
• Yellow. At least one alarm of Minor level is present on the equipment (alarm).
• Orange. At least one alarm of Major level is present on the equipment (serious alarm).
• Red. At least one alarm of Critical level is present on the equipment (very serious alarm).

If there are more alarms of different severity on the equipment at the same time, the colour of the NE
symbol will represent the most serious alarm.

Unreachable status

This is the status reached when the equipment, thought the automatic repetition of the messages, does
not answer to the polling of NMS or sends unknown messages. In this condition, the NE is not managed
by the system, which however sends a connection command at regular interval.

OPERATIONS executable by the user when equipment is unreachable


• Sending the Disconnect, Line Test, Connect.
• The equipment window can be opened only if the equipment has been connected at least once.
The status and the values of the attributes of the objects contained in the window will not be
referred to the current condition of the equipment but to the last known configuration.

Conditions/commands that cause the PASSAGE FROM ONE STATUS TO ANOTHER ONE
After the user or NMS has sent the connection command (automatic reconnection):
• If the operation is successful, the equipment passes to connected status.
• If the operation fails, the equipment remains in unreachable status.
After a user has sent the disconnection command:
• If the operation is successful, the equipment passes to disconnected status.
• If the operation fails, the equipment remains in unreachable status.

COLOUR of the NE symbol


The colour of the NE icon associated to the unreachable status is RED with an X on the symbol.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 93


Maintenance status

The maintenance status indicates a transient condition.


The equipment assumes this status during the execution of an operation, for example during the connec-
tion. At the end of the operation, the NE will assume the status associated to its condition (connected, dis-
connected, unreachable).

OPERATIONS executable by the user when equipment is unreachable


When the NE is in maintenance status, no operation can be executed.

COLOUR of the NE symbol


The colour of the NE icon associated to the maintenance status is RED.

Local management program WEB LCT

The term WEB LCT means the software application, developed to manage/control locally the equipment:
WEB Local Craft Terminal, Local Operator Manager, Local Craft Terminal.
The operations that can be executed via WEB LCT are basically those that can be executed via NMS.

More information on the use of the WEB LCT program is reported in the specific documentation. Here below
only some indications are reported about the relationships between WEB LCT and NMS:

Types of WEB LCT-equipment connection


Indication of the presence of the LCT user to the NMS5UX user
Enable/disable the LCT-equipment connection in Configuration modality

Types of WEB LCT-equipment connection

The local user can activate the WEB LCT-equipment connection in Monitoring modality (the user can only
verify the equipment configuration) or in Configuration modality (the user can both verify and change the
equipment configuration).

The local activation of a WEB LCT-equipment connection in modality:


• Monitoring, does not influence the acquisition of the alarms or the sending of commands by the
system: the NMS5UX user can open the equipment window and verify/change the equipment
configuration itself.
• Configuration, influences the acquisition of the alarms or the sending of the commands by the
system.
The NMS5UX user can open the equipment window (except for the equipment of PMP type) but
it cannot change the configuration and send commands with the following exceptions:
Execute the software reset of the equipment
Transfer the configuration of equipment to one or more real pieces of equipment
Update the equipment software
Force the logout of a NMS5UX user

During the period when the connection is active, no change relevant to the alarms is signalled
to NMS.
When the local WEB LCT-equipment connection is deactivated, NMS automatically re-aligns the
configuration (sending of the Configuration Upload command) to control possible changes exe-
cuted by the local user and to acquire the current alarms.
If the local user has changed the configuration of the remote equipment, the new values are
acquired and replace those previously stored in the database.

The connection of a SCT/LMT user with profile:


• Read Only or Read&Write is considered by NMS system as a WEB LCT connection in Monitoring
mode

94 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


• Station Operator or System is considered by NMS system as a WEB LCT connection in Configu-
ration mode.

Indication of the presence of the LCT user to the NMS5UX user

The activation and the deactivation of the local connection, both in Monitoring and Configuration modality,
are spontaneously communicated by the equipment to NMS and signalled to the user:
• In the map, a check sign is indicated next to the NE icon ( ) is indicated next to the NE icon.
This information is forwarded also to the Container objects containing the NE.
Furthermore, the activation of the local connection in Configuration modality is signalled to the
user in the map: the NE icon assumes the white colour.
This information is not forwarded by the Container objects that contain the NE symbol. For ex-
ample, if a Container object contains a connected NE (green colour) and equipment which the
LCT program in Configuration modality is connected (white colour), the Container symbol will
assume the colour relevant to the connection status (green).
• In the Alarm History Browser window, Current Alarm Browser window, Equipment Browser [List/
Locate] window, Information window.
• In the equipment window of the NE.

Enable/disable the LCT-equipment connection in Configuration modality

The NMS5UX user can enable/disable the LCT user to connect to the equipment in Configuration modality
setting the LCT Config.

This operation is not possible for equipment of type ALFOplus80HD.

If the parameter has value:


• Enabled, indicates that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment both in
Monitoring and Configuration modality.
• Disabled, indicates that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment only in
Monitoring modality.
Independently from the previous setting, when the equipment is switched off and switched on or reset, the
LCT Config parameter is automatically set to the Enabled value.

The command to set the LCT Config parameter is in the equipment window. Besides the status of the LCT
Config parameter is displayed in the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window.

Management via Command Line Interface (only for ALFOplus80HD)

The term CLI refers to the application Siae Microelettronica Operating System, which can be started se-
lecting the command Open CLI present in the contextual menu of the NE symbol.

The use of CLI allows the complete control of the Ethernet switch installed on the ALFOplus80HD equip-
ment. For more information about the use of CLI, refer to the relevant documentation.

Here below only some indications are reported about the relationships between CLI and NMS:

Connection CLI-equipment
Indication of the presence of CLI user to the NMS5UX user

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 95


Connection CLI-equipment

The activation of the connection CLI-equipment influences the acquisition of the alarms or the sending of
the commands by the system.

The NMS5UX user can open the equipment window (except for the equipment of PMP type) but it cannot
change the configuration and send commands with the following exceptions:

Execute the software reset of the equipment


Transfer the configuration of equipment to one or more real pieces of equipment
Update the equipment software

During the period when the connection is active, no change relevant to the alarms is signalled to NMS.

When the CLI-equipment connection is deactivated, NMS automatically re-aligns the configuration (send-
ing of the Configuration Upload command) to control possible changes executed by the local user and to
acquire the current alarms.

If the local user has changed the configuration of the remote equipment, the new values are acquired and
replace those previously stored in the database.

Indication of the presence of CLI user to the NMS5UX user

The activation and the deactivation of CLI connection are spontaneously communicated by the equipment
to NMS and signalled to the user:
• In the map, the activation of the connection is signalled to the user in the map: the NE icon
assumes the white colour.
This information is not forwarded by the Container objects that contain the NE symbol. For ex-
ample, if a Container object contains a connected NE (green colour) and equipment which the
LCT program in Configuration modality is connected (white colour), the Container symbol will
assume the colour relevant to the connection status (green).
• In the Alarm History Browser window, Current Alarm Browser window, Equipment Browser [List/
Locate] window, Information window.
• In the equipment window of the NE.

96 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


ALARM MANAGEMENT

Functionality of primary importance of NMS is the detection, visual signal and centralized storing of the
alarm/status/event signals of the managed equipment.

The alarm term defines the fault signal generated by an error or by a bad operation of the NE or of any
element that composes it.

The status and event terms identify the signals which display not a wrong operation, but a status change,
a running operation or an operation condition. In detail, the signals of:
• Status, are communicated spontaneously from the NE to the system, as for example:
• The activation/deactivation of the LCT-equipment connection.
• The start/end of the equipment software update.
• The activation/deactivation of the manual operations.
• The status of active/stand-by of duplicated parts of NE.
• Event, are generated by the system itself, as for example the start of an operation of alarm re-
alignment.

In the following of the chapter, the alarm generic term indicates the alarm/status/event signal.

Acquisition of the alarms

The detection and reset signals of an alarm are spontaneously forwarded to the supervisory centre by the
equipment (trap SNMP).

A polling process executed by the supervisory centre is kept only to check the reachability status of the
equipment.

The equipment in disconnected or unreachable status are not cyclically subjected to polling.

It is possible to force the acquisition of the equipment alarms using the Alarm Re-alignment or the Config-
uration Upload command.

Dynamic display of the alarms

At each change of the alarm status on the equipment in the network, NMS informs the user by means of
the LX Map Manager window, executing the following operations:
• If present in the open map, the NE symbol where the alarm has been detected changes colour
according to the severity associated to the alarm.
If an alarm more serious than the detected one is present on the equipment, the icon does not
change colour, because it is determined by the alarm more serious present on the equipment.
The NE icon displays even the information if an alarm has not been acknowledged yet.
• The status of the NE (change of colour and presence of a not yet checked alarm) is signalled
also by the Container symbols that have, inside them, this NE (the colour of the Container icons
changes).
The colour of the Container symbol is determined by the colour of the symbol of the contained
NE with the highest severity.
• If open, in the Alarm History Browser window, the record relevant to the detected alarm is add-
ed.
• If open, in the Current Alarm Browser window, the record relevant to the detected alarm is add-
ed.
• If open, in the equipment window relevant to the NE, where the alarm has been detected, the
NE symbol is graphically changed.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 97


If the equipment window has Read Only access the alarm is not signalled, as the window is not
dynamically updated. To update the alarms, it is necessary to require a new reading of the table
relevant to the current alarms.

In the Alarm History Browser and Current Alarm Browser window if:
• Some filters are active, a record could be not displayed as it does not match the filter criteria.
• The freezing of the window is activated, the record is not added.

Display of the current alarms and of the alarm history

The user can, in any moment, display:


• The history of the alarms relevant to all the pieces of equipment (Network Alarm History com-
mand) or only to the selected equipment (NE Alarm History command).
The alarm history term means the list of alarms, acquired and recorded by NMS in the time. The
alarm history records both the detection signal and the clearing signal of the alarm.
In the alarm history, it is possible to configure the maximum number of records (value that can
be set by the Superuser) that can be stored.
During the day, all the alarms sent by the equipment are stored in the table (even if their num-
ber exceeds the maximum value of records). At midnight, the number of record is checked; if
this exceeds the maximum set number, the system will delete, only among the raised and
cleared signals, the oldest records.
If the alarm history contains all active and not cleared alarms and their number exceeds the
maximum set value, the system will NOT delete any record.
When the maximum number of records in the table is exceeded, the message Alarm History oc-
cupation exceeded 100% is periodically displayed, warning about the critical situation. The dis-
play of the message and the frequency at which it is displayed can be configured by Superuser.
Default: display of the message active; frequency: every 60 seconds.
• The list of the alarms currently active on all the pieces of equipment (Network Current Alarms
command) or only in the selected equipment (NE Current Alarms command).

Alarm correlation

The term “alarm correlation” means the functionality that puts in relationship, in the alarm history, the
activation of an alarm with that of its clearing.

In detail, in the Alarm History Browser window the notification of the activation of the alarm is displayed
by a record where the date/time of activation of the alarm activation is displayed. The clearing of the same
alarm is indicated adding, to the already existing record, the indication of the deactivation date/time.

After a forced alignment of the alarm status, not all the notifications of the alarms active on the equipment
are recorded, but only the possible new alarms.

Furthermore, after the forced realignment, for the alarms that are not active anymore, the deactivation
date/time will be inserted in the relevant record.

WARNING If equipment is disconnected, all the (detected and detected/cleared) alarms relevant to that
equipment are removed by the alarm history.

98 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Saving the alarms

It is possible to save the alarm history stored in NMS database. In detail, it is possible to:
• Save all the alarm history of the database to tape and/or to disk (Alarm History Backup).
Then, it will be possible to restore the data (Alarm History Restore) and display them in the Old
History Browser window.
• Save to file the whole alarm history (or a part) from the system database (Copy the alarms list
to a text editor).
• Save to file the whole alarm history (or a part) recovered from tape or disk (Copy the alarms
list in a text editor).

Alarm severity

Every alarm, acknowledged and managed by NMS, has associated a severity which determines the alarm
importance. Every severity is identified by a name and a colour, as indicated in Tab.8.

Tab.8 Alarm severity

Severity Name Color

Very serious alarm Critical Red


Serious alarm Major Orange

Alarm Minor Yellow

Minor alarm Warning Light blue

The alarm severity is the criterion used by NMS to represent graphically the operational status of the equip-
ment.
When an alarm raises in a connected equipment, the icon that represents the equipment changes its colour
according to the severity of the active alarm.
The colour of the Container symbols containing the NE reflects the condition of current alarm.
If more alarms of different severity are present at the same time, the colour of the icon will represent the
alarm with highest severity; the same occurs for the container icons.
The alarm severity is reported also in the Alarm History Browser window and Current Alarm Browser win-
dow.

Change of the alarm severity

NMS allows changing, for each alarm, the severity of network and the local severity.

Network severity means the severity that characterizes the alarm when displayed by NMS. For each alarm,
the network severity is COMMON to all the NE’s of the same type present in all the maps. To change the
network severity of an alarm, use the Network Severity Code command (available only to the Superuser).

Local severity means the severity that characterizes the alarm when stored by the controller of the NE and
displayed by the local management system (LCT); this severity is not used by NMS. For the same alarm,
it is possible to define a local severity different from NE to NE. To change the local severity of an alarm,
use the Equipment Severity Code command.

Example

Suppose that two types of SDH Radio are connected to NMS: NE-A and NE-B.
By means of the Equipment Severity Code command, it is defined that, locally, the alarm x for NE-A has
severity Major, while for the NE-B has severity Minor.
Instead, using the Network Severity Code command, it is defined that the alarm x for all the NE’s of SDH
Radio type of Critical severity.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 99


In NE-A, the detection (or cleared) of the alarm x will be stored in the controller of the NE and seen by LCT
with Major severity, while it will be seen by NMS with Critical severity.
Instead, in NE-B, the detection (or clearing) of the alarm x will be stored in the controller of the NE and
seen by LCT with Minor severity, while it will be seen by NMS with Critical severity.

Change of the severity of User Input alarms

What described below is valid for all the alarms (of all the types of equipment) with the exception of the
alarms used by the user input.

The severity of User Input alarms is defined by a specific command in the equipment window.

This severity constitutes both the network and the local severity.
For example, if the User Input x alarm for the equipment is defined having a Critical severity, on its detec-
tion the alarm will be stored in the controller of the NE, seen by LCT and by NMS with Critical severity.

The setting of the severity is independent for each alarm of User Input, and local to the NE selected for the
operation. This means that the setting must be executed for each single alarm of user Input of each single
NE.

More information on the user inputs and on the command to change the severity is reported in the equip-
ment manuals.

Enable/disable the alarms

NMS allows enabling/disabling the alarms and/or the sending of the relevant traps. In detail, it is possible
to:
• Disable the alarm; in this case the detection (or clearing) of the alarm is not recorded in the
controller of the NE and it is not communicated to the supervision program: as the alarm has
never occurred.
• Disable the sending of traps; in this case, the detection (or clearing) of the alarm is recorded in
the controller of the NE, but it is not communicated to NMS.
If the Configuration Upload or Alarm Re-alignment command is sent to NE, also the alarms,
whose trap sending is disabled, will be acquired.

• Enable the alarm and the sending of trap; in this case the detection (or clearing) of the alarm is
recorded in the controller of the NE and communicated to NMS (with the sending of the relevant
trap) that display it in the current alarms and in the alarm history (default condition).

The enabling/disabling of the alarm and of the trap sending is independent for each alarm, and local to the
selected NE for the operation. This means that the setting must be made for each single alarm of each
single NE.

To enable/disable the alarms and the sending of traps of a piece of equipment, use the Equipment Severity
Code command.

It is possible to verify the list of the NE’s that have at least one disabled alarm/trap opening the Equipment
Browser [List/Locate] window and configuring properly the filter.

The severity level with which the same alarm is seen by NMS is defined by means of the Equipment Severity
Code command.

100 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Fleeting alarms

Sometime, on equipment, an alarm is detected and is cleared many times in a brief period.
The instability that characterizes these alarms, defined “fleeting”, causes a such number of alarms to sat-
urate the network. In fact, each time the alarm raises/clears, the system records a signal.
For this cause, before recording an alarm, the stability of the alarm itself is verified.
The criterion used to determine if an alarm is fleeting or not is the following: an alarm is considered fleeting
when NMS, during a period of time t, records that the number of activation of the alarm is higher than the
thr_in threshold.
An alarm will not be considered fleeting anymore if, during the successive period of time t, the number of
activation of the alarm is lower than the thr_out threshold.

Example
Suppose that the values t=120, thr_in=3, thr_out=1 are set.
The alarm A, within 120 seconds, activates and clears twice and, on its third activation, (thr_in=3) NMS
acknowledges it as fleeting alarm: the successive activation/clearing are not recorded in the Alarm History
table.
At the successive period of 120 seconds, if the alarm A activates and clears only once (thr_out=1), NMS
does not consider the alarm A as fleeting anymore.
The parameter t and the thr_in and thr_out thresholds can be changed by the Superuser. Their default
values are: t = 120 sec., thr_in = 3, thr_out =1.

In the Alarm History Browser window, when an alarm exits from the fleeting status and the last signal came
to the equipment indicating the deactivation of the alarm, the management of the alarm signal will take
place without differences with respect to a normal signal of cleared alarm: the alarm is correlated to the
previous signal.
Differently, when an alarm exits from the fleeting status and the last signal came to the equipment indi-
cating the activation of the alarm, the management will take place in the following way: first a signal of
cleared alarm will be forwarded, which will be correlated with the previous signal of fleeting alarm, and
then a new signal of active alarm of active alarm will be forwarded: in the Alarm History Browser window,
a record of fleeting alarm will be displayed, followed by a record of active alarm.

WARNING The fleeting condition of an alarm is not deleted at the forced realignment of the status of the
alarms (Alarm Re-alignment command).

Acknowledge the alarms

The current alarms and those present in the alarm history can be acknowledged: in the relevant window
there is the indication that the user acknowledged the detection or/and the clear of the alarm.

For the alarms stored in the alarm history and listed in the Alarm History Browser window or in the Old
History Browser window, it is possible to acknowledge both the detection and the clear of the alarm (Ac-
knowledge the alarms).

An alarm:
• Detected and acknowledged is identified by the letter S in the Ack column of the Alarm History
Browser or Old History Browser window.
• Detected/cleared and acknowledged is identified by the letter C in the Ack column of the Alarm
History Browser or Old History Browser window.

When the list of alarms is filtered or in the windows where the total number of acknowledged alarms, the
rules to define if an alarm is considered acknowledged or not are the following.

A acknowledged alarm is:


• An alarm detected and not yet cleared, for which the user has acknowledged the detection (pres-
ence of the letter S).
• An alarm detected and cleared, for which the user has acknowledged the clearing (presence of
the letter C).

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 101


A not acknowledged alarm is:
• An alarm detected and not yet cleared, for which the user has not acknowledged the detection
(absence of the letter S).
• An alarm detected and cleared, for which the user has not acknowledged the clearing (absence
of the letter C).

In this case, even if the user has acknowledged the detection of the alarm (presence of the letter S), it is
considered as not acknowledged because the user has not acknowledged its clearing.

For the current alarms, listed in the Current Alarm Browser window, there is not the above mentioned dis-
tinction, because it is possible to acknowledge only the detected alarms (Acknowledge the alarms).

Management of NE Log

With NE Log (Network Element Log) we mean a file where are recorded the signals of alarm/status (alarms)
stored in the controller of equipment.
The Log read by the equipment (NE Log) is stored in the machine disk, available for the next reading by
the user.

The creation of a NE Log can be manually done by the user and/or automatically by the system.

The manual creation of the NE Log of one or more pieces of equipment can be done by the user by means
of the command Fault > NE History Log.
By means of the commands, it is even possible to manage the NE Logs (delete, display the content) and
delete the alarms stored in the controller of equipment.

The automatic creation of the NE Logs, if the relevant function is active, consists in the automatic creation
of the NE Log for the equipment which pass from the unreachable status to the connected status.
The function for the automatic creation of the NE Logs can be activated/deactivated by the system admin-
istrator during the installation of NMS.

The NE Logs can be displayed only through the Equipment History Log Management Main Window.

102 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


PERFORMANCE MONITORING MANAGEMENT

The quality of the signal of the telecommunication equipment can be controlled via measures of Perfor-
mance Monitoring (PM).

A measure of PM consists in recording, during a set time period (observation period), the values of deter-
minate control parameters (BER, alarm count, etc).

Threshold limits (that can be changed by the Superuser) have been assigned to these parameters.

The exceeding of threshold limit indicates a more or less serious degradation of the signal. This condition
generates an alarm, which is recorded and managed by the equipment and by NMS as any other alarm.

WARNING The number and the type of measures of PM and the relevant control parameters are specific
for each type of NE. For their description, refer to the relevant equipment Manuals.

The considered control parameters changes according to the type of equipment and of measures that this
equipment supports. Generally, all the executed measures refer to Recommendations of ITU-T (for exam-
ple G.826, G.821, etc.).

Activation/deactivation of the PM measures

Activation/deactivation
It is possible to activate/deactivate the measures for a single piece of equipment at a time or
for more pieces of equipment (of the same type) at the same time.
Furthermore, for each equipment, it is possible to activate/deactivate each single measure in-
dependently.
The command to activate/deactivate a single PM measure is in the specific equipment window.
The description of the equipment window and the procedure for the activation/deactivation of
the PM measures are contained in the equipment Manual relevant to the type of considered NE.
The command to activate/deactivate the measures for more pieces of equipment (of the same
type) at the same time is View/Modify P.M. Status.

Measure storing
When a PM measure is activated, the controller of the equipment begins the storing of the values
of the control parameters.
The results of the measures are subdivided in records. Each record contains the values recorded
in a specific time interval (observation period).
If, at the end of the observation period, the measure has not been deactivated, another obser-
vation period begins and so on until the measure is not stopped.
When the system interrogates the equipment, this will send to it the records (daily and primary)
that stored.

Observation period
The equipment managed by NMS group the results of the PM measures in observation period of
15 minutes (primary records) and 24 hours (daily record).
The observation periods are not synchronized with the instant when the measure is activated,
but refer, for the primary records, to the quarter (00.00, 00.15, 00.30, etc.) and, for the daily
records, to the time 00.00 UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated).
For example, if a measure starts at time 11.40, the first primary record will have, as observation
period, 11.40...11.45 (corresponding to the interval 11.30...11.45), while the first daily record
will have, as observation period, 11.40...00.00.
For each type of measure, the equipment keeps in memory the last 16 primary records (corre-
sponding to the last 4 hours) and the last 2 daily records (corresponding to the last 2 days). The
previous records are overwritten.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 103


If the equipment has PM measures running and it is restarted or switched off, then, when it re-
starts to it is switched on, the measures active before the switching off will be automatically re-
started.
The (daily and primary) records relevant to the period when the measure has been interrupted
will be empty and, if reached the limit of 16 primary records and 1 daily record, will overwrite
the previous ones.

Acquisition of the results of the PM measures

The results of PM measures are acquired by NMS by means of a polling process (PM polling), executed at
regular intervals which change depending on the equipment type. In detail, two modalities configurable
during the installation are possible:

• for all the pieces of equipment but type ALCplus2, ALCplus2e and AGS10: every 2 hours.

• for the equipment of type ALCplus2, ALCplus2e and AGS10: automatically every 24 hours via FTP
(for the equipment supporting this protocol).

Requirements
The process of PM polling is managed by a dedicated program which, besides executing the poll-
ing, has the function to determinate which equipment must be polled.
The rules that equipment must match to be polled are the following:
• Equipment type. Not all the pieces of equipment managed by NMS supports the PM func-
tion. This equipment are not considered in the PM polling cycle.
• Equipment status. Only the equipment in connected status are polled. The equipment in
disconnected or unreachable status are not polled.
• Status of the PM measures. Only the equipment that have at least one measure active in
progress when the PM polling is executed.

Acquisition of measures
After a PM polling, the polled equipment sends the daily and primary records relevant to the
measures in progress.
If the measure is deactivated, when NMS executes the polling, the equipment sends all the (pri-
mary and daily) records calculated until that moment, except the last one.
For example, if the measure is activated at 9.27 and deactivated at 18.42, the record relevant
to the observation period 9.15...9.30 is transferred to the system in incomplete status, while
the record relevant to the period 18.30...18.45 is not sent.
If the measure is activated and deactivated more times during the same observation period, the
record containing the results of the last executed measure will be sent to NMS.
For example, if the measure is activated at 9.02 and deactivated at 9.07, then it is re-activated
at 9.09, the record relevant to the observation period 9.00...9.15 will contain the results of the
measures relevant to the period 9.09...9.15, while the results relevant to the period 9.02...9.07
will not be sent.

PM Polling and transmission of the commands

The PM polling is totally transparent to the user: it is automatically executed without affecting the opera-
tions executed by the NMS5UX user.

Being the only connection line between the system and the equipment, the transmission of a command by
the centre is prioritary with respect to the process of cyclic polling.

For example, when a command is sent to the equipment A during the polling of the equipment B, the sys-
tem waits for the end of the polling in progress. After this, it executes the command towards the equipment
A and, then, it restarts the polling procedure from the point it has been suspended on the equipment B.

104 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


PM Polling and activation of LCT-equipment connection

The activation of the local LCT-equipment connection does not affect the automatic acquisition of the re-
sults of the PM measures for the considered equipment.

Display of the results of the PM measures

The NMS5UX user can anytime display the results of the PM measures of a given piece of equipment, sub-
divided in daily or primary records of the last 180 days.

To display the daily and primary records, select the equipment in the map and choose the Performance
Monitoring command.

It is also possible to display the results of the PM measures, previously saved to disk by means of the Old
Performance Monitoring command.

Saving of the results of the PM measures

It is possible to save the results of the PM measures stored in the database of the system. In detail, it is
possible to:
• Save to tape and/or disk all the results of the PM measures relevant to a month present in the
database (Backup of PM measures).
Then, it will be possible to recover the data (Performance Monitoring Restore) and display them
in the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window (Old Performance Monitoring).

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 105


MENU AND COMMANDS

Some commands are optional, therefore they can be not displayed in the corresponding menu of NMS.

For each command, the type of access to the system (Read Only, Read-Write) and the user profile (Entry,
Normal,...) necessary to use the command or execute the relevant procedures are described.

Meaning of the button:


• OK: executes the operations set by the operator and closes the window.
• Apply: executes the operations set by the operator but does not close the window.

106 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


MAP

Refresh. It updates the LX Map Manager window.


Map Properties. It changes the dimension of the symbols of the map.
Submap Properties. It associates/remove the background from a container.
Import/Export. It compares/imports/exports the objects from a map to another. It saves the objects
of a map in a file.
Change Map. It changes or deletes the map.
Exit. It closes the LX Map Manager window (NMS GUI).

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 107


Refresh
System access | Read Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Refresh command update the LX Map Manager window.

Operations
Refresh the LX Map Manager window

Refresh the LX Map Manager window

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Map > Refresh.


The LX Map Manager window is closed and then opened again.

108 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Map Properties
System access | Read–Write
User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Map Properties command allows customizing the display settings of the symbols in the View area of
LX Map Manager window (equipment, containers, links, etc.).

Operations
Customizing the display settings in the map

Customizing the display settings in the map

System access | Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Function not available if you are working within a Super-map.

1. Select Map > Map Properties.

2. In the Symbol Size (Pixel) area, set the wished size (in pixel) of the symbols in the map.
3. In the Physical Link View area, select the check-boxes relevant to the types of links (Radio, ETH, STM-
1, E1, NBUS) you wish to display in the map. The multiple selection is allowed.

4. In the Physical Link Capacity View area, select the check-boxes relevant to the information (Link Type,
Ethernet Bandwidth, TDM Bandwidth) you wish to display for every link in the map. The multiple selec-
tion is allowed.

5. Press OK.
The View area of the map changes the display type according to the selected settings.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 109


Submap Properties
System access | Read–Write
User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Submap Properties command associates a background to the container in such a way that, on its
selection in the View area, the background is displayed besides the symbols present in the container.

It is possible to associate a different background to each container in the same map.

Operations
Associate/remove the background to a container

Associate/remove the background to a container

System access | Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Function not available if you are working within a Super-map.

1. Select, in the Map area, the container which you wish to associated the background to.
2. Select Map > Submap Properties.

3. To add the background type the path/name of the file in the Background Pixmap box and press OK.
The system acknowledges, as background, the files in GIF format.
Press Browse to search the wished file.
The background is displayed in the View area.

4. To remove the background, delete the file specified in the Background Pixmap box and press OK.
The background is removed in the View area.

110 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Import/Export
System access | Read Only, Read–Write
User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Import/Export command imports/exports/compares the objects from a map to another and saves
the objects of a map in a file.

Operations
Copy the objects of a map/container to a different map/container
Copy the objects of a file to a map/container
Save the objects of a map/container to a file
Compare the objects of different maps/containers
Compare the objects of a file with the objects of a map/container

Related Topics
Import Export Map window

Copy the objects of a map/container to a different map/container

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Function not available if you are working within a Super-map.

1. Select Map > Import/Export.

2. Select, in the Operation area, the Copy data option.


3. Select, in the Import/Export area, the From Map/Submap to Map/Submap option.

4. Set the source map/container:

a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box.


The Select Submap window opens.

b. Select the wished map in the Map area.

c. If you wish to copy only the objects of a container of the map, select the container in the Submap
area.

d. Press OK.
The source map/container is displayed in the Source box.

5. Set the destination map/container:

a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Destination box.


The Select Submap window opens.

b. Select the wished map in the Map area.


The destination map must be different from the source map.

c. If you wish that the objects of the source map or container are pasted in a container of the des-
tination map, select the container in the Submap area.

d. Press OK.
The destination map/container is displayed in the Destination box.

6. Select, in the Mode area, the option:


• Clear and Copy All, if you wish that the objects in the source map/container replace the objects
in the destination map/container.
• Copy Only Differences, if you wish to add only the different objects in the source map/container
to the destination map/container. The identical objects will not be added.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 111


7. Press Apply.
The Messages area displays the detail regarding the executed operation. A record is displayed for each
deleted and/or created object.

Copy the objects of a file to a map/container

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Function not available if you are working within a Super-map.

1. Select Map > Import/Export.

2. Select, in the Operation area, the Copy data option.

3. Select, in the Import/Export area, the From File to Map/Submap option.

4. Set the file from which you wish to copy the objects:
a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box.
The File Selection window opens.

b. Type the name of the file in the Selection box.


The system proposes the files of the default directory. Change the path, if necessary.

c. Press OK.
The Source box displays the path/name of the source file.

5. Set the destination map/container:

a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Destination box.


The Select Submap window opens.
b. Select the wished map in the Map area.

c. If you wish that the objects stored in the file are pasted in a container of the destination map,
select the container in the Submap area.
d. Press OK.
The destination map/container is displayed in the Destination box.

6. Select, in the Mode area, the option:


• Clear and Copy All, if you wish that the objects in the file replace the objects in the destination
map/container.
• Copy Only Differences, if you wish to add only the different objects in the file to the destination
map/container. The identical objects will not be added.

7. Press Apply.
The Messages area displays the detail regarding the executed operation. A record is displayed for each
deleted and/or created object.

Save the objects of a map/container to a file

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Function not available if you are working within a Super-map.

1. Select Map > Import/Export.

2. Select, in the Operation area, the Copy data option.

3. Select, in the Import/Export area, the From Map/Submap to File option.

112 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


4. Set the source map/container:

a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box.


The Select Submap window opens.

b. Select the wished map in the Map area.

c. If you wish to copy only the objects of a container of the map, select the container in the Submap
area.

d. Press OK.
The source map/container is displayed in the Source box.

5. Set the file where saving the objects:

a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box.


The File Selection window opens.

b. Type the name of the file in the Selection box.


The system proposes the files of the default directory. Change the path, if necessary.

c. Press OK.
The Destination box displays the path/name of the destination file.

6. Press Apply.
The Messages area displays the detail regarding the executed operation. A record is displayed for each
saved object.

Compare the objects of different maps/containers

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Function not available if you are working within a Super-map.

1. Select Map > Import/Export.

2. Select the Compare data option in the Operation area.

3. Select in the box:


• View all data. Compares all the objects in the source map/container with those in the destination
map/container. The Messages area displays all the objects in the maps/containers.
• View aligned data. Compares the objects in the map/container with those in the destination
map/container. The Messages area displays only the objects in both the maps/containers.
• View not aligned data. Compares the objects in the source map/container with those in the des-
tination map/container. The Messages area displays only the different objects.

4. Select the From Map/Submap to Map/Submap option in the Import/Export area.


5. Set the source map/container:

a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box.

b. In the Select Submap window, select the wished map in the Map area.

c. If you wish to copy only the objects of a container of the map, select the container in the Submap
area.

d. Press OK.
The source map/container is displayed in the Source box.
6. Set the destination map/container:

a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Destination box.

b. In the Select Submap window, select the wished map in the Map area.
The destination map must be different from the source map.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 113


c. If you wish that the objects stored in the file are compared with the objects in a container of the
destination map, select the container in the Submap area.

d. Press OK.
The destination map/container is displayed in the Destination box.
7. Press Apply.
The Messages area displays the detail regarding the executed operation. A record is displayed for each
compared object.

Compare the objects of a file with the objects of a map/container

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Function not available if you are working within a Super-map.

1. Select Map > Import/Export.

2. Select, in the Operation area, the Compare data option.

3. Select the wished value in the box:


• View all data. Compares all the objects in the file with those in the destination map/container.
The Messages area displays all the objects in the file and in the maps/containers.
• View aligned data. Compares the objects in the file with those in the destination map/container.
The Messages area displays only the objects in the file and in the map/container.
• View not aligned data. Compares the objects in the file with those in the destination map/con-
tainer. The Messages area displays only the different objects.
4. Select the From File to Map/Submap option in the Import/Export area.

5. Set the file containing the objects to compare:

a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box.

b. In the File Selection window, type the name of the file in the Selection box.
The system proposes the files of the default directory. Change the path, if necessary.

c. Press OK.
The Source box displays the path/name of the source file.

6. Set the destination map/container:

a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Destination box.

b. In the Select Submap window, select the wished map in the Map area.
The destination map must be different from the source map.

c. If you wish that the objects stored in the file are compared with the objects in a container of the
destination map, select the container in the Submap area.

d. Press OK.
The destination map/container is displayed in the Destination box.

7. Press Apply.
The Messages area displays the detail regarding the executed operation. A record is displayed for each
compared object.

114 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Import Export Map window

The window manages the configuration parameters for the operations of map import and export.

Parameters
Operation. Type of executed operation:
• Copy Data. It copies the objects from a file or map/container to a different file or map/
container.
• Compare Data. It compares the objects of a file or map/container to a different map/con-
tainer.
• View all data. It compares all the objects in the source map/container with those
in the destination map/container. The Messages area displays all the objects in
the maps/containers.
• View aligned data. It compares the objects in the map/container with those in the
destination map/container. The Messages area displays only the objects in both
the maps/containers.
• View not aligned data. It compares the objects in the source map/container with
those in the destination map/container. The Messages area displays only the dif-
ferent objects.

Import/Export. Options of import/export:


• From Map/Submap to Map/Submap. It copies/compares the objects in a map/container
in a different map/container.
• From File to Map/Submap. It copies/compares the objects in a file to a map/container.
• From Map/Submap to File. It copies the objects in a map/container to a file.

Mode. Data copy mode:


• Clear and Copy All. It replaces the objects in a file or map/container with those in a dif-
ferent file or map/container.
• Copy Only Difference. It compares the objects in two different files or maps/containers
and copies in the destination map/container only the different objects.

Source. File or map/container from which the objects are copied (source).

Destination. File or map/container to which the objects are pasted (destination).

Messages. Each record identifies an object involved in the operation. Depending on the type of
executed operation, one or more fields will be present displaying the operation type, the object
involved in the operation and the result of the operation itself.

Push-buttons
Apply. It applies the settings.
Cancel. It closes the window without applying the settings.
Browse. It opens the system window for the file selection.

Menu bar
File > Close. It closes the window.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 115


Change Map
System access | Read Only, Read–Write
User profile | Privileged, Superuser

The Change Map command allows managing the system maps.

Operations
Change map

Add a map
Delete a map

GUI
Change Map window

Change map

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Map > Change Map.

2. Select a map from the list.

3. If the map has access:


• Read-Write, press:
• Open Map READ/WRITE to open the map in Read-Write access.
• Open Map READ/ONLY to open the map in Read Only access.
• Read, press Open Map READ/ONLY to open the map in Read Only access.
The Open Map READ/WRITE push-button is not available.
The current map is closed and the new map is opened.
One's user and operating level are kept also in the new map.

Add a map

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Superuser

1. Select Map > Change Map.

2. Press Add Map.

3. Type the name of the map you wish to create in the Map Name text box.

4. To create a Super map, select Super Map.

5. Press Ok.
The name of the just created map is displayed in the Change Map window.

116 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Delete a map

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Superuser

WARNING It is not possible to delete a map with Read access or the current map.

1. Select Map > Change Map.

2. Select a map with Read-Write access from the list.

3. Press Delete Map and confirm.


The map is removed from the list.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 117


Change Map window

Parameters
Map name. Name of the map.
Permission. Type of available access:
• Read/Write: the map can be opened with Read-Write or Read Only access.
• Read: the map can be opened only with Read Only access (Read-Write access already
occupied).

Comment. Additional notes. The wording (Current Map) indicates the currently open map.

Push-buttons
Open Map READ/WRITE. It opens the selected map in read-write access. Push-button not
available if the selected map is a Super map.
Open Map READ ONLY. It opens the selected map in read-only access.
Add Map. It creates a new empty map.
Delete Map. It deletes the selected map.
Close. It closes the window.

118 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Exit
System access | Read Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Exit command closes the LX Map Manager window and then the NMSGUI.

Operations
Close the LX Map Manager window

Close the LX Map Manager window

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Map > Exit or press .

2. Press Ok.

WARNING The closure of LX Map Manager window causes the automatic closure of all the possible open
window of NMS (Alarm History Browser, Equipment Information, etc.).

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 119


EDIT

Add. It creates objects for the graphic representation of the network in the map.
Delete. It deletes the objects from the map.
Modify/View. It displays and/or changes the characteristics of the objects.
Information. It displays the information of the symbol.
Graphical Symbol Properties. It displays the graphic parameters of the symbol.
Find. It searches an object of the map.
Arrange Symbols. It aligns vertically/horizontally the symbols.
Generate Info for Web. It checks the database information necessary to the RAN (Remote Access
NMS5UX) application.
Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers. It sets the size of the containers windows such as
the size of the window where the command is selected.

These commands are used to represent graphically the equipment network in the maps and to provide to
NMS the parameters to manage and control each single object.
Before using them, it is suggested to read the Graphic representation of the network where the modalities
to configure NMS correctly and rapidly are described.

120 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Add
System access | Read–Write
User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Before creating an object, it is suggested to read the Rules for the creation of the objects.

The Add command creates objects for the graphic representation of the network in the map.

Operations (map)
Create Container objects
Create Network Element object
Create virtual Network Element objects
Create Generic Symbols (graphic symbols)
Create graphical Link objects
Create Physical Links objects
Create Label objects
Create Container, NE, graphical Link and Label objects described in a file

Operations (super-map)
Add a map to a Super-map

GUI
Add Physical Link window

See also
Container objects
Network Element objects
Generic Symbol objects
Link objects
Label objects
Objects creation - Add Network From File functionality
Objects creation - Add Network From File functionality

Create Container objects

System access | Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING It is possible to create all the wished Container objects.

1. Move to the point of the map where you wish to create the container.

2. Select Edit > Add > Container or press .


3. Type the name of the container (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 character and maximum 48 char-
acters) in the Label box. The name will be displayed under the symbol of the container.

4. In the Type area, select the type of container you wish to create among: Subnetwork, Station, Substa-
tion.

5. In the Comment area, type possible information relevant to the object (max 100 characters).
The setting of this parameter is optional.

6. Press OK.
The container is displayed in the New Object Area of the LX Map Manager window. Move the symbol in
any point of the View area.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 121


Create Network Element object

System access | Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING The maximum number of equipment objects that can be created depends on one's codeword.

1. Move to the point of the map where you wish to create the NE.

2. Select Edit > Add > Network Element or press .

3. Type the IP address of the NE in the IP Address box.


If you wish to create a:
• ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node object, type the IP address of the main equipment of the node.
• PMP object, type the IP address of the Proxy interface used for the connection to the master
station.
The IP address set in this field must CORRESPOND to the IP address of the NE, locally defined. If the
address do not coincide, it will not possible to send commands to the NE itself.
After the creation of the NE, the IP address cannot be changed.
It is not possible to assign the same IP address to two different NE’s, even of different type.
If a NE object with the IP address is already present in the map, the values assigned to the same object
present in the other map will be automatically displayed in all the other fields of the Add Equipment
window.

4. Type, in the Logical Address box, the logical address of the NE (alphanumeric string of max. 32 char-
acters).
The logical address will be displayed under the symbol of the NE.
The same value of IP Address can be assigned to the logical address, but the same logical address to
cannot be assigned to two different NE’s.

5. Execute one of the following operations, in alternative:


• Select, in the Type area, the type of equipment you are adding to the map (see Tab.2).
• Press Siae Generic Equipment. The system automatically selects, in the area Type, the icon
...... During the first operation of Line Test of the system towards the equipment, the system
will automatically assign the correct equipment type to the equipment.
WARNING This operation is not available for equipment belonging to a nodal configuration and
for equipment in XPIC configuration.

6. ONLY if the equipment is managed by Proxy Agent and the Proxy Agent application is installed, activate
the Proxy Address box.
The box aside displays the default address, configured by the system administrator, used by the Proxy
Agent to identify the equipment.
In order to change the address, type in the box the new address of the machine to which the Proxy
Agent sends the traps coming from the equipment.
For the ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node objects, if the Proxy Address box is activated, the addresses by
which the equipment belonging to the node are acknowledged by the Proxy Agent are configured.

7. Set, in SNMP Protocol box, the type of SNMP protocol used to communicate with the equipment: SNMP
V1, SNMP V2 or SNMP V3.
The selected value must be coherent with that set previously set on the equipment.
WARNING The communication protocol SNMPv3 is available only for ALCplus2e and ALFOplus equip-
ment. It is possible to migrate from the SNMPv1/SNMPv2c protocol to the SNMPv3 protocol and vice
versa only by means of WEB LCT application. For more information, refer to the manual of the equip-
ment Manager.

8. Type possible additional information (max 100 characters) in the Comment area.
The setting of this parameter is optional.

9. Press Ok.
The NE is displayed in the New Object Area of the LX Map Manager window. Move the symbol in any
point of the View area.
If the created NE symbol is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the status of the ex-
isting object.

122 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Create virtual Network Element objects

System access | Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING It is possible to create all the wished SNMP virtual NE objects.

1. Move to the point of the map where you wish to create the virtual NE.

2. Select Edit > Add > Virtual Network Element.

3. Type the logical address of the virtual NE (alphanumeric string of max 32 characters) in the Logical
Address box.
The logical address will be displayed under the symbol of the NE.
It is not possible to assign the same logical address to two virtual NE’s.

4. In the Type area, select the type of virtual equipment you wish to create (see Tab.2).
5. Type additional information (max 100 characters) in the Comment area.
The setting of this parameter is optional.

6. Press OK.
The virtual NE is displayed in the New Object Area of the LX Map Manager window. Move the symbol in
any point of the View area.

Create Generic Symbols (graphic symbols)

System access | Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING It is possible to create all the wished Generic Symbol objects.

1. Move to the point of the map where you wish to create the Generic Symbol.

2. Select Edit > Add > Generic Symbol.

3. Type the name of the generic symbol (alphanumeric string of max 40 characters) in the Label box.
The name will be displayed under the generic symbol.
It is possible to assign the same name to more graphic symbols, even of different type.

4. In the Group area, select the group where the generic symbol is contained.

5. In the Object area, select the generic symbol you wish to create.

6. Press OK.
The Generic Symbol is displayed in the New Object Area of the LX Map Manager window. Move the sym-
bol in any point of the View area.

Create graphical Link objects

System access | Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING It is possible to create all the wished graphical Link objects.

1. Move to the point of the map where you wish to create the Link.

2. Select the two objects among which you wish to create the connection.
The operation is not executed if selected:
• A container and a NE or Generic Symbol
• Two containers
• A single object

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 123


• More than two objects

3. Select Edit > Add > Link.

4. Type the name of the connection (alphanumeric string of max 40 characters) in the Label box.
It is possible to assign the same name to more graphical Links even of different type.

5. Activate the Show Label box if you wish that the name of the connection is displayed in the map.
The display of the names of the Link objects is influenced even by the command View > Show/Hide
Link Label (see Show/hide the names of the Link objects/Tab.10).

6. In the Connection type area, select the type of connection.

7. Type additional information (max 100 characters) in the Comment area.


The setting of this parameter is optional.

8. Press OK.
The connection line is displayed between the selected objects.
If one of the two object is moved, the line automatically adapted according to the move.

Create Physical Links objects

System access | Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the two NE’s between which you wish to configure the physical link.
The command Physical Link is not available if the operator has not selected the two NE’s in the map.
The operation is not executed if selected:
• A container and a NE or Generic Symbol
• Two containers
• A single object
• More than two objects

2. Select Edit > Add > Physical Link.

3. Type an alphanumeric string of at most 50 characters in the Link Label box. This string constitutes the
name of the link.
4. Select the option push-button Link Type corresponding to the type of link you are creating.
Depending on the type of selected link, the available channels are selected.
If the label [In Use] is displayed next to the name of a channel, this means that the channel is already
occupied by another link and cannot be used.

5. In the Channels area of the boxes Source and Destination, select the channels on the source and des-
tination equipment between which create the physical link.
The number of channels selected in the Source area and in the Destination area must be the same,
otherwise the system does not execute the operation and answer with an error message.
If more channels are selected in the Source and Destination area, the system makes the first channel
selected in the Source area corresponds to the first channel selected in the Destination area and so on.

6. Press OK.
If the operation is successful, the symbol of the link is displayed in the map window (if the two NE’s are
in the same map) or not depending on the display settings of the map (Customizing the display settings
in the map).
The physical links of radio type are represented in the map window by a blue dashed line, all the other
types of links by a blue continue line.
After the creation, it is only possible to Verify/modify the E1 channels of a Physical Link object. Only
for the physical links of E1 type, the operator can even Verify/modify the E1 channels of a Physical Link
object.

124 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Create Label objects

System access | Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING It is possible to create all the wished Label objects.

1. Move to the point of the map where you wish to create the wording.

2. Select Edit > Add > Label.

3. Type an alphanumeric string of max 50 characters in the Label box.


It is possible to create the same label more times.

4. Press OK.
The object is displayed in the New Object Area of the LX Map Manager window. Move the symbol in any
point of the View area.

Create Container, NE, graphical Link and Label objects described in a file

System access | Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Before executing the operation, it is necessary:


• Create the file in csv format you wish to use for the automatic creation of the objects.
• To copy the file (.csv) to the server where NMS is installed (default directory: opt/nms5ux/data/
files).

1. Select Edit > Add > Network From File.

2. Select the wished file (csv format) in the Files list.


The list displays the files of the predefined directory (displayed in the Selection box). Change the path,
if necessary.

3. Press Ok.
The Add From File Report - <path/name of the selected file> window, for every created object, shows
in the column:
• Category and Type. Object type.
• Name. Logical address (NE) or name of the object.
• Message. Self-explanatory message about the result of the object creation.
If the total operation of object creation:
• Was successful, the objects described in the file will be present in the LX Map Manager.
• Was failed, the message SYNTAX ERROR - operation ABORTED is displayed in the Add From File
Report... window.

Add a map to a Super-map

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Function available ONLY if you are working within a Super-map.

1. Select Edit > Add Map.

2. Select the wished map in the Available Maps area.

3. Press Ok.
The Add Remote Map window closes and the selected map is placed into the New Object Area of the
Super-map window.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 125


Add Physical Link window

The window allows creating a physical link between equipment.

Parameters

Link Label. Name of the Link. When the window is opened, if two NE’s are selected in Packet
Service Manager Map window, the Link Label box indicates the default name given to the Link
with the following format: <source NE logic address> - <destination NE logic address>.

Link Type. Type of physical link composing the physical connection (Radio, E1, ETH, STM-1,
NBUS). Depending on the selected radio button, the channels displayed in the Channels boxes
change.

Channels. List of channels present on the NE of the type selected in Link Type parameter. For
every channel, the name (for example LAN-1...) and the status are displayed:
• <no wording>. The port is available for a connection of the considered Link.
• [In Use]. The port is already used for a connection by a different Link.

Equipment Information. Area with the following read-only data (displayed when one port is
selected in the Channels area):
• NE Name. Logical name of the selected NE.
• NE Type. Type of selected equipment.
• IP Address. Physical address of the selected equipment.
• Max Eth. Capacity, equipment Ethernet capacity available at the maximum modulation.
• Min Eth. Capacity, equipment Ethernet capacity available at the minimum modulation.

Maximum and minimum modulations are meaningful only in case of radio links managing the
ACM functionality. In all the other cases, the maximum modulation and minimum modulation
coincide.

Push-buttons
OK. Applies the changes and closes the window.

Apply. Applies the changes and does not close the window.

Cancel. Closes the window without applying the changes.

126 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


SNMP protocol (information)

SNMP protocol is available in 3 versions: SNMPv1, SNMPv2c and SNMPv3.

The main difference between the SNMPv1/SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 protocols consists in the management of
the message security and of the access control.

SNMPv1/v2c
SNMPv3

SNMPv1/v2c

Versions 1 and 2 of SNMP protocol uses a security model based on “community”: the messages are trans-
mitted not encrypted and can be copied or modified.

SNMPv3

SNMPv3 protocol, instead, foresees a security model based on the management of the users for the pro-
tection of the messages and the control of the accesses.

In SNMPv3, every user is provided with his own authentication password and packet encryption password.
SNMPv3 protocol uses the algorithms HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA1 to authenticate the packets. The user
password is used as secret key to calculate the HMAC code. The packet, in order to be authenticated, must
contain, besides the HMAC code, even the user name.
Moreover, SNMPv3 protocol foresees the possibility to encrypt the part of the packet containing the OID’s
of the MIB objects and the relevant values, using the encryption algorithm DES56. The key used for the
encryption is different from the key used for the HMAC authentication.
This allows defining if the user is given an access:
• without authentication (noAuthPriv)
• with authentication (AuthNoPriv)
• with authentication and encryption (AuthPriv)
For more information, refer to RFC 3410, 3411, 3412, 3413, 3415 and 3584.

Tab.9 Security mechanisms in SNMPv1/v2c and SNMPv3

Security Security level Authentication Encryption Description


model
SNMPv1/v2c noAuthNoPriv String No Authentication based on Community: the
Community passwords are transmitted not encrypted
and displayed in the traces
SNMPv3 noAuthNoPriv Username No Authentication based on user name
AuthNoPriv MD5 or SHA No Authentication based on algorithms
HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA
AuthPriv MD5 or SHA DES 56 Authentication based on algorithms
HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA and encryption
with algorithms CBC-DES (DES-56) be-
sides authentication

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 127


Delete
System access | Read–Write
User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Delete command deletes an object from the map.

Operations
Delete an object from the map

Delete an object from the map

System access | Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the object to delete.

In a map, it is possible to delete the following objects:


• Container. It can be deleted only if it does not contain objects.
• Network Element. If present only in one map, can be deleted only if it is in disconnected status
(brown symbol).
If the object is present in more maps, it is possible to delete the symbol even if it is in connected
status, except for the last copy for which the above mentioned rule is valid: it can be deleted
only if in disconnected status.
The virtual NE and NE WEB Generic type can be always deleted.
If the object is managed even by the Ring Manager and/or Packet Service Manager application,
first it must be deleted from the Ring Manager and/or Packet Service Manager Map window and
then it can be deleted from the map.
• Generic Symbol, graphical Link, Physical Link or Label. It can be always deleted.
A connection is automatically deleted even when one of the two symbols, which is connected to,
is removed.

In a Super-map, it is possible to delete the object:


• Map. There is no restriction to the deletion of a map contained into a Super-map.

2. Select Edit > Delete or press the right mouse button, select Delete and confirm.
The object is removed from the map.

128 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Modify/View
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Read–Only: Entry, Normal; Read–Write: Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING The values of some parameters cannot be changed. If it was necessary to modify these param-
eters, it is suggested to delete the object and then create it again assigning the new values to the param-
eters.
If the same object has been created in two different maps, when the values of the object parameters in
the first map are changed, the system automatically changes the values of the corresponding object pa-
rameters in the second map.

The Modify/View command displays/modifies the characteristics of the objects.

Operations
Verify/change the parameters of a Container object
Verify/change the parameters of a Network Element object
Verify/change the parameters of a Generic Symbol object
Verify/change the label of a Physical Link object
Verify/modify the E1 channels of a Physical Link object
Verify/modify a Label object
Verify the symbol information of a symbol

Verify/change the parameters of a Container object

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read–Only: Entry, Normal; Read–Write: Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the wished Container object.


2. Select Edit > Modify/View > Container or press the right mouse button and select Properties.
The Container Properties window displays the following parameters:
• Label. Container name.
• Type. Container type.
• Comment. Additional information
It is possible to change the all parameters. The modality to set the parameters is the same described
in par. Create Container objects.

3. Press OK.

Verify/change the parameters of a Network Element object

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read–Only: Entry, Normal; Read–Write: Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the wished NE or Virtual NE object.

2. Select Edit > Modify/View > Network Element or press the right mouse button and select Prop-
erties.
If the selected object is:
• Network Element, the box/area shows:
• IP Address, the IP address of the NE
• Logical Address, the logical address of the NE
• Type, the type of NE
• Proxy Address, address of the machine to which the Proxy Agent sends the traps coming
from the NE.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 129


• SNMP Protocol, version of the SNMP protocol used to communicate with the equipment.
The selected value must be coherent with that set previously set on the equipment.
WARNING The communication protocol SNMP V3 is available only for ALCplus2e and AL-
FOplus equipment. It is possible to migrate from the SNMPv1/SNMPv2c protocol to the
SNMPv3 protocol and vice versa only by means of WEB LCT application. For more infor-
mation, refer to the manual of the equipment Manager.
• Comment, additional information
It is always possible to change the Logical Address, Type, Proxy Address, Comment parameters.
The modality to set the parameters is the same described in par. Create Network Element ob-
ject.
The change of the Logical Address parameter involves the change of the name even for the cop-
ies of the same NE present in the additional applications of NMS (for example, Ring Manager,
Packet Service Manager, RAN, etc.).
The Ip Address parameter can be modified only if the equipment is disconnected even on NMS
side.
• Virtual Network Element, the box/area shows:
• Logical Address, the logical address of the NE
• Type, the type of NE
• Comment, additional information
It is possible to change the all parameters. The modality to set the parameters is the same de-
scribed in par. Create virtual Network Element objects.

3. Press OK.

Verify/change the parameters of a Generic Symbol object

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read–Only: Entry, Normal; Read–Write: Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the wished Generic Symbol.


2. Select Edit > Modify/View > Generic Symbol or press the right mouse button and select Proper-
ties.
The Generic Symbol Properties window displays the parameters:
• Label. Generic symbol name.
• Group. Group containing the symbol.
• Object. Symbol.
It is possible to change the all parameters. The modality to set the parameters is the same described
in par. Create Generic Symbols (graphic symbols).

3. Press OK.

Verify/change the label of a Physical Link object

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read–Only: Entry, Normal; Read–Write: Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the wished physical Link object.

2. Select Edit > Modify/View > Link or the command Properties in the menu that opens selecting the
right button of the mouse.

3. Type the new label of the link in the text box Link Label.

WARNING The Modify Physical Link window is equal to the Add Physical Link window. All the parameters
are read-only, except for the name of the link (Link Label). The only allowed operations are the change
of the link name and the addition of E1 channels to the link (only for links of E1 type).

4. Press Update Label.

130 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Verify/modify the E1 channels of a Physical Link object

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read–Only: Entry, Normal; Read–Write: Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Procedure available only for Physical Link objects of E1 type.

1. Select the wished Physical Link object.

2. Select Edit > Modify/View > Link or the command Properties in the menu that opens selecting the
right button of the mouse.

3. Press Configure E1 connections.

WARNING The Modify Physical Link window is equal to the Add Physical Link window. All the parameters
are read-only, except for the name of the link (Link Label). The only allowed operations are the change
of the link name and the addition of E1 channels to the link (only for links of E1 type).

4. In order to:
• add E1 channels to the selected link of E1 type:
• select, in the Source and Destination boxes of the FREE CHANNELS area, the E1 channels
you wish to add.
The number of channels selected in the Source area and in the Destination area must be
the same, otherwise the system does not execute the operation and answer with an error
message.
If more channels are selected in the Source and Destination area, the system makes the
first channel selected in the Source area corresponds to the first channel selected in the
Destination area and so on.
• press Add Connection.
• remove an E1 connection from the selected link of E1 type:
• select, in the CONNECTIONS area, the E1 link you wish to remove.
• press Remove Connection.

Verify/modify a Label object

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read–Only: Entry, Normal; Read–Write: Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the wished Label object.

2. Select Edit > Modify/View > Label or press the right mouse button and select Properties.
The wording is displayed in the Label box.

3. To modify the label, type the new value (alphanumeric string of max 50 characters) in the Label box.

4. Press OK.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 131


Information
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Command not available for Generic Symbol, Label, Physical Link or Link objects.

The Information command displays the information of the symbol.

Operations
Verify the symbol information of a symbol
Manage the informative notes of a NE symbol

GUI
Information window

Verify the symbol information of a symbol

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the wished object.

2. Select Edit > Information or press the right mouse button and select Information.
The Information window opens, where the symbol information is displayed (acknowledge status of the
alarms, of the signal of LCT presence, Incorrect Upload and the notes).

Manage the informative notes of a NE symbol

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the wished NE object.

2. Select Edit > Information or press the right mouse button and select Information.

3. Add/change/delete the text (max 50 characters) in the Note area.

4. Press OK.
If some notes are present, the symbol , is added next to the equipment symbol.

132 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Information window

This window displays the information about the symbol selected in the map.

Parameters
Acknowledge Information. Acknowledge status of the alarms, of the “LCT presence” signal
and of the “Incorrect Upload” signal. If the selection is an object:
• Network Element. Box:
• Ack Alarm - active ( ). In the selected NE, there is at least a not acknowledged
alarm (current and/or in the alarm history).
To acknowledge the alarm, open the Alarm History Browser window and/or the
Current Alarm Browser window.
• Ack Alarm - inactive. All the possible alarms are acknowledged.
• Ack LCT - active ( ). From the last time the equipment window of the selected
NE has been opened, the LCT connected to the NE at least once in Configuration
modality (LCT presence signal).
To acknowledge the signal, open the equipment window relevant to the NE.
• Ack LCT - inactive. From the last time the equipment window of the selected NE
has been opened, LCT has not connected in Configuration modality.
• Incorrect Upload - active ( ). The last Configuration Upload is failed or ended
with problems.
The signal is automatically removed as soon as the Configuration Upload opera-
tion is successfully executed.
• Incorrect Upload - active. The last Configuration Upload ended successfully.
For the virtual NE the Acknowledge Information area is not meaningful.
• Network Element of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type. Box:
• Ack Alarm - active ( ). At least one NE of the selected node has at least one not
acknowledged alarm.
• Ack Alarm - inactive. No NE of the selected node has not acknowledged alarms.
• Ack LCT - active ( ). At least one NE of the selected node has the signal of LCT
presence.
• Ack LCT - inactive. No NE of the selected node has the signal of LCT presence.
• Incorrect Upload - active ( ). At least one NE of the selected node has the signal
of Incorrect Upload.
• Incorrect Upload - inactive. No NE of the selected node, has the signal of Incorrect
Upload.
• Container. Box:
• Ack Alarm - active ( ). At least one NE in the selected container has at least one
not acknowledged alarm.
• Ack Alarm - inactive. No NE in the selected container has unacknowledged alarms.
• Ack LCT - active ( ). At least one NE in the selected container has the signal of
LCT presence.
• Ack LCT - inactive. No NE in the selected container has the signal of LCT presence.
• Incorrect Upload - active ( ). At least one NE in the selected container has the
signal of Incorrect Upload.
• Incorrect Upload - inactive. No NE in the selected container has the signal of In-
correct Upload.

Acknowledge Information. If a NE object is selected, it displays possible informative notes


edited by the user.

Push-buttons
OK. Saves possible informative notes written by the operator and closes the window.
Cancel. Closes the window without saving the written notes.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 133


Graphical Symbol Properties
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Command not available for the Link and Physical Link symbols.

The Graphical Symbol Properties command displays the graphic parameters assigned by the system to
the symbol.

Operations
Display the symbol graphic parameters

Display the symbol graphic parameters

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the wished symbol.

2. Select Edit > Graphical Symbol Properties.


The field:
• Selection Name, shows the graphic name of the symbol.
• Object Properties, shows the graphic parameters of the symbol.
The parameters cannot be changed.

134 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Find
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Find command searches a symbol in the map using, as search criterion, part or the whole name of
the NE, the IP address of the NE or notes relevant to the NE.

Operations
Search a symbol in the map

Search a symbol in the map

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Edit > Find.

2. In the Find window, type in the Text to find: box the alphanumeric string relevant to the symbol you
wish to find.
It is possible to use the asterisk wild-card character (*). For example, typing in the box:
• p, the equipment with name, address or notes equal to ‘p’ will be searched.
• p*, the NE’s with name, address or notes starting with ‘p’ will be searched.
• p*o, the NE’s with name, address or notes starting with ‘p’ and ending with ‘o’ will be searched.
The search of the IP address containing the wild-card character asterisk (*) is available only in the cur-
rent map.
3. Select, in the Search for area, the field where the alphanumeric string must be searched:
• Symbol Name. Name of the symbol.
• IP Address. IP address of the symbol (parameter valid only for NE objects).
• Note. Additional notes for the symbol (parameter valid only for NE objects).

4. Select, in the Search for area, the map where the alphanumeric string must be searched:
• Current Map. The alphanumeric string is searched in the current map.
• All Maps. The alphanumeric string is searched in all the system maps.

5. Press Find.
In the Search result area, there are as many rows as the map objects matching search conditions. For
each object, the name and the position (map/container/…) of the relevant symbol.

To highlighted one symbol, select the relevant row in the Search result area and press Highlight (or
double click on the row itself).

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 135


Arrange Symbols
System access | Read–Write
User profile | Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Command not available for the Super-map.

The Arrange Symbols command aligns the symbols.

Operations
Align the symbols

Align the symbols

System access | Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the symbols to align.


The first selected symbol is taken as reference for the alignment.

2. To align:
• the symbols vertically, select Edit > Arrange Symbols > Vertical or press .
• the symbols horizontally, select Edit > Arrange Symbols > Horizontal or press .

According to the selected command/push-button, the symbols are aligned vertically or horizontally.

136 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Generate Info for Web
System access | Read–Write
User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Generate Info for WEB command checks the database information necessary to RAN to ensure the
congruity between NMS and RAN application.
For more information about RAN application, refer to the specific documentation.

Operations
Align the information in the databases of RAN and NMS

Align the information in the databases of RAN and NMS

System access | Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Edit > Generate Info for WEB.


The system download the information of NMS database to RAN database, deleting the information con-
tained in this one.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 137


Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers
System access | Read Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers command allows to set the size of the contain-
ers windows such as the size of the window where the command is selected.

Operations
Set the size of the containers windows

Set the size of the containers windows

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Resize the LX Map Manager window.

2. Select Edit > Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers.
When a container is selected, the LX Map Manager window will keep the size set at step 1.

138 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


VIEW

Show/Hide Graphical Links. It hides/shows the graphical links in the View area of the map.
Show/Hide Physical Links. It hides/shows the physical links in the View area of the map.
Show Labels/Show Capacity. It alternates the display of label and capacity on the links of the map.
Show/Hide Map Tree. It hides/shows the Map area.
Show/Hide Platform Status. It hides/shows the platform status bar.
Show/Hide Link Label. It hides/shows the labels of the Link objects.
Pan and Zoom. It allows zooming a specific portion of the map window.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 139


Show/Hide Graphical Links
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Show/Hide Graphical Links command hides/shows the graphical links in the View area of the map.

Operations
Show/hide the graphical links in the map

Show/hide the graphical links in the map

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. If the graphical links in the map are:


• displayed, select View > Show/Hide Graphical Links to hide them
• hidden, select View > Show/Hide Graphical Links to display them.

140 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Show/Hide Physical Links
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Show/Hide Physical Links command hides/shows the physical links in the View area of the map.

Operations
Show/hide the physical links in the map

Show/hide the physical links in the map

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. If the physical links in the map are:


• displayed, select View > Show/Hide Physical Links to hide them
• hidden, select View > Show/Hide Physical Links to display them.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 141


Show Labels/Show Capacity
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Show Labels/Show Capacity command alternates the display of label and capacity on the (graphical
and physical) links of the map.

Operations
Alternate the display of label and capacity on the links of the map

Alternate the display of label and capacity on the links of the map

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. If on the link in the map, is displayed:


• the label, select View > Show Labels/Show Capacity to display the link capacity
• the capacity, select View > Show Labels/Show Capacity to display the link label.

142 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Show/Hide Map Tree
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Show/Hide Map Tree command shows/hides the Map area.

Operations
Show/hide the Map area

Show/hide the Map area

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. If the area Map is:


• displayed, select View > Show/Hide Map Tree or press to hide it
• hidden, select View > Show/Hide Map Tree or press to display it.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 143


Show/Hide Platform Status
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Show/Hide Platform Status command hides/shows the Platform Status bar.

Operations
Show/hide the platform status bar

Show/hide the platform status bar

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. If the platform status bar is:


• displayed, select View > Show/Hide Platform Status or press to hide it.
• hidden, select View > Show/Hide Platform Status or press to display it.

144 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Show/Hide Link Label
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The command Show/Hide Link Label hides/shows the names of the Link objects in the View area of the
LX Map Manager window.

The display status of the names of the Link objects is described by the presence of the wording [Link Label
Off] in the status bar.
In detail, if the wording is:
• Present, indicates that the names of the Link objects ARE NOT displayed in the View area.
• Not present, indicates that the names of the Link objects ARE displayed in the View area.

The display of the name of a Link object is influenced even by the setting of the relevant parameter Show
Label.
This parameter is set during the procedure Create graphical Link objects e Create Physical Links objects.
Then, it can be changed in any moment (see Verify/change the label of a Physical Link object).
Tab.10 indicates the interaction between the setting of the parameter Show Label and the display status
of the names of the Link objects in a map for an hypothetical object Link A.

Tab.10 Display of the name of the Link objects in the map

Object Link A - Display of the names of the Display of the name of the object
parameter Show Label Link objects in the map * Link A in the map

Active Active Name displayed

Inactive Active Name not displayed

Active Inactive * Name not displayed

Inactive Inactive * Name not displayed

* The wording [Link Label Off] is present in the status bar of the LX Map Manager window.

Operations
Show/hide the names of the Link objects

Show/hide the names of the Link objects

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select View > Show/Hide Link Label or press .


If the link labels were displayed, after the transmission of the command they are hidden and the word-
ing [Link Label Off] is displayed in the Status bar.
If the link labels were hidden, after the transmission of the command they are displayed and the word-
ing [Link Label Off] disappear from the Status bar.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 145


Pan and Zoom
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The command Pan and Zoom allows zooming a specific area (selected by the user) of the map window.

When the command is selected, a box is displayed at the right bottom corner of the map window (area
Pan and Zoom). The box contains a little display of the whole View area of the map window.

A selection is cancelled by the successive selection.

Within the box, the user can define a specific area (delimited by a red dotted line) clicking with the left
button of the mouse and dragging. When the left button is released, the area View of the map window will
display only the selected part of the map.

The box contains three push-buttons:


• View All: when pressed, the area View of the map window displays the whole map. The dotted
line is removed from the box Pan and Zoom.
• Minimize/Expand: when pressed, the box Pan and Zoom is minimized/opened in the bottom
right corner of the window. The push-buttons Minimize and Expand are displayed alternative-
ly.
• Close: when pressed, it closes the box Pan and Zoom and restores the area View to the normal
display.

and is provided, on every side, with a direction button to move the area delimited by the red dotted line
within the box itself. The area View of the map window changes accordingly.

146 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


PERFORMANCE

Performance Monitoring Read. It updates the results of the PM measures of the equipment.
Performance Monitoring. It displays the results of the PM measures of the equipment.
Old Performance Monitoring. It displays the results of the PM measures of the equipment, saved and
restored from tape or disk.
View/Modify P.M. Status. It displays the status and allows activating/deactivating the PM measures of
one or more pieces of equipment of the same type contemporarily.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 147


Performance Monitoring Read
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Performance Monitoring Read command updates the results of the PM measures of the equipment.
The update request is sent to the controller of the equipment.

Operations
Update the results of the PM measures of the equipment

Update the results of the PM measures of the equipment

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Operation meaningful only for the NE in connected status.


For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the operation is executed for all the pieces of
equipment of the node.

1. Select the wished NE.

2. Select Performance > Performance Monitoring Read.


At the end, a message is displayed with the result of the operation.

148 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Performance Monitoring
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING The command is not available for the virtual NE objects and the NE objects of ALplus Node or
ALCplus2 Node type (for the equipment of a nodal system, the command is present in the ALplus nodal
window/ALCplus2 nodal window).

The Performance Monitoring command displays the results of the PM measures of the equipment.

Operations
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (24 hour record)
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (15 minute record)

See also
Performance Monitoring management

Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (24 hour record)

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the NE.


If the type of selected NE does not support the PM measures, a warning message will be displayed.

2. Select Performance > Performance Monitoring or press .


The Graphic Performance Monitoring window requires the period of time for which you wish to verify
the results of the PM measures.
In the boxes:
• Date Reference, the start date (day/month/year) is displayed (default: current day).
• Day Previous, the number of days before the set date, constituting the duration of the period
(default: 30 days) is displayed.

3. Set the Date Reference and Day previous boxes to the wished values.
It is possible to set a value within 10 and 180 days.
Remember that it is possible to display at most the daily records relevant to the last 180 days (starting
from the current day). The results of the PM measures are stored in the system database (Performance
Monitoring table). They are available for a period of 6 months, then they are automatically removed.

4. Set the Auto Select box. In detail:


• Activate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter of a measure point,
even the other control parameters are automatically selected, compatible with the measure unit
of the selected item (see step 7).
• Deactivate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter, no other parameter
is selected.

5. Press OK.

6. In the Graphic Performance Monitoring window select TPC menu.


All the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - yellow wordings) and the measure points
(where the control parameters are really measured) (TP - Termination Point - orange wording) available
for the selected equipment are selected.
The control parameters are contained in the pop-up menu that opens on the side of the measure point.
Generally, more control parameters refer to the same TP.

7. Select the control parameters, for which you wish to display the results of the PM measures.
All the control parameters of a TP cannot be displayed in the same graphic. They have been subdivided
according to the measure unit used for their count: seconds, blocks, dBm, etc.
The Graphic Performance Monitoring window displays the results of the selected control parameters.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 149


When a parameter is selected, the name of the relevant TP changes colour from orange to red. The
selected control parameter is characterized by a led on its left side.
When a control parameter is selected, it is possible to select all the parameters that have the same
measure unit present in the same TP or in any of the other TP’s.
The control parameters that have not the same measure unit of the selected parameter are not avail-
able (wording of grey colour).
In order to display the results of the parameters with measure unit different from the currently selected
one, it is necessary to deselect all the control parameters (Option > Deselect all TPC command) and,
then, select the new parameters.

Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (15 minute record)

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Open the Graphic Performance Monitoring window (see Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE
(24 hour record)).

2. Double click on the record relevant to the day whose primary records you wish to display.
Another Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens.
In this window, it is possible to verify the results of the PM measures of all the primary records of the
selected day.

3. To return to the display of the primary records, double click in any point of the window.

150 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Graphic Performance Monitoring window

This window displays, in graphic format, the performance measures of the equipment.

Information bar
Type and logic address of the equipment.
Start date and End date.
Type of displayed record (Daily, Primary).
Type of graph (Histogram, Chart, Chart Comp).

Menu bar
File > Exit. It closes the window.

Option > Deselect all TPC. It deselects all the selected control parameters.

Option > Thresholds. It displays in the graph a broken line that represents the threshold value
of each selected control parameter. Each broken line has the colour representing the parameter
in the graph.

Option > Type image. It changes the type of graph. In detail:


• Histogram, graph with histograms.
• Chart, line graph.
• Chart Comp., compressed line graph.

TPC. List of the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - wordings in yellow) and of
the measure points (TP - Termination Point - wordings in orange) available for the selected type
of equipment.

Help > Index. It opens the on-line manual.

Graph area
The window displays the records contained in the set time period. They are displayed from the
oldest to the newest one. Use the scroll-bar to move among the records.
Each control parameter, within the record column, is identified by a colour. The colour legend is
displayed in the Legend and measure.... area.

Record

(3) Every record is identified by the relevant date (day/month/year). The result of all the active meas-
ures is indicated by a coloured wording under the date of the record. In detail:
• Not available. The record is not available, as in the observation period under examination
no measure was active.
• No error (green). The record has been completely acquired and the measures are not er-
rored.
• Above Thrs (red). The record has been completely acquired and at least a control param-
eter has exceeded the relevant threshold value.
Besides the record, in this case, the NE sends an alarm of exceeding of the daily record
that is stored in the alarm history.
• Below Thrs (yellow). The record has been completely acquired and the measured control
parameters have not exceeded their threshold value.
• Lost (black). The record is not arrived to the main controller of the NE for example be-
cause the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before sending
the record itself or due to generic hardware/software troubles.
• Incompl (yellow). The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding
observation period.
The record of measure start is always in this status. The daily record assumes this status
also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status.
The daily record of the current date will be always incomplete as the daily records are
acquired at 23.59 of each day.
• Restarted (black). The record was lost due to a reset of the NE.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 151


When the NE has a software restart and verifies that, for a given measure point, the
measure is active, all the records of that measure point will result in this status.

Parameters
Value. Value of the control parameter. The colour of the number representing the value indi-
cates the exceeding of the threshold:
• Red. Value greater than the set threshold value.
• Yellow. Value lower than the set threshold value.
• White. Threshold value not set (threshold inactive).
The dash (-) indicates that the value is not available.

Col. Colour that represents the parameter within the graph.

State Rec. Status of the record relevant to the control parameter. For the description of the
different statuses, see note Record.

Threshold. Threshold level over which the relevant alarm is activated. The wording Disable in-
dicates that the threshold is inactive.
Description. Name of the measure point (TP) and relevant to the control parameter.
The control parameters changes according to the TP. Their description is reported in the
equipment user Manual relevant to the type of NE which the measure is referred to.
The window displays contemporarily all the records relevant to the period set at the begin-
ning of the procedure.

RLT (dbm). Power threshold level. The field is displayed and it is meaningful only for power
control parameters (e.g. RLTS, RLTM, etc.).

152 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Old Performance Monitoring
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Command not available for virtual NE objects and NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node
type.

The Old Performance Monitoring command displays the results of the PM measures of the equipment,
saved and restored from tape or disk.

In the Old Performance Monitoring table are stored the results of the PM measures saved (see Performance
Monitoring Backup) and restored (see Performance Monitoring Restore) from tape or disk.

Operations
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (24 hour records - Old PM)
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (15 minute records - Old PM)

Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (24 hour records - Old PM)

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the NE.


If the type of selected NE does not support PM measures, a warning message will be displayed.

2. Select Performance > Old Performance Monitoring.


The Graphic Performance Monitoring window requires the time period, for which you wish to verify the
results of the PM measures.
In the boxes:
• Date Reference, the date (day/month/year) of period start (default: current day) is displayed.
• Day Previous, the number of days, previous to the set date, that constitute the period duration
is displayed (default: 30 days).

3. Set the Date Reference and Day previous boxes to the wished values.
It is possible to set a value within 10 and 180 days.
Remember that it is possible to display, at most, the daily records relevant to the last 180 days (starting
from the current day).

4. Set the Auto Select box. In detail:


• Activate the box if you wish, on the selection of a control parameter of a measure point, also
the other control parameters, compatible with the measure unit of the selected item (see step
7) are automatically selected.
• Deactivate the box if you wish that, on the selection of a control parameter, no other parameter
is selected.

5. Press OK.

If, at the opening of the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window, the table is empty, it is nec-
essary to restore from the backup file saved before the list of the wished measures (see Performance
Monitoring Restore).
They will remain available in the Old Performance Monitoring table and in the Graphic Performance
Monitoring - OLD window, until a different list of measures is not restored.

6. Select TPC menu.


All the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - wordings in yellow) and the measure points
(TP - Termination Point - wordings in orange) available for the selected equipment are listed.
The control parameters are contained in the pop-up menu that opens on the side of the measure point.
Generally, more control parameters refer to the same TP.

7. Select the control parameters for which you wish the display the results of the PM measures.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 153


In the same graph not all the control parameters of a TP can be displayed. They have been subdivided
according to the measure unit used for their counting: seconds, blocks, dBm, etc.

The Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window displays the results of the selected control param-
eters.
The items of the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window and their description are the same
shown in Graphic Performance Monitoring window.
When a parameter is selected, the name of the relevant TP changes colour from orange to red. The
selected control parameter is characterized by a led on its left.
When a control parameter is selected, it is possible to select all the parameters that have the same
measure unit present in the same TP or in any of the other TP.
The control parameters that have not the same measure unit of the selected parameter will not be
available (wording in grey colour).
In order to display the results of parameter with measure unit different from the currently selected one,
it is necessary to deselect all the control parameters (Option > Deselect all TPC command) and,
then, select the new parameters.

Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (15 minute records - Old PM)

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Open the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window (see Verify the results of the PM measures of
a NE (24 hour records - Old PM)).
2. Double click on the record relevant to the day for which you wish to display the primary records.
In the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window, it is possible to verify the results of the PM meas-
ures of all the primary records of the selected day.
The items of the window and their description are the same shown in Graphic Performance Monitoring
window, the only difference is that, instead of the daily records, each column will represent a primary
record (15 minutes).

3. In order to return to the display the primary records, double click on any point of the window.

154 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


View/Modify P.M. Status
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Command not available for the virtual NE objects.


The View/Modify P.M. Status command displays the status and allows activating/deactivating the PM
measures of one or more pieces of equipment of the same type contemporarily.
For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the operations will be executed on all the pieces
of node equipment.

Operations
Verify the operating status of the PM measure points for more NE’s of the same type
Filter the display of the PM measure points
Activate the PM measures for NE’s of the same type
Deactivate the PM measures for NE’s of the same type
Manage the attributes of a PM measure point
Activate/deactivate a PM measure point for one piece of equipment
Verify/modify the activation thresholds of PM alarms for one piece of equipment

GUI
View/Modify P.M. Status window
Attributes Manager window

Verify the operating status of the PM measure points for more NE’s of the same type

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select one real NE or more real NE’s of the same type.

2. Select Performance > View/Modify P.M. Status.


The View/Modify P.M. Status window displays the operating status of the measure points.
If more NE objects of different type are selected, the PM measures relevant to the first type of selected
NE are displayed. For example, if selected in order, one NE of SDH type, one NE of FAM type and one
NE of PDH type, on the selection of the command, the PM measures that characterize the SDH equip-
ment are displayed.

Filter the display of the PM measure points

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select one real NE or more real NE’s of the same type.

2. Select Performance > View/Modify P.M. Status.


In View/Modify P.M. Status window, the following filters can be activated at the same time:
• Logical Address. Filters the display of the TP’s according to the logical address of the NE where
they are located.
Select the row corresponding to the wished NE’s and press the radio button Selected.
The window displays the measure points relevant only to the selected NE’s.
• TP Class. Filters the display of the TP’s according to the class of the termination point itself.
Select the check-boxes of the wished TP classes to display the corresponding measure points.
Deselect the check-boxes of the TP classes you wish to hide.
The window reflects the settings performed on the filter in real time.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 155


The buttons Select All and Deselect All respectively allow selecting/deselecting all the TP
classes contemporarily by means of a single command.
• TP Instance. Filters the display of TP’s according to the name of the instance.
Type, in the text field, the name of the TP you wish to display and press Apply.
You can use the wildcard character * to indicate any text string.
Pay attention when typing uppercase or lowercase letters because the text field is case sensitive.
• Match Status. Filters the display of TP’s according to the activation status of the PM measure.
Select the check-box corresponding to the wished status: Running or Not Running.
It is possible to select both the activation statuses at the same time.
The window reflects the settings performed on the filter in real time.

Activate the PM measures for NE’s of the same type

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING The maximum number of PM termination point instances which can be enabled at the same time
per port is 32.

1. Select one real NE or more real NE’s of the same type.

2. Select Performance > View/Modify P.M. Status.


3. If necessary, Filter the display of the PM measure points

4. To activate:
• All the PM measures of all the NE’s selected in the map, select Action > Start > All.
• The measures relevant to all the measure points displayed in the Termination Point area, select
Action > Start > Filtered.
• The measures relevant to the measure points selected in the Termination Point area, select Ac-
tion > Start > Selected.
In the Message area, the result of the operation is displayed.

Deactivate the PM measures for NE’s of the same type

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select one real NE or more real NE’s of the same type.

2. Select Performance > View/Modify P.M. Status.


3. If necessary, Filter the display of the PM measure points

4. To deactivate:
• All the PM measures of all the NE’s selected in the map, select Action > Stop > All.
• The measures relevant to all the measure points displayed in the Termination Point area, select
Action > Stop > Filtered.
• The measures relevant to the measure points selected in the Termination Point area, select Ac-
tion > Stop > Selected.
In the area Message, the result of the operation is displayed.

156 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Manage the attributes of a PM measure point

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING This functionality is available only for equipment managed via WebLCT (AGS10, ALCplus2e,
ALFOplus80HD, AGS-20 and following).
The measure points and the relevant attributes change depending on the type of selected equipment. For
a complete description of the attributes, refer to the User Manual of the equipment Manager application.

1. Select one real NE.

2. Select Performance > View/Modify P.M. Status.

3. Select Action > Attributes Manager.


The Attributes Manager window allows managing the PM measure points for the selected equipment.
The groups of measure points for the selected equipment are reported in the left column of the window.

4. Select the group of PM measure points containing the specific measure point you wish to manage.

5. Select the wished PM measure point.


6. Configure the attributes of the measure point as wished.
The selected value becomes red to signal that the setting has not been communicated to the equipment
yet.

7. Press Send Set to execute the configuration.


The set value becomes black.

Activate/deactivate a PM measure point for one piece of equipment

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING This functionality is available only for equipment managed via WebLCT (AGS10, ALCplus2e,
ALFOplus80HD, AGS20 and following).

1. Select a real NE.

2. Select Performance > View/Modify P.M. Status.

3. Select Action > Attributes Manager.


The command is displayed only if a NE has been selected in the map.
The Attributes Manager window allows managing the PM measure points for the selected equipment.
The groups of measure points for the selected equipment are reported in the left column of the window.

4. Select the group of PM measure points containing the specific measure point you wish to activate/de-
activate.

5. Select the wished PM measure point.


In the right area of the window, the field Instance Selection displays the name of the selected measure
point and the box Start Stop displays the activation status of the measure point:
• Start. The selected measure point is active.
• Stop. The selected measure point is deactivated.

6. To activate the measure point, select the box Start Stop and then the value Start.
To deactivate the measure point, select the box Start Stop and then the value Stop.
The selected value becomes red to signal that the setting has not been communicated to the equipment
yet.

7. Press Send Set to execute the configuration.


The set value becomes black again.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 157


Verify/modify the activation thresholds of PM alarms for one piece of equipment

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING This functionality is available only for equipment managed via WebLCT (AGS10, ALCplus2e,
ALFOplus80HD, AGS-20 and following).

1. Select a real NE.

2. Select Performance > View/Modify P.M. Status.

3. Select Action > Attributes manager.


The Attributes Manager window allows managing the PM measure points for the selected equipment.
The groups of PM measure points available for the selected equipment are reported in the left column
of the window.

4. Select the group of PM measure points containing the specific measure point you wish to activate/de-
activate (to do this click on the name of the group or on the symbol +).
The group expands and displays the single measure points belonging to it. The symbol next to the name
becomes -.

5. Select the wished PM measure point.


In the right area of the window, the field Instance Selection displays the name of the selected measure
point and the cursors ... Threshold points out the alarm thresholds for every measure parameters.

6. To change the value of a threshold, use the arrow keys to increase or decrease the value or drag and
drop the cursor on the wished value. The threshold value becomes red (not communicated to the equip-
ment yet).

7. To make the change effective, press Send Set.

158 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


View/Modify P.M. Status window

This window allows activating/deactivating the measure of the equipment performances.

Area View
This area allows filtering the measure points displayed in the Termination Point area. Area:
• Equipment. List of names of the equipment selected in the map before opening the win-
dow. Select:
• All Equipment, to display in the Termination Point area the measure points rele-
vant to all the equipment.
• Selected Equipment, to display in the Termination Point area the measure points
relevant only to the equipment selected in this area. The option is available only
after having selected at least one equipment.
• Termination Point Class. Types of measures relevant to the type of equipment selected
in the map. Select the measures you wish to display in the Termination Point area.
The option push-button All TP Class displays all the TP Classes at the same time.
The option push-button Selected TP Class displays only the selected TP Classes.
• Termination Point Instances. Status of the measure point. Activate the box:
• Running Counters to display the active measure point in Termination Point area.
• Not Running Counters to display the inactive measure point in Termination Point
area.
Activate both the boxes at the same time to display all the measure points independently
from their activation status.

Termination Point area


Logical Addr. Logical address of the equipment.
TP Class. Name of the type of measure.
TP Instance. Name of the measure point.
Status. Status of the measure: active (wording: Running), inactive (wording Not running).

Menu bar
File > Close. It closes the window.
Action > Start. It activates the PM measures.
Action > Stop. It deactivates the PM measures.
Action > Refresh Info. It updates the information contained in the window.
Action > Attributes manager. It opens the Attributes Manager window to activate/deactivate
the reading of PM and to configure the intervention thresholds of the relevant alarms for a spe-
cific piece of equipment. This functionality is available only for equipment managed via WEB LCT
(AGS10, ALCplus2e, AGS-20 and following).
Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.
Help > About Application. Version of the module that manages the considered functionality.

Area Messages
It displays the result of the operations executed by the user.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 159


Attributes Manager window

This window allows managing the points of PM measures for the selected equipment.

Menu bar
File > Close. Closes the window.

Area “Set of PM measure points”


This area displays with the symbol of a:
• blue diamond: the physical address of the equipment selected in the map
• blue square: the group of PM measure points. Next to every group, a sign + is displayed
if the group is compressed (press the symbol + to expand it) or a sign - if the group is
expanded (press the symbol - to compress it). The expansion of a group displays the sin-
gle PM measure points (blue circles) belonging to the group itself, the compression of a
group hides them.
The selection of a PM measure point displays, in the right area, the activation status (note 3)
and the current alarm thresholds of the measure point itself (note 4).
Available PM measure points change depending on the type of considered equipment.
Refer to the equipment User Manual for the detailed description of the meaning of the
different attributes.

The group Enh. Port Policy contains the Enh. Port Policy Port A command. Selecting it, the In-
stance Selection area allows customizing the policy for the management of the RMON counters
aggregated on 15 minutes. Select, in the Monitoring Policy box, the value:
• S Vid, to reset the active counters on the port. NMS does not manage S-VID, then for the
supervision system is like there in no active counter.
• C Vid, to activate the count of the RMON counters on 15 minutes subdivided according
to the VLAN of the specific port which transit on the radio side.
• Priority, to activate the count of the RMON counters on 15 minutes subdivided according
to the priority of the packets on the specific port.
• Disable, to deactivate the count of the RMON counters on 15 minutes.

Measure point
Instance Selection. Measure point currently selected.
Start Stop. Activation status of the selected PM measure point.
• Start. The selected measure point is activated.
• Stop. The selected measure point is deactivated.
Counter Clear. Management of the reset of the counters on the selected PM measure point:
• clear. The value reached by the counters until the current moment is reset.
• not-active. The value of the counters is not reset.
Alarm Clear. Management of the deletion of the alarms on the selected PM measure point:
• clear. Possible alarms relevant on the measure point are cleared.
• not-active. The alarms are not cleared.
...Threshold. Sliders indicating the alarm threshold for every control parameter. If the number
is red, it means that the threshold value has been changed, but not communicated to the equip-
ment yet (press Send Set to transmit it).

Push-buttons
Send Set. Communicates the change of the parameters to the equipment.
Refresh. Updates the data displayed in the window.

160 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


CONFIGURATION

Equipment Info. It displays the characteristics and the functional status of the equipment.
Software Inventory. It displays the software version and the units list (where a controller or a FPGA is
present) of the equipment in the open map.
OAM Status. It manages the OAM Domain/Level configuration for a multiple selection of NE’s.
E1 Browser. It manages the 2 Mbit/s tributaries of equipment in the open map.
Equipment Port Configuration. It displays the settings of the communication ports of the equipment in
the open map.
NE PPP Interfaces. It displays the settings relevant to the PPP communication ports of the equipment.
NE Routing Table. It displays the Routing Table and the Default Gateway address of the equipment.
Hw Inventory. It displays the hardware version of equipment in the open map.
NE Backup/Restore. It displays the backup files of equipment in the open map.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 161


Equipment Info
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Equipment Info command displays the characteristics and the operating status of the equipment.

Operations
Verify the characteristics and the functional status of the equipment

Verify the characteristics and the functional status of the equipment

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the wished NE object.

2. Select Configuration > Equipment Info or press the right mouse button and select Equipment In-
formation.
The Equipment Information window displays the following information.
• Physical Address. Physical address of the NE.
• Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
• Type. Type of NE.
• Equipment status. Status of the connection between the NE and NMS.
• Alarm status. Functional status (alarms) of the NE.
The severity level of the NE alarms is displayed. In case of more alarms with different severity,
the highest severity will be displayed.
• LCT Presence. Status of the connection between the local program and the NE. Value:
• Absent. The LCT user is not connected to the equipment.
• LCT Config. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Configuration modality.
• LCT Monitor. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Monitoring modality.
• Alarm history. Number of alarms relevant to the NE, stored in the alarm history. Box:
• Total. Total number of alarms.
• Ack. Number of acknowledged alarms.
• Not Ack. Number of not acknowledged alarms.
• Current alarms. Number of alarms currently on NE.

3. Press Refresh to update the data displayed in the window or Close to close the window.

If a NE object of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type is selected, the displayed information is referred
in part to the node (Physical Address, Logical Address and Type) and in part to the sum of the infor-
mation of the equipment belonging to the node (Equipment status, Alarm status, LCT Presence, Alarm
history and Current alarms).

Selecting more NE symbols and choosing this command, more Equipment Information windows open, one
for every selected NE.

162 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Software Inventory
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Software Inventory command displays the software version and the units list (with controller or FP-
GA) of the equipment (except FAMxc, ELFO and SDH N+1) in the open map.

Operations
Verify the software version of equipment in the map
Verify the units list of equipment in the map
Save/print the list of the equipment/units
Open the equipment window
Verify the configuration/functional status of the equipment
Update the equipment software
Switch the operation of the equipment controller memory benches
Require the update of the data to the equipment controller
Filter/sort the list of the equipment/units
Export the inventory data in csv format

GUI
NE Software Inventory window

Verify the software version of equipment in the map

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > Software Inventory.


2. Select NE Software Inventory. The information in the NE Software Inventory window refers to the mo-
ment when the command is selected or the refresh is executed.
The window displays the list of the NE’s and the software detail.

Verify the units list of equipment in the map

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > Software Inventory.

2. Select the Unit Software Inventory option. The NE Software Inventory window displays the list of the
units.

Save/print the list of the equipment/units

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > Software Inventory.

2. Select:
• NE Software Inventory, to display the list of the equipment.
• Unit Software Inventory, to display the list of the units.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 163


3. To print or save to a file:
• All the records stored in the database, select File > Print/Save > All items.
• The displayed records, select File > Print/Save > Filtered Items. If the filters are not active,
the displayed records correspond to the record stored in the database.
• A group of records, select the records and then File > Print/Save > Selected Items.

4. In the Output Device Selection window:


To print the data:
a. Select the Output To Printer option.
In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer).
If you want to print to another peripheral device, type the name of the wished printer in the box.

b. Choose the layout of the page, selecting the Landscape or Portrait option.

c. Press OK.
The format used to print the information corresponds to the format used to display it.
To save the data to a file:
a. Select the Output To File option.

b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be
saved.
Typing only the filename, this will be saved in the /opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application
name> directory.

c. Press Ok.
The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

Open the equipment window

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > Software Inventory.

2. Press the NE Software Inventory option.


3. Select the equipment.

4. Select Action > Open Equipment.


The equipment interface opens.
Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more equipment windows at the same time.
It is possible that, on the selection of the command, a message is displayed.
The description of the equipment window and of the messages that can be displayed at its opening are
reported in the specific equipment User Manual.
The equipment window can be opened also by a double click on the record of the equipment.

Verify the configuration/functional status of the equipment

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > Software Inventory.

2. Select the NE Software Inventory option.


3. Select the equipment.

4. Select Action > Equipment Info.


The Equipment Information window opens.
Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more windows at the same time.

164 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Update the equipment software

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > Software Inventory.

2. Select the NE Software Inventory option.

3. Select the equipment.


Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more windows at the same time.

4. Select Action > Software Download.


The Software Download window opens.

Switch the operation of the equipment controller memory benches

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING It is not possible to switch the memory benches when the software update is in progress and
when the software is not on the bench.
The operation causes an automatic disconnection and reconnection of the NE. If the reconnection fails, the
NE assumes the unreachable status and the reconnection command will be sent, at regular intervals, by
NMS.

1. Select Configuration > Software Inventory.

2. Select the NE Software Inventory option.

3. Select the equipment.


4. Select Action > Bench Switch and confirm.
At the end, a message displays the result of the operation. If the operation was successful, the bench
in running status is forced to loaded status and vice versa.

Require the update of the data to the equipment controller

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > Software Inventory.


2. Select the NE Software Inventory option.

3. Select the wished equipment in connected status.

4. Select Action > Read Data From NE.


At the end a message displays the result of the operation.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 165


Filter/sort the list of the equipment/units

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > Software Inventory.

2. Select:
• NE Software Inventory, to display and filter the list of the equipment.
• Unit Software Inventory, to display and filter the list of the unit.

3. Select View > Set Filter.


Select the boxes corresponding to the wished filter criteria.
The activation of each box expands the window, displaying a section containing the following options:
• Match Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
To set the criterion, type the address of the NE in the text field.
It is possible to use the wild-card asterisk character (*). For example, typing in the box the let-
ter:
• p, the NE with logic address p will be displayed in the window.
• p*, the NE’s whose logic address start with p will be displayed.
• p*o, the NE’s whose address starts with p and ends with o will be displayed in the win-
dow.
• Match equipment type. Type of equipment.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the type of wished equipment.
• Match IP Address. IP address of the equipment.
To set the criterion, type the wished IP Address in the text fields. It is possible to use the wild-
card asterisk character (*).
• Match connection status. Status of the connection between NE and NMS.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the wished status.
• Match Bench Release. Version and/or usage status of the software on the equipment memory
benches.
To set as criterion the version of the software, select the wished release from the list (the list
displays the releases of the software on the equipment indicated in the NE Software Inventory
window). The selected item is displayed in the text field.
To set as criterion the usage status of the software, activate the option:
• Not Loaded, to display the NE’s whose memory benches have not the software loaded.
This option is not available if the software release is selected.
• Loaded, to display the NE’s whose software version corresponds to that set in the box,
whose software is in Loaded status (software is on the memory bench, but is not used).
• Running, to display the NE’s whose software version corresponds to that set in the box,
whose software is in Running status (software is on the memory bench and is used).

The filter is available only when the NE Software Inventory option is active in the NE Software Inventory
window.
• Match Object. Unit and/or element of the unit.
To set the criterion:
• Select the unit in the Unit Type list.
It is possible to select only one unit or all the units selecting All Units.
• Select the element (controller, programmable logic, etc.) in the Element Type list.
It is possible to set only one element or all the elements of the unit set in the Unit Type
box, selecting All Elements.
The filter is available only when the Unit Software Inventory option in the NE Software Inventory
window is active.
• Match Actual Release. Version of the software of one element (controller, programmable logic,
etc.).
To set the criteria, select from the list the wished release (the list displays the releases of the
software on the equipment indicated in the NE Software Inventory window). The selected item
is displayed in the box.

166 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


The filter is available only when the Unit Software Inventory option in the NE Software Inventory
window is active.

4. Press OK.
The NE Software Inventory window displays only the records matching the active criteria.
Each time the list is filtered, both the displayed and the hidden records are considered.
In the window there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of the filters and displays the com-
plete list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) push-buttons.
Closing the NE Software Inventory window automatically removes the possible active filters.

Export the inventory data in csv format

System access | Read–Only, Read-Write


User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > Software Inventory.

2. Select Export CSV > Inventory Export CSV.

3. Select the path and the name of the file where the data relevant to the selected software inventory
must be exported in csv.

4. Press Ok.
All the data displayed in the window will be exported to file in csv format.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 167


NE Software Inventory window

The window allows managing the parameters of the software inventory relevant to the equipment in the
open map. The list displays all the equipment in the open map, except for FAMxc, ELFO and SDH N+1.

For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system
is displayed. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
• <node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object).
• <node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

Parameters
Logical Addr. Logical address of the equipment.
Type. Type of equipment.
Ip Address. IP address of the equipment.
Status. Status of the connection between equipment and NMS.
Release Bench 1 (only with option “NE Software Inventory” selected). File name and version
of the software on the memory bench 1.
Bench 1 Status (only with option “NE Software Inventory” selected). Operating status of the
memory bench 1:
• Running. The software of the considered memory bench is running.
• Loaded. The software is present on the bench, but is not currently running (standby).
• Not loaded. The software is not present on the memory bench.
• Downloading. The software update of the memory bench is running.
Release Bench 2 (only with “NE Software Inventory” selected). File name and version of the
software on the memory bench 2.
Bench 2 Status (only with “NE Software Inventory” selected). Operating status of the memory
bench 2. The detail of the wordings is the same indicated by the Bench 1 Status parameter.
Unit (only with option “Unit Software Inventory” selected). Name of the unit.
Element (only with option “Unit Software Inventory” selected). Name of the unit element,
where the software is loaded: controller, programmable logic, etc.
Actual Release (only with option “Unit Software Inventory” selected). Name of the file and
software version on the element.

Status bar
xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If they are not
active filters, the number of displayed records corresponds to the total number of records.
View. Activation of one or more filters.
Text in yellow. Date and the time when the window has been opened or refreshed.

Push-buttons
NE Software Inventory. It displays the list of NE’s and the detail of the equipment software.
Unit Software Inventory. It displays the list of the units.

Menu bar
File > Print/Save. It prints/saves the information to file.
File > Close. It closes the window.
Action > Open Equipment. It opens the equipment interface.
Action > Equipment Info. It displays the configuration/operation status of the equipment.
Action > Refresh Info. It updates the information contained in the window.
Action > Software Download. It updates the software of a piece of equipment.
Action > Read Data From NE. It sends a request for the information update to the controller
of the selected NE.
Action > Bench Switch. It switches the memory benches of the controller of the selected NE.
View > Set Filter. It filters the list according to specific criteria.
Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.

168 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


OAM Status
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Command available only for the equipment supporting OAM functionality.

The OAM Status command allows the configuration of OAM-FM Domain/Level for a multiple selection of
NE’s.

Operations
Verify the characteristics of OAM-FM Domain
Define an OAM-FM Domain
Remove the OAM-FM Domain
WARNING Every equipment manages only a single OAM-FM Domain. The name or the level of
an OAM-FM Domain associated to one or more pieces of equipment cannot be changed. In order
to change one of the two parameters, it is necessary to remove the current Domain and to define
a new one.

GUI
OAM Manager window

See also
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality (info)

Verify the characteristics of OAM-FM Domain

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the equipment whose characteristics of OAM-FM Domain you wish to verify.
2. Select Configuration > OAM Status.
The OAM Manager window displays the selected equipment in the box Equipment.

Define an OAM-FM Domain

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Privileged, Superuser

WARNING An OAM-FM Domain can be associated only to equipment without any Domain associated.

1. In the open map, select the equipment which you wish to define an OAM-FM Domain for.
2. Select Configuration > OAM Status.

3. Select the rows relevant to the equipment in the box Equipment or the option push-button All Equip-
ment (if the domain must be assigned to all the pieces of equipment).

4. If the field Domain is empty, type the name of the Domain you wish to associate to the equipment (al-
phanumerical string with minimum length of 1 character and maximum length of 45 characters).

5. Select, in the combo-box Level, the level of the Domain you wish to associate to the equipment (value
0: level with lowest priority, 7: level with highest priority).

6. Press:

• Create Filtered to associate the OAM-FM Domain with the above mentioned characteristics to the
equipment in the equipment display area.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 169


• Create Selected to associate the OAM-FM Domain with the above mentioned characteristics to the
equipment selected in the equipment display area.

Remove the OAM-FM Domain

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Privileged, Superuser

WARNING It is not possible to remove an OAM-FM Domain containing at least one MA.

1. In the open map, select the equipment which you wish to remove an OAM-FM Domain for.

2. Select Configuration > OAM Status.

3. Select the rows relevant to the equipment in the box Equipment or Press All Equipment (if you wish
to remove the domain from all the pieces of equipment).

4. Press Delete Selected.

170 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


OAM Manager window

This window allows managing the OAM domain for the equipment selected in the map.

Menu bar
File > Close. Closes the OAM Manager window.
Action > Refresh info... Updates the data displayed in the window.
Help > On Usage. Opens the User Manual relevant to NMS.
Help > About Application. Information relevant to NMS version.

View area
It allows selecting which equipment will be listed in the equipment display area. The Equipment
box displays the name of considered equipment. Selecting the option push-button:
• All Equipment, the equipment display area shows the considered equipment.
• Selected Equipment, the equipment display area shows the equipment selected in the
Equipment box. If no equipment is selected in area Equipment, this push-button is not
available (greyed out).

Status Filter area


It allows filtering the display of the equipment depending on their association to an OAM-FM Do-
main. In detail, if the operator selects the check-box:
• Absent, the equipment display area shows the considered equipment only if this is not
associated to any OAM-FM Domain.
• Present, the equipment display area shows the considered equipment only if this is as-
sociated to an OAM-FM Domain.

Domain/Level Setting area


It allows associating an OAM-FM Domain to the equipment selected/displayed in the equipment
display area. In detail, the parameter:
• Domain, is used to enter the name of OAM-FM Domain which must be associated.
• Level, is used to select the level (0-7) to assign to the OAM-FM Domain (value 0: level
with lowest priority, 7: level with highest priority).

Push-buttons
Create Filtered. Associates the OAM-FM Domain with the above mentioned characteristics to
the equipment in the equipment display area.
Create Selected. Associates the OAM-FM Domain with the above mentioned characteristics to
the equipment selected in the equipment display area.
Delete Filtered. Removes the OAM-FM Domain from the equipment in the equipment display
area.
Delete Selected. Removes the OAM-FM Domain from the equipment selected in the equipment
display area.

Equipment display area


Logical Addr. logical address (name) of the equipment.
Domain. OAM-FM Domain which the equipment is associated to. The symbol “-” means that the
equipment is not associated to any OAM-FM Domain.
Level. level of the OAM-FM Domain. The symbol - means that equipment is not associated to
any OAM-FM Domain.
Status. Status of association of the equipment to a given OAM-FM Domain. The wording:
• Absent, indicates that equipment is not associated to any OAM-FM Domain.
• Present, indicates that equipment is associated to an OAM-FM Domain.

Area Message
It displays the result of the operations.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 171


OAM-FM Ethernet functionality (info)

OAM Ethernet functionality


OAM-FM Ethernet functionality implemented for equipment managed by NMS
OAM-FM elements
OAM-FM Domain
MA (Maintenance Association)
MEP (Maintenance End Point)
MIP (Maintenance Intermediate Point)
Remote MEPs
CCM (Continuity Check Message)
LBM (LoopBack Message)
LTM (Link Trace Message)
Example of configuration of an OAM-FM maintenance Domain

OAM Ethernet functionality

OAM (Operations, Administration and Maintenance) Ethernet functionality represents the set of processes,
activities, rules, etc. which allow managing the operation, the monitoring and the fixing of troubles in the
Ethernet networks.
These services are defined by the following reference specifications, which you must refer to for the de-
tailed description of OAM Ethernet functionality:
• Recommendation ITU-T Y.1731 - OAM Functions and Mechanisms for Ethernet based Networks.
• Standard IEEE 802.1ag - IEEE Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks – Virtual
Bridged Local Area Networks – Amendment 5: Connectivity Fault Management.

OAM-FM Ethernet functionality implemented for equipment managed by NMS

Among the above mentioned specifications, Siae equipment implements the functionality relevant to Con-
nectivity Fault Management (CFM).

This functionality has the purpose to monitor, in a Layer-2 Ethernet network, the end to end availability of
a service (implemented by a VLAN) and to monitor, in case of out-of-service, tools (LoopBack and Link
Trace) helping the operator in the analysis of the troubles.

By means of NMS, it is possible:

• To define the network segment to monitor:


• To define the OAM-FM Domain of maintenance (name and level).

• To define, for each VLAN (service) configured on the equipment, the maintenance points necessary
to diagnostic the connection troubles within a maintenance Domain:
• To define, for every service (VLAN), a Maintenance Association (MA) to monitor.
• To define the end points to monitor the maintenance area (MEP).
• To define the intermediate monitoring points of the maintenance area (MIP).

• To manage, for every local MEP, the relevant table of Remote MEPs (RMep table).

• To manage the Continuity Check messages (CCM) which allow end-to-end monitoring of a service
instance (VLAN) indicating any interruption.

• To manage the LoopBack messages (LBM) which, after the detection of a fault, allow isolating the
point where the fault occurred.

• To manage the Link Trace messages (LTM) which allow tracing the path followed by an OAM-FM
packet between two different MEPs within the same VLAN.

172 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


OAM-FM Domain

The term OAM-FM Domain defines a network or a part of a network owned and managed by a single entity
(operator) and where the connection troubles can be managed.

The OAM-FM Domain is characterized by a name and a layer.

The name identifies the Domain. The layer is used to define the hierarchical relationship among domains.
Greatest is the Domain, highest will be the layer. In fact, the layer corresponds to a value from 0 to 7,
where 0 represents the lowest layer (lowest priority) and 7 the highest layer (higher priority).
All the other entities defined by OAM refer to the Domain: MA/MIP and MEP.

Every equipment manages a single OAM-FM Domain.

The OAM-FM Domain must be defined in any equipment you wish to belong to the same OAM-FM mainte-
nance segment.

Once an OAM-FM Domain has been defined, its name or layer cannot be changed. To do this, the Domain
must be removed and a new one must be created with the new values.

An OAM-FM Domain cannot be removed if at least one VLAN exists, which one MA has been defined for.

This Domain is transparent as regards the OAM-FM messages with higher priority (messages to/from the
higher domains), while stops all the messages with lower priority (messages to/from lower domains).

MA

The term MA (Maintenance Association) identifies the service (VLAN) you wish to monitor.
A Maintenance Association is associated to a user-defined VLAN. Creating a MA means enabling the control
of the specified VLAN.

Within a specific OAM-FM Domain, there are as many MAs as the VLANs the user wishes to monitor.
The equipment manages one MA per single VLAN.

On the equipment the definition of a MA can be executed:


• By the user through a specific command or
• Automatically by the system, after that the user has defined a MEP.

For the description of the above mentioned operations, refer to the User Manual of single equipment.

The definition of a MA in a VLAN, which a MEP is not defined for, corresponds to the automatic definition
of a MIP per every single port of the Switch which the specific VLAN is enabled for.

Once a MA has been defined, its name cannot be changed. To do this, the MA must be removed from the
VLAN and a new MA must be created with the new values.

The removal of a MA involves even the automatic removal of the MEP (if present) from the VLAN.

MEP

The term MEP (Maintenance End Point) defines the entity, associated to a specific service instance (VLAN),
representing the end point of a MA.

Fig.15 shows an example.

MEP can generate and terminate OAM-FM messages regarding the fault management and the performance
monitoring.

MEP is the entity intended for the control of the service (VLAN) as, within the OAM-FM maintenance seg-
ment, the set of MEPs created in the end points of a VLAN allows controlling the correct end to end oper-
ation of the VLAN’s.

The control is achieved by means of the periodic transmission, by each MEP, of the CCM messages and of
the control of the reception of the same messages by the Remote MEPs.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 173


The equipment manages a single MEP per each MA (VLAN) and a maximum of 32 MEPs (32 MA/VLAN).

MEP must be defined only in the equipment acting as end points of the same VLAN (see equipment User
Manual).

The definition of a MEP for a VLAN involves even the automatic definition of the MA, if not already done.
The definition of a MEP requires the setting of:

• A numeric identifier, which must be univocal within the network for the specific VLAN.

• The name of the relevant MA (only if not already defined).

• The time interval used for the transmission of the continuity check messages (CCM).
Once MEP has been created, the transmission of the CCM messages is disabled. They must be en-
abled by the user (see equipment User Manual).

• The port of the Ethernet Switch, where you wish to map the MEP, and the direction to which you
wish to send CCMs. Possible directions:
• Direction UP. CCM messages are sent as they were in input from the considered port to the
other ports of the Switch interested by the considered VLAN.
• Direction DOWN. CCM messages are sent in output from the selected port.

Once a MEP has been defined, its configuration cannot be changed. To do this, remove the MEP from the
VLAN and create a new one with the new configuration.

The removal of a MEP involves event the automatic removal of the relevant MA from the VLAN.

The equipment, for every single MEP, manages the following alarms:

• MEP Fail - OAM-FM MA: <MA name> MEP Id:<local MEP identifier> Fail Alarm
The alarm becomes active when at least one of the remote MEPs in the RMep table of the specific
local MEP is in status Start or Failed.

• MEP Configuration Mismatch - OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<local MEP identifier> Config. Mis-
match Alarm.
The alarm becomes active when the local MEP receives at least one CCM message, containing con-
figuration data different from those set for the local MEP itself, from one of the remote MEPs.
With configuration data we mean: Domain name, MA name, CCM interval.
When this alarm is active, the remote MEP, which has raised the alarm, cannot be enabled in the
RMep table.

Fig.15 OAM-FM functionality - Maintenance points

Domain: Test

A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4


MEP 10 MEP 11
Switch Switch MIP Switch Switch
1 1 1 1
2 VLAN Id:20 2 2 2
A MA: Vlan 20 A A A
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4

A.5 A.6 A.7


MEP 12
Switch MIP Switch Switch
1 1 1
2 2 2
A A A
3 3 3
4 4 4

174 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


MIP

The term MIP (Maintenance Intermediate Point) defines a passive entity, associated to a specific service
instance (VLAN).

MIPs are defined on transit equipment for the monitored VLAN, intermediate among the MEPs.

Fig.15 shows an example.

MIP can reply to the LoopBack messages (LBM), sent in unicast by a MEP (MAC Address), and to the Link
Trace messages (LTM), sent by a MEP, but it cannot generate requests of LoopBack and Link Trace towards
other MIP or MEP.

MIP is defined by the operator in equipment which acts as intermediate points of the same VLAN and the
same OAM-FM maintenance segment.

The definition of a MIP takes place after the definition of the MA.

The definition of a MA, within a VLAN for which a MEP is not defined, corresponds to the automatic definition
of a MIP for every single port of the Switch for which the specific VLAN is enabled.

Once a MA/MIP has been defined, its name cannot be changed. To do this, remove the MA/MIP from the
VLAN and create a new one with the new name.

Remote MEPs

The term Remote MEP (Maintenance End Point) defines entities which represent the other end points (re-
mote points) of a VLAN with respect to the local MEP.
The recording of remote MEPs in the RMep table consists of two parts: the entry in the table and the ena-
bling of the remote MEP (operation necessary so that the remote MEPs are acknowledged as valid end
points by the local MEP).

Example 1
With reference to Fig.15, if you are connected by NMS to the equipment A.1, the local MEP will
be MEP 10 while the remote MEPs will be MEP 11 and MEP 12.
Otherwise, if you are connected by NMS to the equipment A.4, the local MEP will be MEP 11
while the remote MEPs will be MEP 10 and MEP 12.
A table of the remote MEPs (RMep table) is associated to every local MEP (then to every MA/
VLAN).
This table records the remote MEPs from which the local MEP is waiting for a CCM message.
If the CCM message does not arrive within a timeout period equal to 2,5 CCM interval set for
the local MEP, the remote MEP is set to status Failed and the relevant alarm is activated (OAM-
FM MA:... MEP Id:... Fail Alarm).

Example 2
With reference to Fig.15, if you are connected by NMS to the equipment A.1, MEP 11 and MEP
12 will be recorded in the RMep table (relevant to MEP 10).
The transmission of CCM messages is enabled at intervals of 10 sec between a transmission and
the next one.
If, after 25 sec. (2,5 times the CCM interval), MEP 10 does not receive a CCM message, for ex-
ample from MEP 11, in the RMep table MEP 11 will be set to status Failed and the alarm OAM-
FM MA: Vlan 20 MEP Id: 10 Fail Alarm will be activated, indicating that a Remote Mep in Failed
is present in the RMep table of the local MEP 10.
The remote MEP remains in status Failed until the local MEP receives a valid CCM message from
the remote MEP or the user removes the remote MEP from the table.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 175


Entry in table and enabling
The entry of MEP in the table takes place:
• AUTOMATICALLY, after the reception of the first CCM sent by a remote MEP.
For these remote MEPs, the table displays the identifier of the remote MEP and the MAC
Address of the equipment which the remote MEP belongs to.
The enabling for this type of remote MEPs must be executed manually by the operator
(see Fig.16).
• MANUALLY, after a command of the operator, who adds the remote MEP.
For these remote MEPs, the table displays the identifier of the remote MEP (provided by
the operator) while the MAC Address is set to zero.
The enabling for this type of MEP takes place automatically when the equipment receives
the first CCM message sent by the specific remote MEP.
When the first CCM is received, the field MAC Address gets the value of the MAC Address
of the remote equipment, source of CCM.

Status
The status of a remote MEP is displayed in the table by the parameter MEP State and can be:
• Idle. Initial status of the remote MEP after its manual insertion in the table.
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Idle are indicated in
Fig.16.
• Start. Initial status of the remote MEP after its automatic insertion in the table or status
assumed by remote MEP after it has been disabled.
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Start and the condi-
tions which cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one change
depending on the type of insertion of the MEP in the RMep table (automatic or manual)
as depicted in Fig.16.
• Conn. Status the remote MEP reaches from the status Start after an enabling command
or at the reception of the first CCM message sent by the specific remote MEP, if previously
recorded by the operator (see Fig.16).
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Conn and the condi-
tions which cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one are de-
picted in Fig.16.
• Failed. Status the remote MEP reaches when the local MEP does not receive (for a period
of 2,5 times the CCM interval) a CCM message from the specific remote MEP, as de-
scribed at the beginning of the chapter.
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Failed and the condi-
tions which cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one are de-
picted in Fig.16.

After the (automatic or manual) insertion of a remote MEP in the table, it can be removed only
manually by the operator.
In NMS, the RMep table of a local MEP can be displayed only after the local MEP has been asso-
ciated to a VLAN.

176 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Fig.16 OAM-FM - Management of Remote MEP status in the RMep table

The remote MEP is automatically inserted in The remote MEP is manually


RMep table when the local MEP receives the first inserted in the RMep table by the user (1).
CCM message sent by remote MEP Remote MEP status: Idle

The user enables


the remote MEP
(2)

Remote MEP status Remote MEP status


Start Start

The user The user


The user enables Local MEP
disables the disables the
the remote MEP receives the first
remote MEP remote MEP
(2) CCM sent by the
(3) (3) remote MEP

The user
Remote MEP status Remote MEP status
deletes the
Conn. Conn.
remote MEP
Local MEP does (4)
Local MEP Local MEP does Local MEP
not receive the not receive the
receives receives
CCMs from remote CCMs from
again the again the
MEP anymore remote MEP
CCMs from CCMs from anymore
remote MEP remote MEP
Remote MEP status Remote MEP status
Failed Failed

The user deletes The user deletes


the remote MEP (4) the remote MEP (4)

Removal of remote MEP Removal of remote MEP


from the RMep table from the RMep table

CCM

The term CCM (Continuity Check Message) defines the messages which constantly monitor the path of the
service instance showing the connection troubles.

CCMs are multicast messages sent by a MEP entity to the other MEP entities belonging to the same MA
(Remote MEPs), are unidirectional messages (do not need a reply) and are periodically sent.

Within a MA which n MEPs belongs to, every MEP periodically sends a CCM in multicast; every MEP waits
to periodically receive n-1 CCMs.

The missed reception of a CCM by a MEP means the presence of a fault in the path of the service instance
(VLAN).

When a MEP does not receive a CCM message, it goes to status Failed: this status is notified to the other
MEPs setting the field RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) in the sent CCM message.

In this way, all the MEP entities know the existence of a fault along their own path.

The remote MEP is automatically inserted in the RMep table when the local MEP receives the first CCM mes-
sage sent by the remote MEP.

The CCM management in the equipment is strictly bound to the MEP management.

In fact, the configuration parameters of the CCM messages must be set when MEP is created. The user has
to define:

• The interval used for the transmission of CCMs (CCM interval).

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 177


For a correct operation of the CCM messages, the CCM interval must be the same for all the MEPs
of the same VLAN.

• The direction you wish to send the CCM messages to.

Once the MEP has been defined, the enabling of the transmission of CCMs is required.

Then, the user can disable and enable again the transmission of the CCM messages as he wishes and
change the transmission interval (see equipment User Manual).

The transmission direction of CCMs cannot be changed. To do this, remove the MEP from the VLAN and
create a new one with the new values.

In the equipment, the CCM messages (OAM-FM packets) are routed on the VLANs only if the control of Tag
VLan Id is active (parameter Ingress Filtering Check - set value Fallback or Secure - see equipment User
Manual).

In the CCM messages sent in multicast (OAM-FM packets) is used as:

• Destination address (Destination MAC address): 01-80-C2-00-00-3x with x from 0 to 7 according


to the layer of OAM-FM Domain.

• Source address (Source MAC address): physical address of the equipment which has generated the
CCM message (MAC Address associated to the management LAN port of the controller).

LBM

The term LBM (LoopBack Message) defines the LoopBack messages which, once a fault has been detected
through the CCM messages, allow isolating the point where the fault has occurred.

The operation modality of OAM-FM LoopBack is similar to IP ping.

From a MEP an OAM-FM packet is sent in unicast with a request of Echo Request (LoopBack Message) to a
MIP or MEP belonging to the same MA. The MEP waits for the relevant reply Echo Reply (Loopback Replies)
sent in unicast from the remote maintenance point.

The missing reply to a LBM message indicates the presence of a fault between the MEP which has sent the
message and the maintenance point which has not replied to the message.
The LBM messages are sent after a command from operator (see equipment User Manual).

The transmission of LoopBack messages requires the setting of:

• The local MEP, which you wish to send the messages from.

• The remote maintenance point, belonging to the same Domain and the same MA of the local MEP,
which you wish to send the messages to. The setting of a:
• MEP can be done choosing the MEP in the RMep table or setting the MAC Address of the
equipment where the remote MEP is defined.
• MIP can be done setting the MAC Address of the equipment where MIP is defined.

• Number of messages (OAM-FM packets - Echo Request) you wish to send in sequence with a single
sending confirmation (minimum 1 maximum 5).

At the end of the operation, a statistics is available with the number of sent packets (Sent messages), the
number of received correct packets (Valid), the number of packets received out of sequence (Out Of Order)
and the number of packets received with unknown format (Bad Msdu).

Equipment, in the LBM messages sent in unicast, uses as:

• Destination address (Destination MAC address): physical address of the addressee of the LoopBack
message.

• Source address (Source MAC address): physical address of the equipment which has generated the
LoopBack message.

178 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


LTM

The term LTM (Link Trace Message) defines the Link Trace messages which allow determining the path
covered by an OAM-FM packet between the end-points of a service instance (VLAN).

The operating modality of OAM-FM Link Trace is similar to TraceRoute IP.

A Link Trace message is sent in multicast from a MEP (local) to a remote MEP, whose physical address must
be known.

In the Link Trace messages, the TTL (Time To Live) field, which displays the number of pieces of equipment
of the specific OAM-FM Domain the packet can pass through before being declared expired, is properly con-
figured.

The LTM messages are captured by all the MEPs-MIPs (defined on the same VLAN) on the equipment
crossed to reach the destination MEP.

Every MEP-MIP, once the message has been intercepted, decreases the TTL field, replies to the source MEP
with an unicast message and forwards the LTM message to the destination MEP.
This operation is repeated until the packet arrives to the addressee remote MEP.

At the end of the operation, the local MEP has acquired the list of the physical addresses (MAC Address) of
the equipment where the Link Trace messages have passed.
The LTM messages, to trace the path between two different MEPs of the same VLAN, are sent after a com-
mand by operator (see equipment User Manual).

To trace a path, the operator must set the two path ends:

• Local MEP.

• Remote MEP. This setting can be done choosing the MEP from the RMep table or setting the MAC
Address of the equipment whose remote MEP has been defined.

The remote MEP, to make the operation being successful, must be in status Conn. (see Fig.16).

Then the operator must send the LTM message (Run Test).

At the end of the operation, will be displayed the list of the MAC Addresses of the MIPs-MEPs crossed to
reach the remote MEP with the indication of the distance in Hops from the source MEP.

The LTM messages are sent in multicast (OAM-FM packets), use as:

• Destination address (Destination MAC address): 01-80-C2-00-00-3y with y from 8...0xF accord-
ing to the layer of the OAM-FM Domain.

• Source address (Source MAC address): physical address of the equipment which has generated the
Link Trace message.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 179


Example of configuration of an OAM-FM maintenance Domain

Fig.17 shows an example of configuration of a maintenance OAM-FM area including four ALCplus2 pieces
of equipment (A.1, A.2, A.3 and A.4). This area is used to monitor the end to end availability of VLAN 20.

Fig.17 OAM-FM - Example of configuration of a maintenance area

Domain: Test

A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4


MEP 10 MEP 11
Switch Switch MIP Switch Switch
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
A A A A
3 3 3 3
4 VLAN Id:20 4 4 4
MA: Vlan 20

The steps to execute through NMS on every single equipment are the following:

1. Configure the VLAN with identifier 20 on the 4 pieces of equipment (see equipment User Manual).
The VLAN must be operating so, besides creating it, it is necessary:
• To execute the proper physical connections.
• To activate the Ethernet ports interested by the VLAN (see equipment User Manual - parameter
Rate Control).
• To configure properly the transit of the messages in input from the Ethernet port (see equipment
User Manual - parameter Port Based VLAN).
• To activate the control of Tag VLan Id (see equipment User Manual - parameter Ingress Filtering
Check).

2. Define the OAM-FM Domain with name Test (see Define an OAM-FM Domain) and level 5.
OAM-FM Domain must be defined in every equipment of the Domain Test. The name and the level of
the Domain must be the same for all equipment.

3. Associate the MA with name Test to the VLAN (see equipment User Manual).
MA must be associated to VLAN 20 in every equipment of Domain Test. The name of MA must be the
same for all equipment.

4. Define the MEP (see equipment User Manual) in the following way:
• Only for equipment A.1, associate a MEP with the following characteristics to VLAN 20:
• Identifier: 10
• CCM interval: 10 sec.
• Ethernet port: LAN 3
• Direction of CCMs: Down - The CCM messages are sent in output from LAN 3.
• Only for equipment A.4, associate a MEP with the following characteristics to VLAN 20:
• Identifier: 11
• CCM interval: 10 sec.
• Ethernet port: LAN 1
• Direction of CCMs: Down - The CCM messages are sent in output from LAN 1.

5. Enable the transmission of CCM messages for the MEPs created in the previous step (see equip-
ment User Manual).
After some seconds, the RMep table (see Remote MEPs) relevant to MEP 10 (equipment A.1) records
the MEP 11 in status Start and the alarm OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 10 Fail Alarm becomes active.
At the same time, the RMep table relevant to MEP 11 (equipment A.4) records the MEP 10 in status
Start and the alarm OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 11 Fail Alarm becomes active.

6. In RMep tables, enable the remote MEPs (see equipment User Manual).
In the RMep table relevant to MEP 10 (equipment A.1), the remote MEP 11 changes to status Conn and
the OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 10 Fail Alarm alarm becomes inactive.

180 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


In similar mode, in the RMep table relevant to MEP 11 (equipment A.4), the remote MEP 10 changes
to status Conn and the OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 11 Fail Alarm alarm becomes inactive.

The configuration of the maintenance area depicted in Fig.17 is completed and the end to end monitoring
of VLAN 20 is active.

At this point:

• When a fault is detected (activation of the alarm OAM-FM... Fail Alarm) or in order to execute checks
on the OAM-FM path, the operator can use the LTM messages to verify the path of the VLAN.

• When the Fail alarm is detected, the operator can use the LBM messages to detect the interruption
point of the VLAN.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 181


E1 Browser
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Read Only: Entry. Read-Write: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The E1 Browser command allows managing the 2Mbit/s tributaries of equipment selected in the open
map.

Operations
Verify the status of 2Mbit/s tributaries
Verify/change the label of a tributary
Activate/deactivate the use of 2Mbit/s tributaries
Activate/deactivate the loops of 2Mbit/s tributaries

GUI
E1 Tributaries management window

Verify the status of 2Mbit/s tributaries

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the equipment which you wish to verify the status of 2 Mbit/s tributaries for.
2. Select Configuration > E1 Browser.
The E1 Tributaries management window shows the status of tributaries, loops and alarms.

Verify/change the label of a tributary

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read Only: Entry. Read-Write: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the equipment which you wish to change the label of one or more 2Mbit/s tributaries for.

2. Select Configuration > E1 Browser.


3. Click on the text box corresponding to the tributary.

4. Type an alphanumeric string of, at most, 40 characters.

5. Press Send New Setting and confirm.

182 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Activate/deactivate the use of 2Mbit/s tributaries

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read Only: Entry. Read-Write: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING If the symbol of a tributary is not available (greyed), this means that the tributary cannot be
configured because already used for other functions (as, for example, synchronization). For more informa-
tion, refer to the User Manual of the specific equipment.

1. Select the equipment for which you wish to activate/deactivate the use of one or more 2 Mbit/s tribu-
taries.
2. Select Configuration > E1 Browser.

3. Select the tributary you wish to enable/disable.


The tributary gets the status complementary to the previous one (if enabled, it changes to disabled and
vice versa) and the symbol assumes colour yellow (configuration not communicated yet to the equip-
ment). Pressing:
• Ok, LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with E1 disabled, the signal is however connected.
• No, LOS alarm is raised if, with E1 disabled, the signal is however connected.

When the tributary is disabled, the management status of LOS alarm can be changed in the following
way. If the box LOS Inv. is:
• , LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with E1 disabled, the signal is however connected.
• , LOS alarm is raised if, with E1 disabled, the signal is however connected.
Select the box to enabled or disable the management of the alarm. On every selection, the box gets
the status complementary to the previous one (if enabled, it changes to disabled and vice versa).

4. Press Send New Setting and confirm.


The tributary takes the new status and the corresponding symbol becomes white again.

Activate/deactivate the loops of 2Mbit/s tributaries

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read Only: Entry. Read-Write: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Maintenance operation (MAN. OP).

1. Select the equipment which you wish to activate/deactivate one or more tributary loop for.

2. Select Configuration > E1 Browser.

3. Select the loop you wish to activate (or deactivate).


The loop gets the status complementary to the previous one (if active, it changes to inactive and vice
versa) and the symbol becomes yellow (configuration not communicated yet to the equipment).
The activation of the loop on internal side automatically enables the tributary, if this is not already en-
abled.

4. Press Send New Setting.


If you are activating one loop at least, a message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows
the current setting of timeout.

5. Press Yes to continue the operation.


The tributary loop assumes the new status and the symbol becomes white.
The activation of one loop at least raises the alarm MAN. OP. If the equipment is switched off and then
switched on, the loops are inactive independently from the setting before the switch off.
If the message Operation fail! ...Wrong user profile! is displayed, verify that the used user profile can
enable the tributary.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 183


E1 Tributaries management window

This window allows managing the status of E1 tributaries on the equipment. Select the box on the right
top side of the window to display the groups of wished tributaries. The number of available tributaries de-
pends on the equipment type.

Menu bar
File > Exit. Closes the window.

Tributary area
Status of use of the tributary. Symbol:

• , the tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this condition, alarms are inhib-
ited and LOS alarm is raised or not depending on the setting of box LOS Inv (see note 4).

• , the tributary is active (tributary used). In this condition, the controller does not
inhibit alarms.

If the symbol of a tributary is not available (greyed), this means that the tributary cannot be
configured because already used for other functionalities (as, for example, synchronization). For
more information, refer to the User Manual of the single equipment.

Label. Read-only parameter which identifies the tributary in univocal way.


LOS Inv. Management of LOS alarm when the tributary is not used. If the box is:
• , alarms are not inhibited and LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary disabled, the
2Mbits/s signal is however connected.
• , alarms are inhibited and LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled, the 2Mbits/s
signal is however connected.

The status of box LOS Inv IS MEANINGFUL ONLY if the tributary is not used.
Loop. Indication of loop operation:

• , loop on line side is active.

• , loop on internal side is active.

• , loop is inactive.

Push-buttons
Refresh. Updates the information in the window.
Send New setting. Transmits the new settings to the equipment.

184 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Equipment Port Configuration
System access | Read–Only, Read–Write
User profile | Read Only: Entry. Read-Write: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Equipment Port Configuration command displays the settings of the communication ports of the
equipment (except FAMxc and SDH N+1) in the open map.

Operations
Verify the settings of the communication ports of equipment
Display the settings of the PPP communication ports of the selected equipment
Display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of the equipment
Verify/change the IP access control list (ACL)
Enable/disable the management LAN ports
Verify/change the parameters of the supervision ports
Execute the Ping of the equipment
Open a Telnet session
Open a SSH session
Display the equipment with Logical Address and Station Id different
Change the Logical Address of the equipment
Filter/sort the list of the equipment

GUI
Port Communication Browser window
Set In - Band / Management Port window

Verify the settings of the communication ports of equipment

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > Equipment Port Configuration.


The Port Communication Browser window is displayed.

Display the settings of the PPP communication ports of the selected equipment

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Operation not available for equipment of type ALFOplus80HD.

1. Select Configuration > Equipment Port Configuration.

2. Select the equipment.


3. Select Commands > NE PPP Interfaces.
The PPP Interface Browser window opens, where the setting of the PPP communication ports available
for the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal is displayed.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 185


Display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of the equipment

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > Equipment Port Configuration.

2. Select the equipment.

3. Select Commands > NE Routing Table.


The Routing Table window opens, where the setting of the Routing Table and the Default Gateway ad-
dress currently used by the equipment is displayed.

Verify/change the IP access control list (ACL)

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read Only: Entry. Read-Write: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING The command ACL is available only for equipment of type ALCplus2, ALCplus2e and AGS10.

1. Select Configuration > Equipment Port Configuration.

2. Select the equipment.


3. Select Commands > ACL.
By means of the commands in the ACL Management window, it is possible to:
Add a rule to the IP access control list
Remove a rule from the IP access control list
Enable/disable the use of the IP access control list

For more information, go to par. IP access control list (more info).

Add a rule to the IP access control list

WARNING A maximum of 32 rules can be inserted in the list.

1. Select Configuration > Equipment Port Configuration.

2. Select the equipment.

3. Select Commands > ACL.

4. Press Add. The Inserts Parameters window is displayed.

5. In the Name box, set the name of the rule.

6. In the IP box, set the IP subnetwork or the single IP address which the rule refers to.

7. In the Mask box set the netmask relevant to the IP subnetwork/IP address which the rule refers to (if
a single IP is set, the mask is 255.255.255.255).

8. Select the usage condition of the rule:


• Deny. The IP subnetwork/IP address is not allowed accessing the equipment.
• Allow. The IP subnetwork/IP address is allowed accessing the equipment.

9. If you wish the equipment allows or denies the access to any IP address, activate the check-box Any.
In detail, if you activates the check-box Any with selected the option:
• Deny, the equipment will refuse packets sent by any IP address (with the exception displayed
in par. IP access control list (more info)).
• Allow, the equipment will accept packets sent by any IP address.

186 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Selecting the check-box Any is equivalent to setting IP address to 0.0.0.0 and netmask to 0.0.0.0.

10.Press Create.
The rule is inserted in the list in alphanumerical order with respect to the name (column Name).

11.Press Close.

Remove a rule from the IP access control list

1. Select Configuration > Equipment Port Configuration.

2. Select the equipment.


3. Select Commands > ACL.

4. Select the row relevant to the rule you wish to delete from the list. A check sign is displayed next to
the rule name.
Multiple selections can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.

5. Press Remove and confirm.


The rule is removed from the list.

Enable/disable the use of the IP access control list

1. Select Configuration > Equipment Port Configuration.


2. Select the equipment.

3. Select Commands > ACL.

4. Select respectively:
• Enable, to enable the use of the IP Access Control List.
• Disable, to disable the use of the IP Access Control List.

5. Press Apply and confirm.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 187


ACL Management window

The ACL Management window shows the list of the rules for the access to the equipment. Every row cor-
responds to one rule. The rules in the list are sorted in alphanumeric order with respect to their name (col-
umn Name).

List of rules:
• Name. Name of the rule. The check sign next to the rule name indicates that the rule has been
selected to be removed.
• IP Address. IP subnetwork or single IP network which the rule refers to.
• Mask. Netmask relevant to the IP subnetwork or to the IP address which the rule refers to.
• Permission. Use conditions of the rule:
• Allow. The IP subnetwork/IP address is allowed accessing the equipment.
• Deny. The IP subnetwork/IP address is not allowed accessing the equipment.

Options (Status of use of the access control list):


• Enable. The use of the IP Access Control List is enabled: the access to the equipment by other
elements (equipment, PC, etc.) is allowed only if the IP address of the element matches the rules
displayed in the list.
• Disable. The use of the IP Access Control List is disabled: the access to the equipment by other
elements (equipment, PC, etc.) is not defined by the rules indicated in the list.

Push-buttons:
Add. It opens the window for the creation of a new rule.
Remove. It deletes the selected rule from the list.
Refresh. It refreshes the display of the window.
Close. It closes the window.

IP access control list (more info)

The IP Access Control List is a mechanism used to control and filter the source IP addresses which are al-
lowed accessing to the equipment.

This mechanism consists in a list of rules (Access Control Entry) which determine if an IP subnetwork or a
single IP address is allowed accessing to the selecting equipment.

Every rules are composed by a descriptive part and a decision-making part. The descriptive part of the rule
is represented by the IP address (or by a set of IP addresses) source of the packet. The decision-making
part is the action to execute: making the packet passes (Allow) or refusing it (Deny).

The analysis of the packet consists in considering the following conditions:

1. ACL rules are considered only if the use of ACL itself is enabled.

2. The control is applied only to the packets destined to the local equipment.

3. The access to the equipment is always allowed by the LCT PPP port.

4. The access is always allowed if the IP address coincides with that of a user who has executed a Login
procedure. The user is allowed changing ACL without involving the loss of the connection with the
equipment.

5. The access is allowed only if the source IP address of the packet is not contained in any deny rule.

6. The access is allowed only if the source IP address of the packet is contained in, at least, one allow rule.

7. If ACL does not contain rules, enabling it is equivalent to forbid the access to the equipment from the
Ethernet ports to every IP address.

188 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Enable/disable the management LAN ports

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read Only: Entry. Read-Write: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Operation not available for equipment of type ALFOplus80HD.

The enabling/disabling of the Apply push-buttons is defined by a configuration file. Two cases are possible:
• Apply push-buttons always enabled and Cable Absent/Present is only an information.
• Apply push-buttons enabled only if the condition Cable Absent is displayed.

1. Select Configuration > Equipment Port Configuration.


2. Select the equipment.

3. Select Commands > Lan Port Manag Win.


The Management LAN-Port window is displayed, showing the status of the management LAN ports.

Area Lan x Mode (x = 1,2)


• Alarm severity led. Severity status of the alarm missing/faulted connection cable of the Ethernet
LAN port. It can assume the colours:
• Green, no alarm present.
• Red, orange, yellow and light blue, to signal the presence of the alarm with severity re-
spectively Critical, Major, Minor and Warning.

• Option box Cable Crossover. Enabling status of management LAN ports:


• mdi. LAN management enabled: the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Net-
work Interface Card modality).
• mdi-x. LAN management enabled: the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch
modality).
• auto. LAN management enabled: the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in auto-
matic modality.
• disable. LAN management disabled.

• Option box Speed/Duplex. Enabling status of management LAN ports:


• full duplex 10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex
and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.
• half duplex 10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex
and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.
• full duplex 100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex
and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.
• half duplex 100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex
and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.
• auto speed duplex. The auto negotiation is enabled.

• Push-button Apply. It applies the executes changes. The status of the cable in the connector of
the Ethernet port is reported just below the push-button:
• Cable Present. The cable is inserted in the connector.
• Cable Absent. The cable is not inserted in the connector.

Push-buttons:
Refresh. Updates the data displayed in the window.
Close. Closes the window.

4. To change the parameter, select the relevant box and then the option from the list.

5. Press Apply.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 189


Verify/change the parameters of the supervision ports

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read Only: Entry. Read-Write: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Operation not available for equipment of type ALFOplus80HD.

If the in band supervision is active on the selected equipment, the area relevant to the management of
VLAN tag on the management port is not available and vice versa.
The availability of the Set push-buttons to confirm the changes made in the window can be defined in the
configuration file of the system. Contact Siae for more information.

1. Select Configuration > SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration.

2. Select the equipment.

3. Select Commands > In Band / VLan Tag Mngt.


4. To activate the in band supervision:
• Select the equipment Ethernet port where you wish to activate the supervision.
• Type the VLAN identifier reserved for the in band supervision in the VLan ID (0 - 4095) field.
• Press Set.
If the message Warning! VLAN ID already defined in “Virtual Lan list” or Mac Learning disable is
displayed, at least one of the following condition is true:
• The identifier set for the in band supervision corresponds to that already used by a traffic
VLAN. Change value in the VLan ID box.
• The Ethernet port selected for the in band supervision has not enabled the automatic
learning of MAC Addresses within the MAC table. For this port set the parameter MAC
Learning to value Enable.
WARNING The ports where the in band supervision is enabled must have the option 802.1Q enabled in
order to properly manage the single VLANs.

5. To activate the management of the VLAN tag on the MNGT 1 (or MNGT 2) port:
• Select the activation status of the procedure for the Tagging of the packets in input/output to/
from the specific management LAN.
• Type the VLAN identifier reserved to the management of the tagging procedure in the VLan ID
(0 - 4095) field.
• Press Set.

WARNING If the equipment belongs to one ALCplus2 node and is connected to the other node elements
via Ethernet Nodal bus, the in band supervision is not forwarded on the management LAN ports (MNGT/1
and MNGT/2).

Execute the Ping of the equipment

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read Only: Entry. Read-Write: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > Equipment Port Configuration.

2. Select the equipment.

3. Select Commands > Ping Check.


The Ping window opens, where the operation progress and the final statistics (number of sent and re-
ceived packets, percentage of lost packet, etc.) are displayed.
Every Ping command sends the test packet three times.

190 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Open a Telnet session

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read Only: Entry. Read-Write: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > Equipment Port Configuration.

2. Select the equipment.

3. Select Commands > Telnet.


The window telnet is displayed, which allows establishing a telnet communication to the selected equip-
ment.

Open a SSH session

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read Only: Entry. Read-Write: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Command always displayed, but operating only if the equipment supports SSH.

1. Select Configuration > Equipment Port Configuration.

2. Select the equipment.


3. Select Commands > SSH.
The window to establish a SSH communication to the selected equipment is displayed.

Display the equipment with Logical Address and Station Id different

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > Equipment Port Configuration.

2. Select View > Show mismatched (Station Id - Logical Address) only.


The window displays only the equipment whose value in the column Station Id is different from that of
the column Logical Address.

Change the Logical Address of the equipment

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read Only: Entry. Read-Write: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > Equipment Port Configuration.

2. Select the equipment.

3. Select:
• Commands > Set Station Id (like Logical Address). The value in the column Station Id is
changed. The new value corresponds to the logical address of the equipment (Logical Address).
• Commands > Set Logical Address (like Station Id). The value in the column Logical Ad-
dress is changed. The new value corresponds to the equipment identifier (Station Id).

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 191


Filter/sort the list of the equipment

System access | Read–Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read Only: Entry. Read-Write: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > Equipment Port Configuration.

2. To SORT the list, select:


• Order by > Logical Address. It sorts the list according to the logical address of the NE.
• Order by > Address. It sorts the list according to the IP address of the NE.
• Order by >Type. It sorts the list according to the NE type.
• Order by > Status. It sorts the list according to the status of the connection between the NE
and NMS.
When the Port Communication Browser window is opened, independently from the previous setting, the
equipment is listed in alphabetical order according to the NE type.

3. To FILTER the list, select View > Filter.


In the Filter Selection window, select the boxes corresponding to the wished filter criteria.
The activation of each box expands the window, displaying a section containing the following options:
• Match Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
To set the criterion, type the address of the NE in the text field.
The use the wild-card asterisk character (*) is allowed. For example, typing in the box the letter:
• p, the NE with logic address p will be displayed in the window.
• p*, the NE’s whose logic address start with p will be displayed.
• p*o, the NE’s whose address starts with “p” and ends with “o” will be displayed in the
window.
• Match IP Address. IP address of the equipment.
To set the criterion, type the wished IP Address in the text fields. It is possible to use the wild-
card asterisk character (*).
• Match equipment type. Type of equipment.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the type of wished equipment.
• Match Station Id. Local identifier of the equipment.
To set the criterion, type the NE identifier in the text field.
The use the wild-card asterisk character (*) is allowed. For example, typing in the box the letter:
• p, the NE with identifier “p” will be displayed in the window.
• p*, the NE’s whose identifier start with “p” will be displayed.
• p*o, the NE’s whose identifier starts with “p” and ends with “o” will be displayed in the
window.

4. Press OK.
The Port Communication Browser window displays only the records matching the active criteria.
When the list is filtered, both the displayed and the hidden records are considered.
In the window there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of the filters and displays the com-
plete list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) push-buttons.
Closing the Port Communication Browser window automatically removes the possible active filters.

192 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Port Communication Browser window

The Port Communication Browser window is displayed, where the list of the NE’s and the detail of the com-
munication ports is displayed. The information in the table refers to the moment when the command is
selected or the refresh is executed.

The list displays all the equipment in connected or unreachable status in the open map, except for FAMxc
and SDH N+1.

For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system
is displayed. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
• <node name>.X, where X can assume only the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object).
• <node name>.Y, where Y can assume only a value between 1 and 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

Parameters
Logical Address. Logical address of the equipment (NE object).
Address. IP address of the equipment (NE object).
Type. Equipment type.
Status. Status of the connection between equipment and NMS.
Station Id. Equipment identifier set locally (SCT or WEB LCT - Equipment Id parameter).
ip Address. IP address of the communication port with the equipment LAN network (LAN port).
ip Netmask. Mask for the network address definition (LAN port).
Mac Address. Physical address of the equipment.
In band. Activation status of the in band supervision (the connection to the supervision is
achieved by means of the traffic Lan tributaries). Value:
• Disabled. The in band supervision is not active.
• Enabled. The in band supervision is active.
• ---. The considered type of equipment does not support the supervision in band.
Mngt VLan Tag. Activation status of the procedure for the Tagging of the management packets
in input/output to/from the specific management LAN port and relevant value of VLAN tag.

Menu bar
File > Exit. It closes the window.
View > Filter. It filters the list according to specific criteria.
View > Show mismatched (Station Id - Logical Address) only. It displays only the equip-
ment whose equipment identifier (Station Id) is different from the Logical Address.
View > Show all equipment. It displays all the pieces ofequipment (except from FAMxc and
SDH N+1) in the open map.
Commands > NE PPP Interfaces. It displays the PPP communication ports of the equipment.
Commands > NE Routing Table. It displays/changes the routing table of the equipment.
Commands > ACL. It displays/changes the IP access control list of the selected equipment.
Commands > Lan Port Manag Win. It displays/changes the configuration of the LAN commu-
nication ports of the equipment.
Commands > In Band / VLan Tag Mngt. It displays/changes the In Band management and
the VLAN tagging for the management port.
Commands > Ping Check. It executes the Ping to check the presence and the reachability of
the equipment.
Commands > Telnet. It opens a Telnet session to the equipment.
Commands > SSH. It opens a SSH session to the equipment.
Commands > Set Station Id (like Logical Address). It changes the equipment identifier
(Station Id). The new value corresponds to the equipment logical address (Logical Address).
Commands > Set Logical Address (like Station Id). It changes the logical address of an
equipment (Logical Address). The new value corresponds to equipment identifier (Station Id).
Order by > Logical Address. It sorts the list according to the logical address of the NE.
Order by > Address. It sorts the list according to the IP address of the NE.
Order by >Type. It sorts the list according to the NE type.
Order by > Status. It sorts the list according to the status of connection between NE and NMS.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 193


Set In - Band / Management Port window

This window allows displaying/changing the operating parameters of the equipment supervision ports.

Parameters
VLan ID (area In Band Management). VLAN identifier reserved for the in band supervision:
• 0. No VLan is reserved for the in band supervision.
• Value different from 0. the VLAN with the specific ID is reserved for the in band supervi-
sion.
When the in band supervision is active (at least one box LAN/Port active), IT IS NECESSARY to
reserve one VLan for this management.
To modify the parameter, set a value between 1 and 4095. The In Band Management function
is immediately activated on the activation of the box relevant to a port (restart not necessary).

VLan ID (area MNGT Port VLan Tagging). VLAN identifier reserved for the Tagging procedure:
• 0. No VLan is reserved for the Tagging procedure.
• Value different from 0. The VLan with the specific ID is reserved for the Tagging proce-
dure.
When the Tagging procedure is active (at least one MNGT... box active), IT IS NECESSARY to
reserve a VLan for this management.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 4095. The Tagging procedure is immedi-
ately activated on the enabling of the box relevant to a port (restart not necessary).
If the in band supervision is active for the equipment (activation of one of the boxes in the In
Band Management area), the MNGT VLan Tagging area is not available.

Push-buttons
LAN x/Port x (area In Band Management). Activation status of the in band supervision (the
connection to supervision is realized through the traffic LAN tributaries and/or the Radio Ether-
net ports):
• Inactive. The in band supervision on the specific Ethernet port is inactive.
• Active. The in band supervision on the specific Ethernet port is active.
To modify the parameter, activate/deactivate the specific boxes.
The ports where the in band supervision is enabled must have the option 802.1Q enabled in or-
der to properly manage the single VLANs.
MNGT <number of management Lan> (area MNGT Port VLan Tagging). Activation status of
the procedure for the Tagging of the management packets in input/output to/from the manage-
ment LAN ports:
• Disable. The Tagging procedure is not active: the TAG is not managed for the manage-
ment packets in input/output to/from the LAN port.
• Enable. The Tagging procedure is active: the TAG is managed for the management pack-
ets in input/output to/from the LAN port.
All the management packets in output from the equipment controller are tagged with the
VID value for the Tagging procedure.
• En. Secure. The Tagging procedure is active: the LAN accepts only the management
packets with VID value reserved for the Tagging procedure.

194 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


NE PPP Interfaces
System access | Read Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Command available only if a single equipment (except for ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALFO,
ALFOplus80HD) has been selected.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is in the ALplus nodal window/
ALCplus2 nodal window and requires to select a specific IDU from a list.

The NE PPP Interfaces command displays the settings relevant to the PPP communication ports available
for the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal.

Operations
Display the settings of the PPP communication ports of the selected equipment

Display the settings of the PPP communication ports of the selected equipment

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING If the equipment is in disconnected status, because it has been just created and the first con-
nection has not been executed yet, the window will result empty because the required information is not
present in the database of NMS.

1. Select the equipment.

2. Select Configuration > NE PPP Interfaces.


The PPP Interface Browser window displays the setting of the PPP communication ports available for
the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal.

The Equipment information area lists in order: NE logical address (NE type - NE IP address) - connection
status of NE.

Parameters
Interface. Name of the PPP communication port.
IP Address. IP/PPP address of the port.
IP Netmask. Mask for the definition of the network address.
Mode. Operation mode of PPP protocol.
Speed. Transmission rate of the port.
Signal Input. Type of signal in input to the port (e.g. E1, STM-1, ecc.).
2Mbit Selector. Setting of the tributary 2Mb
Slot Selector. Setting of the tributary 2Mb, timeslot
16Kbit Map. Mapping of 16Kbit (channel EOC E1).
The available values change depending on the type of selected equipment. For the detail of all the avail-
able ports for each type of equipment, refer to the equipment documentation.
The window displays the more meaningful characteristics for each communication ports.
The symbol”-” indicates that the value is not meaningful for the considered type of port.

Menu bar
File > Exit. It closes the window.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 195


NE Routing Table
System access | Read Only, Read–Write
User profile | Read Only: Entry. Read-Write: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Command available only if a single equipment (except for ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALFO) has
been selected.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is in the ALplus nodal window/
ALCplus2 nodal window and requires to select a specific IDU from a list.

The NE Routing Table command displays the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address cur-
rently used by the equipment (Routing Table Running and Default Gateway).

Operations
Display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of the equipment
Add an element to the Routing Table
Delete an element from the Routing Table
Set or change the IP address used as Default Gateway
Delete the IP address used as Default Gateway

GUI
Routing Table window

See also
Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info)

Display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of the equipment

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING If the equipment is in disconnected status, because it has been just created and the first con-
nection has not been executed yet, the window will result empty because the required information is not
present in the database of NMS.

1. Select the equipment.

2. Select Configuration > NE Routing Table.


The Routing Table window is displayed.

Add an element to the Routing Table

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read Only: Entry. Read-Write: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the equipment.

2. Select Configuration > NE Routing Table.


3. Select Commands > Add New Route.
The Add Route window opens.

4. In the Destination box, type the IP Address of the IP network or of the destination element.
For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number between 0 and 255.

5. In the NetMask box, type the mask for the destination IP network.
For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number between 0 and 255.

196 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


6. In the Hop box, type the IP Address of the Gateway equipment for the destination network.
For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number between 0 and 255.

7. Press Add.
The new element is inserted in the table. The system records the new element in the currently used
Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and in the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing
Table).

Delete an element from the Routing Table

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read Only: Entry. Read-Write: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the equipment.

2. Select Configuration > NE Routing Table.

3. Select the elements to delete.


Items automatically inserted by the controller (items with Direct protocol) cannot be deleted.

4. Select Commands > Delete Route and confirm.


The system deletes the element in the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and in the
backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).

Set or change the IP address used as Default Gateway

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read Only: Entry. Read-Write: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the equipment.


2. Select Configuration > NE Routing Table.

3. Type a number between 0 and 255 in each one of the four available spaces of the Default Gateway area.
The supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment is automatically displayed be-
tween brackets.

4. Press Apply and confirm.


The insertion of a new IP address used as Default Gateway can fail if the new IP address does not belong
to an IP network directly connected to the equipment interface.

Delete the IP address used as Default Gateway

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Read Only: Entry. Read-Write: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select the equipment.

2. Select Configuration > NE Routing Table.

3. Press Delete in the Default Gateway area and confirm.


The system deletes the Default Gateway IP address in the currently used Routing Table (Running Rout-
ing Table) and in the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 197


Routing Table window

The Routing Table window shows the setting of the Routing Table and the Default Gateway address cur-
rently used by the equipment.

Equipment information area. This area displays in order: Logical address of the NE (Type of NE-IP
Address of NE) - connection status of NE.

Elements of the Routing Table:


• Destination. IP address of IP network or of destination element.
• Net Mask. IP NetMask of IP network or of destination element.
• Hop. IP address of the equipment acting as gateway.
• Interface. Supervision port of the local equipment which the Gateway equipment is connected
to. The available values change depending on the type of selected equipment. Here are reported
the ports generally present in all the pieces of equipment. For the detail of all the ports available
for each type of equipment, refer to the equipment documentation.
• Lan. Communication port with the LAN network.
• Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management pro-
gram or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
• RS232. Serial port for the connection with other network elements.
• Radio. Communication port represented by the radio signal.
• 2Mb/s. E1 communication port (2Mb/s).
• - . Internal port (internal loopback).
• Route-Type. Modality of connection (direct or indirect) between the specific port (Interface) and
the destination IP network:
• Direct. The IP network or the element are directly connected to the equipment interface.
The IP network or the element are automatically inserted by the equipment software.
• Indirect. The IP network or the element are not directly reachable by the equipment in-
terface. The IP network or the element have been automatically inserted by the OSPF
protocol (dynamic element).

Area Default Gateway.


• Default Gateway. IP Address of the equipment acting as gateway.
• Interface. Supervision port of the local equipment which the equipment acting as Gateway is
connected to.
• Apply. It applies the setting made by the user to the Default Gateway.
• Delete. It deletes the IP Address of Default Gateway from the Routing Table currently used
(Routing Table Running) and from the backup memory of the equipment (Routing Table Stored).

Menu bar:
File > Exit. It closes the window.
Commands > Refresh. It updates the information contained in the window.
Commands > Add New Route. It adds an element to the Routing Table.
Commands > Delete Route. It deletes an element from the Routing Table.

198 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info)

When all the pieces of equipment belong to the same IP network, it is not necessary to define the Routing
Table and the address of the gateway equipment because the network is able to manage its own inner
traffic. The setting of these parameters is necessary when the equipment belongs to different networks,
then, the traffic has to be routed again from a network to the other one.

The function of the Routing Table is the one to check the routing of the supervisory messages exchanged
among the elements (PCs, equipment, etc.), that use the TCP/IP protocol, from one network to the other
one.

Routing Table (Running)


Stored Routing Table
Default Gateway

Routing Table (Running)

Every equipment, when initialized (start-up operation), automatically sets the elements of the Routing Ta-
ble that identify the supervisory ports of the equipment (communication ports provided with the equipment
for the input/output of the supervisory signal).

These elements are set according to the IP addresses assigned to each port.

If the user changes the IP address of a supervisory port, the system does not dynamically change it in the
equipment Routing Table. It is necessary to execute a reset of the equipment, because the elements of the
Routing Table are set at the equipment start-up.

If it is necessary, the user can add to these elements (automatically set) some other ones.
The system records each new element (manually set) in the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing
Table) and in the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table); the system does not
record the elements (automatically set) in the backup memory of the controller because they are set again
at every equipment start-up.

The Running Routing Table is static. The system updates this table using the elements of the Stored Rout-
ing Table, at every equipment start-up.

Stored Routing Table

The equipment does not currently use the Stored Routing Table. This table becomes operative at the equip-
ment restart. In fact, in this case, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table in the Rout-
ing Table used by the equipment (Running Routing Table). What just said is valid only for the elements
whose router equipment (Hop) is associated to an active interface.

The setting of the Stored Routing Table is necessary, for instance, when the user wants to change an ad-
dress of the equipment supervisory ports. In this case, it is not possible to change the currently used Rout-
ing Table (Running Routing Table). The changes have to be made to the Stored Routing Table. At the next
equipment start-up, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table in the Routing Table used
by the equipment.

The Stored Routing Table can be displayed/changed through the local management program of the equip-
ment (SCT/LMT and/or WEB LCT).

Default Gateway

The system forwards to the equipment with the Default Gateway function the data that have a receiver
unreachable through the routes in the Routing Table.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 199


Hw Inventory
System access | Read Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING The Hw Inventory functionality is available only for the equipment of type EL, US, ADM-1,
EXP63, ALFO, ALFOPlus, AGS10, AGS-20, ALFOplus80HD and ALS series (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, AL-
Cplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2, ALCplus2e).

The HW Inventory command displays the hardware version of equipment in the open map (Hw Inventory
functionality).

Operations
Display the hardware of equipment in the map
Save the data to file
Save periodically the data to file
Deactivate the periodic saving of the data to file

GUI
HW Inventory window

Display the hardware of equipment in the map

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > HW Inventory.


2. Select, in the Equipment Type area, the NE types for which you wish to display the hardware data.

3. Type, in the Max Rows box, the maximum number of records you wish to display.

4. Press Read.
The window displays the hardware data relevant to all the types of NE selected in the open map.

5. If you wish to display a specific detail of the data, execute one or more of the following settings, ac-
cording to the wished filter criteria:
• Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
To set the criterion, type the logical address of the NE in the text field and press Add.
It is possible to use the asterisk (*) as jolly character only at the end of the alphanumeric string.
The values set in this way are inserted in the list above the text field.
It is possible to delete an item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, Del.
• IP Address. IP address of the NE.
To set the criterion, type the wished IP address.
It is possible to use the asterisk (*) as jolly character only for the final fields (the asterisk cannot
be before a numeric field). For example, the values 172.18.54.* or 172.18.*.* are allowed,
while the value 172.18.*.215 is not allowed.
Pressing IP Clear to delete the IP Address.
• Unit Type. Type of unit of the equipment.

The filter is available and meaningful only if the Expansion display modality is selected.
To set the criterion, select the wished units. It is possible to select a maximum of three units.
To select the units, press the Ctrl key and the unit.
Moreover it is possible to define, for each type of equipment, which units must not be used in
the Unit Type in the following way:
• Press Not managed unit type.
• In the Select equipment type area, select the type of equipment for which you wish to
hide the units.

200 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


In the area below, the detail of the relevant units is displayed.
The highlighted units are already hidden.
• In the Select not managed unit area, select the units you do not want to display in the
Unit Type list for the selected equipment type.
Select the Select All option to select all the units or the Deselect All option to deselect all
the units.
• Press Apply.
• Part Number. Part Number of the unit.
To set the criterion, type a 10 characters alphanumeric string in the text field.
• HW Edition. Hardware version of the unit.
To set the criterion, type a 3 characters alphanumeric string in the text field.
• Bar Code. Bar code of the unit.
To set the criterion, type a 24 characters alphanumeric string in the text field.

6. Press Read.
The hardware data, relevant to all the NE’s in the open map matching the set criteria, are displayed.

7 Select the option:


• Expansion, to display the data in expanded format: for each equipment, the hardware charac-
teristics of all the units are displayed.
• Compact, to display the data in compact format: for each equipment, the hardware character-
istics of the controller unit are displayed.
8. To delete all the set option filter, press Reset Filter.

Save the data to file

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > HW Inventory.

2. Filter the data you wish to save to file (see Display the hardware of equipment in the map).

3. Press Export manual.


In the Export window, an hypertextual link shows the name/extension of the file where the data will be
saved.
By default, the name of the file has the following format HwInv <day-month-year> <hour-minute-sec-
ond>.zip. The name and the extension of the file can be configured by the Superuser. The formats of
the managed files are: csv, xml, zip (cvs zipped or xml zip).
4 Select the hypertextual link.

5. Set the path where you wish to save the file.

6. Confirm the operation.


The system saves in the file all the hardware data matching the set filter criterion and not only those
relevant to the displayed records.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 201


Save periodically the data to file

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > HW Inventory.

2. Filter the data you wish to periodically save to file (Display the hardware of equipment in the map).

3. Press Export timer.


The Filter description area displays the filters which will be applied to every periodic saving.

4. Type the name of the filter in the Filter Name box.

5. Type, in the Export periodicity day box, the periodicity in days of the data export and, in the Hour box,
the time when the export is executed.

6 Press Insert.
At the first set time interval, a file will be saved containing the hardware data of equipment matching
the filter criteria.
The file will be saved in the directory /opt/nms5ux/ExpHwInv, in the format .cvs and .xml, and will be
named HwInv-filtername-<date_time>.
The files will be saved until when the user does not remove the filter (Deactivate the periodic saving of
the data to file).

Deactivate the periodic saving of the data to file

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > HW Inventory.

2. Press Export timer.


The Delete Filter area lists the filters defined by the user.

3. Select the filter you wish to deactivate.


The Select filter to be deleted area displays the detail of the filter.

4 Press Delete.
The filter is removed.

202 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


HW Inventory window

This window allows displaying and saving the data of hardware inventory of the equipment.

Filter area
Equipment Type. Type of equipment. The selection of this filter is mandatory to display the
hardware data. The setting of all the other data is optional.
Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
IP Address. IP address of the NE.
Unit Type. Type of unit of the equipment. The filter is available only if selected the Expansion
display modality.
Part Number. Part Number of the unit.
HW Edition. Hardware version of the unit.
Bar Code. Bar code of the unit.

Display options
Expansion. Displays the data in expanded format: for each equipment, the hardware charac-
teristics of all the units are displayed.

Compact. Displays the data in compact format: for each equipment, the hardware characteris-
tics of the controller unit are displayed.
To switch from a display modality to the other, select the relevant option.
In case of compact display, it is also possible to switch to the expansion modality pressing the
Exp push-button next to each row of the table. In this case, the table will display only the hard-
ware data relevant to the expanded equipment (the IP address field is automatically set, as fil-
ter, the IP address of the expanded equipment).

Max Rows. Box indicating the maximum number of displayed records.


The x of y Rows field indicates the number of displayed records (x) with respect to the number
of total records (y) matching the set filter criteria.
To display all the records matching the set criteria, type the total number of records in the Max
Rows box.

Parameters
Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
Eq. Type. Type of equipment.
Description. Description of the equipment.
Hw Edition. Hardware version of the unit.
Part Num. Part Number of the unit.
Serial Num. Serial number of the unit.
Bar Code. Bar code of the unit.

Selecting the heading of a column, a red arrow is displayed.


Select the arrow to sort the rows in alphanumeric order with respect to the considered column.
When the arrow is selected, the list is re-sorted in increasing order. At the next selection, the list is
sorted again in decreasing order and so on.

Push-buttons
Read. Reads the data stored in NMS database and displays them according to the set filter.
Reset Filter. Deletes the filter setting.
Export timer. Periodically saves the displayed data to file.
Export manual. Saves the displayed data to file.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 203


NE Backup/Restore
System access | Read Only, Read–Write
User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING The equipment list for which the NE Backup/Restore functionality is configurable. Default: EL,
US, ADM-1, EXP63, ALFO, ALFOPlus, AGS10, AGS-20, ALCPLUS2e, ALFOplus80, ALFOplus80HD and ALS
series (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2).

The NE Backup/Restore command displays the backup files of equipment in the open map.

Operations
Display the backup files of equipment in the map
Restore the equipment configuration
Save the equipment configuration (backup)
Lock/unlock a backup file

GUI
NE Backup/Restore window

See also
NE Backup/Restore functionality (more info)

Display the backup files of equipment in the map

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > NE Backup/Restore.

2. In the Equipment Type area, select the type of equipment for which you wish to show the files.

3. If you wish to display a specific detail of the files, execute one or more of the following basic settings,
according to the wished filter criteria:
• Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
It is possible to set the logical addresses in one of the following ways:
• Type the logical address of the NE in the text field and press Add.
• Press Tree. A window opens, where are displayed the containers and the equipment in
the map. Select the wished equipment. The equipment is displayed in the text field. Press
Add.
The Tree push-button is only available in the page open with the Microsoft Internet Ex-
plorer browser.
It is possible to use the asterisk (*) as jolly character only at the end of the alphanumeric string.
The values set in this way are inserted in the list above the text field.
To delete a record from the list, select the address and press Del.
• IP Address. IP address of the NE.
In order to set the criterion, type the wished IP address.
It is possible to use the asterisk (*) as jolly character only for the final fields (the asterisk cannot
precede a field with numbers). For example, the value 172.18.54.* or 172.18.*.* are allowed,
while the value 172.18.*.215 is not allowed.
Pressing IP Clear to delete the IP Address.
• File lock. Status of the file. Selecting the option:
• All, the list will display all the backup files.
• Unlocked, the list will display only the unlocked files.
• Locked, the list will display only the locked files.
• Eligible, the list will display only the files matching all the following rules:

204 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


• Last backup file of a NE for which no locked backup file already exists.
• The backup file must not contain errors.
To set the criterion select the wished option.

4. Type, in the Max Rows box, the maximum number of files you wish to display.
5. Press Apply Filter.
The backup files of the NE’s in the open map which match the set criteria are displayed.

6. Press the Info push-button relevant to a backup file to display its detail.
The File Property window displays the following information:
• Logical Address. Logic address of the NE.
• IP Address. IP address of the NE.
• Eq. Type. Type of equipment.
• File Name. Name of the backup file. The format of the name of the file is the following: <Equip-
ment ID> <hours minutes seconds> <days months years>_U.bku.
• File Date. Date/time of saving of the backup file.
• Backup Result. Result of the operation of file saving.
• Restore Date. Date/time when the operation of file restore has been executed.
• Restore Result. Result of the operation of file restore.
The presence of the symbol - signals that the information is not available.
For the Backup Result and Restore Result the background colour:
• Green, indicates that the operation was successful.
• Red, indicates that the operation is failed.

Restore the equipment configuration

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > NE Backup/Restore.

2. Display the backup files of equipment in the map.

3. Press the relevant Restore push-button.


The NE Restore window displays the following information:
• Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
• IP Address. IP address of the NE.
• File Name. Name of the backup file.

4. Press Confirm.
The operation is scheduled to the process which manages the procedure of periodic file saving.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 205


Save the equipment configuration (backup)

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > NE Backup/Restore.

2. Continue in one of the following ways:

a. Display the backup file/files of the equipment whose configuration you wish to save (Display the
backup files of equipment in the map).

b. Press Backup near the file/files.


Or:

a. Press Switch to Equipment.


All the pieces of equipment, managed by the NE Backup/Restore functionality and present in the
map, are displayed.
The records with the available Backup push-button correspond to the equipment in connected
status, whose configuration can be saved.
b. Press the Backup push-button relevant to the equipment whose configuration you wish to save.
The NE Backup window opens with the following information:
• Logical Address. Logic address of the NE.
• IP Address. IP address of the NE.
• Eq. Type. Type of equipment.

3. Press Confirm.
The operation is scheduled to the process which manages the procedure of periodic file saving.

Lock/unlock a backup file

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Configuration > NE Backup/Restore.

2. Display the backup files of equipment in the map you wish to lock/unlock.

3. To LOCK the file, press the relevant Lock push-button.


The file is locked (label Locked - column Lock).
Press Lock All to lock all the files in the NE Backup/Restore page.
To UNLOCK a file, press the relevant Unlock push-button.
The file is unlocked (column Lock empty).

206 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


NE Backup/Restore window

This window allows managing the backup files of the equipment configuration.

Filter area
Equipment Type. Type of equipment. The selection of this filter is mandatory to display the
backup file. The setting of all the other filters is optional.
Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
IP Address. IP address of the NE.
File lock. Status of file. If active the option:
• All, the list will display all the backup files.
• Unlocked, the list will display only the unlocked files.
• Locked, the list will display only the locked files.
• Eligible, the list will display only the files matching all the following rules:
• Last backup file of a NE for which no locked backup file already exists.
• The backup file must not contain errors.

Display options
Max Rows. Box indicating the maximum number of displayed files.
The x of y Rows field indicates the number of displayed records (x) with respect to the number
of total records (y) which match the set filter criteria.
In order to display all the records matching the set criteria, it is necessary to type the total num-
ber of records in the Max Rows box.

Backup records
Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
IP Address. IP address of the NE.
Eq. Type. Type of equipment.
Backup Date. Date/time of creation of the backup file.
Lock. Status of the file: Locked, <empty box> (unlocked).
Backup file name. Name of the backup file. The format of the name of the file is the following:
<Equipment ID> <hour minutes seconds> <days months years>_U.bku.
Operations available. Push-button:
• Info. It displays the characteristics of the file. If the colour of the box backgrounds:
• Green, there are not errors in the backup file.
• Red, there are errors in the backup file.
• Restore. It transfers the configuration stored in the file to the relevant equipment in the
map.
• Backup. It saves the current equipment configuration to file.
• Lock/Unlock. It locks/unlocks the file. The push-buttons are displayed one in alterna-
tive to the other, depending on the status of the file.
When a push-button is disabled, it means that the relevant function is not available.

Selecting the heading of a column, a red arrow is displayed.


Select the arrow to sort the rows in alphanumeric order with respect to the considered column.
When the arrow is selected, the list is sorted again in increasing order. At the next selection, the
list is sorted again in decreasing order and so on.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 207


Push-buttons
Apply Filter. It reads the data stored in NMS database and displays them according to the set
filters.
Switch to Equipment. It displays all the pieces of equipment, managed by the NE Backup/Re-
store functionality, in the map. The records with the available Backup push-button correspond
to the equipment in connected status, whose configuration can be saved. Push-button available
in alternative to Switch to Backup File.
Switch to Backup File. It displays the backup files of the equipment, managed by the NE Back-
up/Restore functionality, in the map. Push-button available in alternative to Switch to Equip-
ment.
Reload. It re-reads the data stored in NMS database.
Lock All. It locks all file in the list.

208 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


NE Backup/Restore functionality (more info)

WARNING The equipment list for which the NE Backup/Restore functionality is configurable. Default: EL,
US, ADM-1, EXP63, ALFO, ALFOPlus, AGS10, AGS-20, ALCPLUS2e, ALFOplus80, ALFOplus80HD and ALS
series (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2).

The NE Backup/Restore functionality allows saving the complete configuration of the equipment (Backup
operation) to file, displaying the list of the available backup files and transferring the configuration stored
in a file to the relevant equipment (Restore operation).

Backup operation
Restore operation

Backup operation

Operation
The saving of the backup files is automatically executed by NMS or it can be forced in any mo-
ment (see Save the equipment configuration (backup)).
The saving modalities by NMS are the following: NMS periodically verifies if, for each equipment,
one of the following conditions has occurred:
• No backup file is available.
• A change (set) has been executed to the equipment configuration.
• A connection in Configuration modality has been activated between LCT and the equip-
ment.
• The connection between NMS and the equipment has been activated or re-activated.
• A new operation has been stored in the Command Log stored in the equipment controller.

Saved configuration
For each equipment, which at least one of the above mentioned conditions has occurred for, the
system saves the complete configuration in a file. At the successive check, if at least one of the
above mentioned conditions has occurred again, the complete configuration of the equipment
will be saved in a different file and so on.
With complete equipment configuration we mean:
• Configuration of the equipment.
• Configuration of the communication port (IP Ethernet, PPP RS-232, etc.) of the routing
tables and of the possible OSPF parameters.
• List of remote equipment (Remote Element Table).

The periodicity of the control by NMS can be configured by the Superuser.


A maximum of N files (N configurable - default=3) for each equipment is saved on the disk of
the machine where NMS is installed. The file successive to the maximum number will overwrite
the oldest backup file.

Lock file
It is possible to lock one or more files in such a way that the system does not overwrite them
(see Lock/unlock a backup file). These files will not enter in the count of the maximum number
of files saved for each managed equipment. This means they will not be overwritten until the
user unlocks them.
For example, suppose that the system saves a maximum of 3 files for each equipment. For the
equipment A, the files A1, A2 and A3 are automatically saved in this order. If the oldest file (A1)
is locked, when the fourth file is generated, this will not overwrite the file A1, but a new file (A4)
will be created. If no other file is locked, when a new file (A5) is generated, this will overwrite
the oldest file (A2). In this way, the locked files + the last three saved files will be always avail-
able to the user.
It is possible to lock as many files as you wish. The files will remain locked until the user unlocks
them.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 209


Operating systems
Two files with the same content will be available for each backup file in the system disk, one for
each formatting compatible with the O.S.:
• LINUX. The path, where the file is saved, can be configured. The name of the file has the
following format: <Equipment ID> <hour minute second> <day month year>_U.bku.
• WINDOWS. The path, where the file is saved, can be configured. The name of the file has
the following format: <Equipment ID> <hour minute second> <day month
year>_W.bku.
This file is compatible with the applications SCT, WEB LCT, SCT BKU Builder and is avail-
able on the disk of the machine where NMS is installed.
By means of RAN (Remote Access NMS5UX) application, it is possible to copy a backup file to a
different machine or external disk by means of a proper push-button in the NE Backup/Restore
page.

Restore operation

The Restore operation (see Restore the equipment configuration) transfers to the equipment ONLY the con-
figuration parameters in the backup file.
The restore of the communication parameters (IP Address, routing tables, etc.) can be executed only
through the SCT or WEB LCT application. The restore of the Remote Element Table can be configured
through the Remote Element Table command or through the SCT/WEB LCT application.

210 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


LOCATE

Equipment List Locate. It displays the list of equipment managed by NMS.


Proxy Equipment List. It displays the list of equipment managed by Proxy Agent and the relevant Proxy
address.
Physical Link Browser. It displays the list of the physical links among the NE’s in the network.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 211


Equipment List Locate
System access | Read Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Equipment List Locate command displays the list of the equipment managed by NMS.

Operations
Display the list of the equipment
Save/print the list of equipment
Filter/sort the list of the equipment
Open the equipment window
Verify the configuration/operating status of the equipment
Verify the equipment information
Verify in which map the symbol of the equipment is present
Add/remove a prefix to the logical address of the equipment
Delete and rewrite the equipment table
Verify the results of the PM measures of the equipment
Activate/deactivate one or more PM measures at the same time
Update the equipment software
Update the equipment software (FAMxc)
Verify/change the status/severity of the alarms and the trap forwarding status
Verify/change the LCT users list of the equipment
Verify the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to the equipment
Verify the reach ability of the equipment (Line Test)
Connect one or more pieces of equipment
Disconnect one or more pieces of equipment
Re-align the alarms of one or more pieces of equipment
Acquire the configuration of one or more pieces of equipment
Transfer the configuration of the equipment to another equipment of the same type
Start the Command Executor application

GUI
Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window

Display the list of the equipment

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens.

212 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Save/print the list of equipment

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .

2. To print or save to a file:


• All the pieces of equipment stored in the database, select File > Print/Save > All Items.
• The displayed equipment, select File > Print/Save > Filtered Items. If the filters are not ac-
tive, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.
• A group of equipment, select the record and, then, File > Print/Save > Selected Items.

3. In the Output Device Selection window:


To print the data:
a. Select the Output To Printer option.
In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer).
If you want to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you
wish to use.

b. Choose the layout of the page, selecting the Landscape or Portrait option.

c. Press OK.
The format used to print the information corresponds to the format used to display it.
To save the data to a file:

a. Select the Output To File option.


b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be
saved.
Typing only the filename, this will be saved in the /opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application
name> directory.

c. Press Ok.
The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

Filter/sort the list of the equipment

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .

2. Select View > Set Filter.


Select the boxes corresponding to the wished filter criteria.
The activation of each box expands the window, displaying a section containing the following options:
• Match Logical Address. Logic address of the NE.
To set the criteria, type the address of the NE in the text field.
It is possible to use the wild-card asterisk character. For example, typing in the box the letter:
• p, the NE with logic address p will be displayed in the window.
• p*, the NE’s whose logic address start with p will be displayed.
• p*o, the NE’s whose address starts with p and ends with o will be displayed in the win-
dow.
• Match IP Address. Type (real or virtual) and IP address of equipment.
To set as criterion the equipment:
• Real, activate the SNMP Equipment option, and type the IP address of the wished NE in
the text fields.
• Virtual, activate the Virtual Equipment option.
• Match connection status. Status of the connection between NE and NMS.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the wished status.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 213


• Match equipment type. Equipment type.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the type of wished equipment.
• Match performance. Activation status of the Performance Monitoring (PM) measures.
To set the criterion, select the option:
• Enabled, the NE’s with at least one PM measure will be displayed.
• Disabled, the NE’s with no active PM measures will be displayed.
The box is not available if in the warning window, displayed at the opening of the Equipment
Browser [List/Locate] window, the No push-button has been pressed.
• Match Alarm. Severity level of the alarms of the NE.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the wished severity.
• Match Alarm Disabled. Enabling status of the alarms/trap sending of the equipment to NMS.
To set the criterion, select the option:
• Enabled, the NE’s that have not alarms or enabled trap sending will be displayed.
• Disabled, the NE’s that have at least one alarm or one disabled trap sending will be dis-
played.
• Match Gosip Address. Filter not available for the current version of the system.
• Sort by. Sorts the records.
To set the criterion, select the option:
• Logical Address, the equipment will be listed in alphabetical order, with respect to the
logic address.
• Type, the equipment will be listed according to the type of equipment.
To expand/compress a filter criterion without affecting its activation/deactivation status, use the up/
down arrows on the right side.
3. Press OK.
The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window displays only the records matching the activated criteria.
Each time the list is filtered, both the displayed and the hidden records are considered.
In the window there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of the filters and displays the com-
plete list), Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) and Help (it opens the
on-line manual) push-buttons.
Closing the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window automatically removes the possible active filters.

Open the equipment window

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .

2. Select the equipment.


Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more equipment window contemporarily.

3. Select Actions > Open Equipment.


The equipment window opens.
It is possible that, when the command is selected, a message is displayed. The description of the equip-
ment window and of the possible message displayed at its opening is described in the specific equip-
ment User Manual.
The equipment window can be opened also by a double click on the equipment record.

214 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Verify the configuration/operating status of the equipment

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .

2. Select the equipment.


Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more Equipment Information window at the same
time.

3. Select Actions > Equipment Info.


The Equipment Information window opens (see par. Verify the characteristics and the functional status
of the equipment).

Verify the equipment information

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .


2. Select the wished equipment, with acknowledge signal (symbol x in the column Ack).

3. Select View > Acknowledge Status.


The Information window opens.

Verify in which map the symbol of the equipment is present

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Superuser

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .


2. Select the equipment.

3. Select View > Equipment Location (Map).


The Equipment Location window opens.
Box/column:
• Type. Type of NE.
• Ip/Ph Address. IP or physical address of the NE.
• Logical Address. Logic address of the NE.
• Map name. Maps containing the NE.

Add/remove a prefix to the logical address of the equipment

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .

2. To add a prefix:

a. Select one or more pieces of equipment which you wish to add the same prefix to.

b. Select Actions > Location > Assign.


The Location window opens.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 215


c. Type, in the New Location Name box, the prefix you wish to add to the logical address of the
equipment (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 maximum 10 characters).

d. Press Apply.
In the Logical Addr column of the selected equipment, the prefix is added (prefix - logic ad-
dress).
The prefix is furthermore added in all the windows where the <logic address> field is present.
The only exception is the label of the icon that represents the equipment in the map, where the
prefix is not displayed.
If the equipment was already provided with prefix, the new value replaces the previous one.

3. To remove a prefix:

a. Select one or more equipment which you wish to remove the prefix to.

b. Select Actions > Location > Remove.


The prefix is removed from the logic address of the equipment.

Delete and rewrite the equipment table

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Superuser

WARNING The command must be used only in case of a supposed misalignment between the information
in the equipment table and the information of the equipment represented on video in the maps.

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .

2. Select Actions > Map Structure Rebuild.

Verify the results of the PM measures of the equipment

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Operation not available for virtual NE objects and virtual NE objects of ALplus Node and ALCplus2
Node type (for the equipment of a nodal system, the command is present in the nodal window - ALplus
nodal window/ALCplus2 nodal window).

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .

2. Select the equipment.


Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more Graphic Performance Manager windows at
the same time.
3. Select Actions > Performance Monitoring.
The Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens, where the period of time for which you wish to
verify the results of the PM measures is required.
In the boxes:
• Date Reference, the start date (day/month/year) is displayed (by default, the current day is
set).
• Day Previous, the number of days before the set date, constituting the duration of the period
(default: 30 days) is displayed.

4. Set the Date Reference and Day previous boxes to the wished values.
It is possible to set a value within 10 and 180 days.
It is possible to display at most the daily records relevant to the last 180 days (starting from the current
day). The results of the PM measures are stored in the database of the system (Performance Monitoring
table). They are available for a period of 6 months, then they are automatically removed.

5. Set the Auto Select box. In detail:

216 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


• Activate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter of a measure point, also
the other control parameters are automatically selected, compatible with the measure unit of
the selected item (see step 7).
• Deactivate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter, no other parameter
is selected.

6. Press OK.

7. Select the menu TPC.


All the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - yellow wordings) and the measure points
(where the control parameters are really measured) (TP - Termination Point - orange wording) available
for the selected equipment are selected.
The control parameters are contained in the pop-up menu that opens on the side of the measure point.
Generally, more control parameters refer to the same TP.

8. Select the control parameters, for which you wish to display the results of the PM measures.
Not all the control parameters of a TP can be displayed in the same graphic. They have been subdivided
according to the measure unit used for their count: seconds, blocks, dBm, etc.
The Graphic Performance Monitoring window displays the results of the selected control parameters.
When a parameter is selected, the name of the relevant TP changes colour from orange to red. While
the selected control parameter is characterized by a led on its left side.
When a control parameter is selected, it is possible to select all the parameters that have the same
measure unit present in the same TP or in any of the other TP’s.
The control parameters that have not the same measure unit of the selected parameter are not avail-
able (wording of grey colour).
In order to display the results of the parameters with measure unit different from the currently selected
one, it is necessary to deselect all the control parameters (Option > Deselect all TPC command) and,
then, select the new parameters.

Activate/deactivate one or more PM measures at the same time

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Operation not available for the virtual NE objects.


For the NE objects of ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node type, the operation will be executed on all the pieces
of node equipment.

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .

2. Select the equipment.


Selecting two or more records of the same type, it is possible to activate/deactivate the PM measures
of all the selected NE’s at the same.

3. Select Actions > View/Modify PM Status.

4. To activate:
• All the PM measures of all the NE of the same type selected in the map, select Action > Start
> All.
• The measures relevant to the measure points in the Termination Point area select Action >
Start > Filtered.
• The measures relevant to the measure points selected in the Termination Point area, select Ac-
tion > Start > Selected.
To deactivate:
• All the PM measures of all the NE of the same type selected in the map, select the Action >
Stop > All.
• The measures relevant to the measure points in the Termination Point area, select Action >
Stop > Filtered.
• The measures relevant to the measure points selected in the Termination Point area, select Ac-
tion > Stop > Selected.
In the area Message, the result of the operation is displayed.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 217


Update the equipment software

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Operation available only if a single equipment (except for ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALFO) has
been selected.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command can be done in ALplus nodal window/
ALCplus2 nodal window.

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .

2. Select the equipment.


Selecting two or more records of the same type, it is possible to execute the operation for all the pieces
of equipment at the same type.

3. Select Actions > NE Sw/Fw Download.

4. Set the file you wish to use for the update in the Selection file DWL box.
It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or press Select (the Select file for download
window opens) and select the file among the available ones.
If the file you wish to use for the operation is not in the /home/ftp/pub directory, it is necessary to copy
it in this directory as NMS needs, in order to execute correctly the download operation, to find the file
for the update in the /home/ftp/pub directory.
Press Read to display a brief description illustrating the content of the selected file.

5. Set the type of download you wish to execute. Select the option:
• Forced, to update the software of the equipment controller.
• Only different or not present, to update the software of peripheral units (FPGA file and/or oper-
ating code).

6. Activate the Bench switch? box if you wish that, at the end of the download, a switching of the memory
bench is automatically executed in order to use the bench with the updated software.

7. Set the execution modality of the download. If you wish that the update is:
• Immediately executed, activate the Immediate Download box.
The box can be activated only if a single NE is selected.
• Scheduled to be executed in a second moment, set the date/time in the Scheduling data time
for Download area.

8. Press Start Dwl.


If, in the previous step, has been:
• Activated the Immediate Download box, a window opens where the physical address, logic ad-
dress and the type of NE which is updating the software, and the status of the operation (Wait-
ing, Downloading, Complete, etc.) are displayed.
The operation takes some minutes.
Before starting the update of the NE controller, it executes a compatibility check between the
software that must be sent and the one on the controller itself.
The check consists in verifying the technology and the type of NE (indicated by the first 2 char-
acters of the file name). For some types of NE’s, checks are executed also on the 3rd character
of the filename. More information is reported in the equipment User Manual relevant to the spe-
cific type of NE.
If the parameters are compatible, the download starts. Otherwise, the software update will not
be executed.
If the operation is successful, opening the RelSw window, in the Release box relevant to the up-
dated memory bench, the new version of the software is displayed.
If it is not successful, the Status box relevant to the updated memory bench displays the old
version or the wording not loaded.
• Set a date/time of execution for the software update, the Software Download window is closed.
One record for every NE in the Equipment list for download area is added in the list of the sched-
uled equipment for the download.

218 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Update the equipment software (FAMxc)

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens.
2. Select the FAMxc equipment.
Selecting two or more records of the FAMxc type, it is possible to execute the operation for all the NE’s
at the same type.

3. Select Actions > FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download.

4. In the File Selection box, set the file you wish to use for the update.
It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or press Browse (the fileSelection... window
opens) and select the file among the available ones.
If the file you wish to use for the operation is not in the home/tftpdir directory, it is necessary to copy
it in this directory because NMS needs, in order to execute correctly the download operation, to find
the file for the update in the home/tftpdir directory.

5. Set the date/time, when you wish to schedule the operation, in the Date/Time Scheduled for Download
box.

6. Activate the Switch Bench and Restart box if you wish that, at the end of the download, a switch of the
memory bench and a restart of the equipment are executed.
The setting is valid for all the pieces of equipment in the Equipment List area. If you wish to execute a
different setting for one piece of equipment of the list:

a. Select the equipment.

b. Select Action > Bench Info.


c. Activate/deactivate the Switch Bench and Restart box as you wish.

d. Press Ok.
The wording Modified (Equipment List area) is displayed in the record of the selected equipment.
During the execution of the operation for the selected equipment, the setting of the Switch Bench and
Restart parameter in the Insert window will not be considered; instead, the setting of the same param-
eter if the Equipment Bench Releases window will be considered.

7. If enabled, type the access code of the equipment in the Password box.
If the Superuser has defined the equipment password in the configuration file of the system, it is not
necessary to insert the code to access the equipment. It is sufficient to activate the Password Default
box.
The set password is valid for all the equipment in the Equipment List area. If a piece of equipment has
a different password, it is necessary to set in the following way:

a. Select equipment.

b. Select Action > Bench Info.

c. Type the equipment access code in the Password box.

d. Press Ok.
The wording Modified (Equipment List area) is displayed in the record of the selected equipment.
During the execution of the operation for the selected equipment, the setting of the Switch Bench and
Restart parameter in the Insert window will not be considered; instead, the setting of the same param-
eter if the Equipment Bench Releases window will be considered.

8. Press OK.
The Software Download window is closed.
One record is added for every NE in the Equipment List to the list of equipment scheduled for the down-
load.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 219


Verify/change the status/severity of the alarms and the trap forwarding status

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Operation available only if a single equipment (except for ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc) has been
selected.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command can be done in ALplus nodal window/
ALCplus2 nodal window.

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .

2. Select the equipment.

3. Select Actions > Equipment Severity Code.


The Equipment Severity Code window displays the list of the alarms relevant to the selected equipment.
For each alarm, the status (enabled/disabled), the transmission status of the relevant trap from the NE
to NMS and the local severity level of the alarm are displayed.
The list does not contain the alarms of the user inputs, which have a different Alarm severity manage-
ment.

4. To change the characteristics of an alarms double click on the wished alarm or select the alarm and
then Action > View/Modify Severity.
The View/Modify Severity Code window displays in the box/area:
• Alarm Description. Name of the alarm.
• Status. Status of the alarm and of the trap sending by the NE to the system. If active the option:
• Enabled, the alarm and the sending of trap is enabled.
• Trap Disabled, the sending of trap is disabled.
• Alarm Disabled, the alarm is disabled.
• Severity. Severity level associated to the alarm.
The label (NMS5LX default) indicates the default setting associated to that alarm by NMS.

5. To change the enabling status of alarm/trap sending and/or the severity level, select the push-button
relevant to the wished value respectively in the Status and/or Severity area.
If the Alarm Disabled option is selected (Status area), the severity level associated to the alarm cannot
be changed.

6. Press Modify.
The possible modification of the enabling status of alarm/trap sending is displayed in the Equipment
Severity Code window.

Verify/change the LCT users list of the equipment

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Operation available only if a single equipment (except for ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc) has been
selected.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command can be done in ALplus nodal window/
ALCplus2 nodal window.

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .


2. Select the equipment.

3. Select Actions > LCT Equipment Users.


If the selected equipment is:
• of type ALFOplus80HD, the NE User Manager window is displayed and the procedures to change
the list of the LCT users are the same displayed in the following paragraphs:
Add a user
Modify a user
Delete a user

220 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


• of all the other types, except for ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, the LCT User Manager window is dis-
played and the procedures to change the list of the LCT users are the same displayed in the
following paragraphs:
Add a user
Modify a user
Delete a user

Verify the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to the equipment

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Operation available only if a single equipment (except for ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc) has been
selected.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command can be done in ALplus nodal window/
ALCplus2 nodal window.
Functionality available only for equipment managed by SNMPv1/v2c protocol.

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .

2. Select the equipment.

3. Select View > LCT Logged Users.


The Logged Users window displays the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to the NE when
the command is selected.

Verify the reach ability of the equipment (Line Test)

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .


2. Select the equipment.

3. Select Commands > Line Test.


The Command Scope area of the LINE TEST command window displays the selected NE’s for which the
operation will be executed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and
type.
To delete one or more NE’s from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NE’s according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes in the Filter On Type area.

4. Press Execute.
Another LINE TEST command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of:
• Address column. Logic address.
• Type column. Type of NE.
• Status column. Result of the operation:
• OK. The operation was successful.
• FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, press Stop to stop the procedure. For example, if the execution of the operation
has been required for ten NE’s, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the
next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the sys-
tem will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will dis-
play only the first two NE’s.
To print the displayed information, press Print.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 221


Connect one or more pieces of equipment

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .

2. Select the equipment.

3. Select Commands > Connect.


The Command Scope area of the CONNECT command window displays the selected NE’s for which the
operation will be executed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and
type.
To delete one or more NE’s from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NE’s according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes in the Filter On Type area.

4. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NE’s in disconnected or unreachable status.
Another CONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
• Address column. Logic address.
• Type column. Type of NE.
• Status column. Result of the operation:
• OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from brown it
becomes green, light blue, yellow, orange or red depending on the severity of the NE
alarms.
• FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, press Stop to stop the procedure. For example, if the execution of the operation
has been required for ten NE’s, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the
next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the sys-
tem will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will dis-
play only the first two NE’s.
To print the displayed information, press Print.

Disconnect one or more pieces of equipment

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .

2. Select the equipment.

3. Select Commands > Disconnect.


The Command Scope area of the DISCONNECT command window displays the selected NE’s for which
the operation will be executed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address
and type.
To delete one or more NE’s from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NE’s according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes in the Filter On Type area.

4. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NE’s in connected or unreachable status.
Another DISCONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
• Address field, logic address.
• Type field, type of NE.
• Status field, result of the operation:
• OK, the operation was successful: the NE symbol changes colour from the current colour
to brown.
• FAILED! ...., the operation is failed: a message is displayed among brackets explaining
the cause of the failure.
During the operation, press Stop to stop the procedure. For example, if the execution of the operation
has been required for ten NE’s, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the

222 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the sys-
tem will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will dis-
play only the first two NE’s.
To print the displayed information, press Print.

Re-align the alarms of one or more pieces of equipment

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .

2. Select the equipment.

3. Select Commands > Alarm Re-alignment.


In the Command Scope area of the ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window, the selected NE’s, for
which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in
order: logic address and type.
To delete one or more NE’s from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NE’s according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes in the Filter On Type area.

4. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NE’s in connected status.
Another ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
• Address column. Logic address.
• Type column. Type of NE.
• Status column. Result of the operation:
• OK. The operation was successful.
• FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, press Stop to stop the procedure. For example, if the execution of the operation
has been required for ten NE’s, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the
next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the sys-
tem will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will dis-
play only the first two NE’s.
To print the displayed information press Print.

Acquire the configuration of one or more pieces of equipment

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .

2. Select the equipment.


3. Select Commands > Configuration Upload.
In the Command Scope area of the UPLOAD command window, the selected NE’s, for which the oper-
ation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic ad-
dress and type.
To delete one or more NE’s from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NE’s according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes in the Filter On Type area.

4. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NE’s in connected status.
Another UPLOAD command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
• Address column. Logic address.
• Type column. Type of NE.
• Status column. Result of the operation:

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 223


• OK. The operation was successful.
• FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, press Stop to stop the procedure. For example, if the execution of the operation
has been required for ten NE’s, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the
next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the sys-
tem will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will dis-
play only the first two NE’s.
To print the displayed information press Print.

Transfer the configuration of the equipment to another equipment of the same type

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Operation available only if a single equipment (except for ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc) has been
selected.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command can be done in ALplus nodal window/
ALCplus2 nodal window.

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .

2. Select the equipment .


3. Select Commands > Configuration Download.

4. Depending on the operation you wish to execute, follow (from the step 3) the procedure:
Transfer the configuration of equipment to one or more real pieces of equipment
Transfer the configuration of equipment to one or more virtual pieces of equipment

Start the Command Executor application

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .

2. Select the equipment for which you wish to execute the series of SNMP commands stored on file.

3. Select Commands > Command Executor.


If the message No Command available for the selected equipment is displayed, NMS is not provided,
for the selected equipment type, with files containing the sequences of SNMP commands. SIAE MICRO-
ELETTRONICA provides, on demand, files containing specific sequences of SNMP commands.
4. In the Select Command area, select the wished action.

5. Press Start Command Executor.

6. Press Start Command.


In the Message area, the progress of the operations is displayed.
It is possible to stop the procedure pressing OK in the Command Executor window displayed at the
activation of the operation.

224 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window

If the profile of the user who has selected the command is:
• Superuser, the information is referred to the equipment in ALL the map managed by NMS.
• Entry, Normal, Advanced or Privileged, the information is referred ONLY to the equipment in the
open map.

At the opening of the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, it is possible that a warning window opens,
indicating that the database contains a number of pieces of equipment higher than N.

For this cause, the user is asked if he wishes that the information about the active measures of PM is made
available (operation that can take a lot of time). Press:
• Yes, the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens and, for each NE in the list, it will be
possible to verify the activation status of the PM measures (Perf. column).
• No, the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens, but the information relevant to the ac-
tive measures of PM will be not available.

The N limit is, by default, 100. The value can be changed by the Superuser.

Parameters
Logical Addr. Logical address of the equipment.
Type. Type of equipment.
Status. Status of the connection between equipment and NMS.
Alarm. Operating status (alarms) of the equipment. The severity level of the alarm on the
equipment is displayed. In case of more alarms with different severity, the highest severity is
displayed.
Alr Disabled. Enabling status of the alarms and of the sending of the equipment traps to NMS:
• X. At least an alarm or the sending of the equipment trap is disabled. To verify the disa-
bled alarms and the disabled sending of traps, open the Equipment Severity Code win-
dow.
• –. The equipment has not alarms or sending of traps disabled.
Lct Presence. Status of the connection between the LCT program and the equipment:
• ABSENT. The LCT user is not currently connected to the equipment.
• CONFIGURING. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Configuration modality.
• MONITORING. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Monitoring modality.
Lct Config. Enabling status of the LCT for the possible connection to the equipment:
• Enabled. The LCT user can activate the connection to the equipment both in Monitoring
and in Configuration modality.
• Disabled. The LCT user can activate the connection to the equipment only in Monitoring
modality.
Perf. Activation status of the Performance Monitoring (PM) measures:
• X. At least one measure of PM is active.
• –. No measure of PM is active.
• . . . Information is not available. In the warning window, displayed at the opening of the
Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, the No push-button has been selected.
Ack. Acknowledge status of the following signals:
• Alarm (current and/or in the alarm history).
• Presence of LCT in Configuration modality.
• Operation of Configuration Upload not correctly executed.
Symbol:
• X. At least one not acknowledged signal is present.
• -. Not acknowledged signals are not present.
IP Address. IP address of the equipment. The wording VIRTUAL EQ. indicates that the record
refers to a virtual NE.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 225


Status bar
xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If no filter is ac-
tive, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records.
Filter. Activation of one or more filters.
Timestamp. Date and time when the window has been opened/updated.

Menu bar
File > Print/Save. It prints or saves to file the information.
File > Close. It closes the window.
Actions > Open Equipment. It opens the equipment window.
Actions > Equipment Info. It displays the configuration/operation status of the equipment.
Actions > Refresh Info. It updates the information contained in the window.
Actions > Performance Monitoring. It displays the results of the PM measures of one NE.
Actions > View/Modify PM Status. It activates/deactivates one or more PM measures at the
same time.
Actions > Cfg File Download. It allows to Download a configuration file on pieces of equip-
ment of the same type.
Actions > Add Physical Link. It creates a physical link between the two selected NE’s.
Actions > NE Sw/Fw Download. It updates the equipment software.
Actions > FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download. It updates the equipment software (FAMxc).
Actions > Equipment Severity Code. It displays/changes the status/severity of the alarms
and the status of the trap sending of the equipment.
Actions > LCT Equipment User. It displays/changes the LCT user list of the equipment.
Actions > Location. It adds/removes a prefix to the logic address of the equipment.
Actions > Map Structure Rebuild. It deletes and rewrites the table containing the information
relevant to the equipment in the map (equipment table).
Commands > Line Test. It verifies the real reach ability of the equipment.
Commands > Connect. It activates the connection between NMS and the equipment.
Commands > Disconnect. It deactivates the connection between NMS and equipment.
Commands > Alarm Re-alignment. It forces the acquisition of the equipment alarms.
Commands > Configuration Upload. It forces the acquisition of the equipment configuration.
Commands > Configuration Download. It transfers the configuration of the equipment to
another NE of the same type.
Commands > Communication Server Board. It activates/deactivates the connection be-
tween NMS and CommServer-S equipment (CS objects).
Commands > Command Executor. Executes series of SNMP commands stored to file.
View > Set Filter. It filters the list according to specific criteria.
View > Acknowledge Status. It displays the acknowledge status of the alarms (current and/
or alarm history), of the presence of LCT in Configuration modality and of the not correctly ex-
ecuted Configuration Upload operation.
View > Equipment Location (Map). It lists the maps containing the symbol of selected NE.
View > LCT Logged Users. It displays the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to NE.
Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.
Help > About Application. Version of the module that manages the considered functionality.

The information corresponds to the characteristics/operating status of the equipment when the Equipment
Browser [List/Locate] window has been opened or updated. The presence of the - symbol indicates that
the information is not available as not meaningful for the status and/or the type of equipment, which is
referred to.

226 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Proxy Equipment List
System access | Read Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING The Proxy Agent function is optional. The function and the relevant command are available only
on customer’s demand.

The Proxy Equipment List command displays the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent and
their Proxy address.

Operations
Display the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent
Verify/change the Proxy configuration parameters of the equipment

GUI
Equipment Managed by Proxy window

Display the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Locate > Proxy Equipment List.


The Equipment Managed by Proxy window opens, where the list of the equipment managed by the
Proxy Agent is displayed.

Verify/change the Proxy configuration parameters of the equipment

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select Locate > Proxy Equipment List.

2. Select the wished equipment.


3. Select Actions > Modify Proxy Parameters.
The Modify Proxy Parameters window displays the parameters:
• Equipment Proxy Address. Address used by the Proxy Agent to “acknowledge” the equipment.
• Primary IP Address Trap Destination. Address of the machine to which the Proxy Agent forwards
the traps coming from the equipment.
• Secondary IP Address Trap Destination. Address of an additional machine to which the Proxy
Agent forwards the traps coming from the equipment.

4. To change one or more parameter, type the new value in the relevant boxes.
If a NE of type ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node is selected, the addresses used by Proxy Agent to rec-
ognize the equipment belonging to the node are automatically configured.

5. Press Apply.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 227


Equipment Managed by Proxy window

The information correspond to the characteristics of the equipment at the selection of the command.

For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system
is displayed. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
• <node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object).
• <node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value between 1 and 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

Parameters
Logical Addr. Logic address of the equipment.
Eq. Type. Type of equipment.
Eq. Proxy Addr. Address of equipment acknowledged by the Proxy Agent: Proxy address of the
equipment (parameter defined by the user during the creation phases of the equipment - Add).

Status bar
View equipment. Activation of the filter. In detail, if the active check-box is:
• Managed by Proxy Agent, the window displays the equipment managed by Proxy Agent.
• Not Managed by Proxy Agent, the window displays the equipment not managed by the
Proxy Agent.
• Managed by Proxy Agent and Not Managed by Proxy Agent, the window displays all the
equipment.
xx of yy. Number of the displayed records and number of total records (xx of yy). If no filter is
active, the number of the displayed records corresponds to the total number of records.

Menu bar
File > Close. It closes the window.
Actions > Refresh. It refreshes the information in the window.
Actions > Modify Proxy Parameters. It displays/changes the Proxy configuration parameters
of the selected equipment.
Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.

228 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Physical Link Browser
System access | Read Only, Read–Write
User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING Optional command, available only on Customer’s demand.

The Physical Link List command displays the list of the physical links among the NE’s of a network.
This functionality works on a rigid tree network structure organized on a maximum of two container levels
and allows understanding how the NE’s in the different maps (or in the same map) are connected.

Operations
Display the list of the physical links relevant to a NE or to a container
Change the name of a physical link
Delete a physical link
Find one of the NE’s end of the physical link
Filter the display of the physical link list

GUI
Physical Link Browser window

Display the list of the physical links relevant to a NE or to a container

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select a NE or a container in the map.


2. Select Locate > Physical Link Browser.
The Physical Link Browser window is displayed.

Change the name of a physical link

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING The command is available only if the user has selected a NE or a container in the map.

1. Select a NE or a container in the map.

2. Select Locate > Physical Link Browser.

3. Select the row corresponding to the link you wish to change.

4. Select Options > Modify.

5. Type the new label in the Link Label field for the selected link.

6. Press Update Label.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 229


Delete a physical link

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

WARNING This operation deletes only the physical link at list level. It does not delete a possible graphic
link between the NE’s and has no impact on the traffic among NE’s.

1. Select a NE or a container in the map.

2. Select Locate > Physical Link Browser.


The command is available only if the user has selected a NE or a container in the map.

3. Select the row corresponding to the link you wish to delete.

4. Select Options > Delete Link.

5. Press Ok.

Find one of the NE’s end of the physical link

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select a NE or a container in the map.

2. Select Locate > Physical Link Browser.


The command is available only if the user has selected a NE or a container in the map.
3. Select:
• Options > Find Equipment > Source, to bring in foreground (or open, if closed) the map win-
dow containing the NE source of the link.
• Options > Find Equipment > Destination, to bring in foreground (or open, if closed) the map
window containing the NE destination of the link.
The NE considered “link source” is the one selected as first during the creation of the link itself.
The NE considered “link destination” is the one selected as second during the creation of the link itself.

Filter the display of the physical link list

System access | Read Only, Read–Write


User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

1. Select a NE or a container in the map.

2. Select Locate > Physical Link Browser.


The command is available only if the user has selected a NE or a container in the map.

3. Select View > Filter.


The list of the links can be filtered on the basis of one or more criteria, corresponding to the column of
the Physical Link Browser window.
4. To activate a filter criterion, select the check-box next to the criterion itself.
A text box is displayed, where the user can type the string to use for the filter. It is possible to use the
character asterisk (*) as jolly character.
The function executes the logic AND of all the activated criteria, displaying only the rows which match
all the selected filter criteria.
Press next to a filter criterion to close the text box without deactivating the set criterion. Press
to display the text box again.
Deselect the check-box next to a filter criterion to close the text box and deactivate the set criterion.

5. Press OK.

230 NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001


Physical Link Browser window

If the user has selected:


• a container, the window displays the list of all the physical links relevant to all the NE’s in the
selected container and in the possible containers of lower or upper level (the maximum depth
of the examined network structure is two level).
• a NE, the window displays the list of all the physical links relevant to the selected NE (even to
the NE’s in the containers of lower or upper level, for a maximum depth of two levels).

Parameters
Link Name. Label of the link generated during the creation of the physical link.
Link Type. Type of the corresponding physical link:
• Radio, connection between two radio channels.
• E1, connection between two E1 channels.
• ETH, connection between two Ethernet LAN ports.
• STM-1, connection between two STM-1 streams.
• nBus, connection between two TDM or Ethernet nodal buses.
Source Equipment. IP address of the first NE selected during the link creation.
Source Port. Port of the source NE used in the link.
Destination Equipment. IP address of the second NE selected during the link creation.
Destination Port. Port of the destination NE used in the link.

Status bar
xx of yy. Number of displayed links and number of total links (xx of yy). If no filter is active,
the number of displayed links corresponds to the number of total links.

Menu bar
File > Close. It closes the window.
Edit > Link Properties. It allows changing the name of the link.
Edit > Delete Link. It deletes the selected link.
Options > Find Equipment > Source. It brings in foreground (opens the window, if closed)
the NE source of the selected link.
Options > Find Equipment > Destination. It brings in foreground (opens the window, if
closed) the NE destination of the selected link.
View > Filter. It filters the list of the physical links.

NMS5LX 6.6.1 - MN.00331.E - 001 231


Filter window

The window allows filtering the display of the links present in the system maps.

Parameters
Match Link Name. Select this box to filter the list of the links by the link name. Type in the
text box the name (or part of it) which the link must have to be displayed in the list. It is possible
to use the jolly character asterisk (*).
Match Equipment/Port. Select this box to filter the list of the links by IP address/port of the
NE’s belonging to the link.
Equipment. IP address which the NE must have so that the link is displayed in the list.
Port. Port of the NE which must belong to the link so that the link is displayed in the list.
Source/Destination. The filter considers both the source NE’s and the destination NE’s of
the link.
Source Only. The filter considers only the source NE’s.
Destination Only. The filter considers only the destination NE’s.
Match Link Type. Select this box to filter the list of the links by link type. The list will display
the links of the selected type:
Radio. Connection between two radio channels.
E1. Connection between two E1 channels.
ETH. Connection between two Ethernet LAN ports.
STM-1. Connection between two STM-1 streams.
nBus. Connection between two TDM or Ethernet nodal bus.
Match Link on Map. Select this option push-button to filter the list of the links by the map con-
taining the NE’s constituting the link’s ends. Depending on the selected push-button, the boxes
below display the available maps.
NMS5 Map. The NE’s ends of the link are within a NMS map.
PSM Map. The NE’s ends of the link are within a Packet Service Manager map.
Ring Manager Map. The NE’s ends of the link are within a Ring Manager map.

Push-buttons
Add. Select a map in the right box of the Match Link on Map